Handleiding Infiniti M - 2013 (pagina 9 van 522) (Engels)

617782

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/522

Pagina verder

2013 Inﬁniti M Owner’s Manual

Printing: April 2012 (08) / OM3E 0Y51U0 / Printed in U.S.A.

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2013 Inﬁniti M

Your INFINITI represents a new way of

thinking about vehicle design. It integrates

advanced engineering and superior crafts-

manship with a simple, refined aesthetic

sensitivity associated with traditional Ja-

panese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxury

and beauty. The car itself is important, but

so is the sense of harmony that the vehicle

evokes in its driver, and the sense of

satisfaction you feel with the INFINITI —

from the way it looks and drives to the high

level of retailer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI to

the fullest, we encourage you to read this

Owner’s Manual immediately. It explains

all of the features, controls and perfor-

mance characteristics of your INFINITI; it

also provides important instructions and

safety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

is included in your Owner’s literature

portfolio. The INFINITI Service and Main-

tenance Guide explains details about

maintaining and servicing your vehicle.

Always carry it with you when you take

your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer. The

Warranty Information Booklet contents

provide complete information about all

warranties covering this vehicle, the re-

quirements to keep the warranties in effect

as well as the INFINITI Roadside Assis-

tance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care

and Lemon Law Information Booklet will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s

lemon law.

In addition to factory installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed by INFINITI

or by your INFINITI retailer prior to delivery.

It is important that you familiarize yourself

with all disclosures, warnings, cautions

and instructions concerning proper use of

such accessories prior to operating the

vehicle and/or accessory. Please see an

INFINITI retailer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your

vehicle is equipped.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements, assisting you in the safe

operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMIN-

DERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help

ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you

and your passengers!

. NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

. ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

. ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle features

or taking other actions that could dis-

tract you.

. ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen

children should be seated in the rear

seat.

Foreword

. ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

. ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual for

important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In addition,

damage or performance problems result-

ing from modification will not be covered

under the INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

options available on this model. Therefore,

you may find some information that does

not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at

the time of printing. INFINITI reserves the

right to change specifications or design at

any time without notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this

manual. They are used in the following

ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moderate

personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures

must be followed carefully.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do

not do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above

in an illustration, it means the arrow points

to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

those above call attention to an item in the

illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects

or other reproductive harm. In addition,

certain fluids contained in vehicles and

certain products of component wear contain

or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects

or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

SORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium

batteries, may contain perchlorate materi-

al. The following advisory is provided:

“Perchlorate Material - special handling

may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Bluetooth

is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to Visteon Cor-

poration and Clarion Co., Ltd.

Gracenote

is a registered tra-

demark of Gracenote, Inc. The

Gracenote logo and logo type,

and the “Powered by Gracenote”

logo are trademarks of Grace-

note.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires

subscription, sold separately.

Not available in Alaska, Hawaii

or Guam. For more information,

visit www.siriusxm.com.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, mechan-

ical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,

without the prior written permission of

Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

INFINITI CARES ...

Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

INFINITI retailer are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide INFINITI directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact our (INFINITI’s) Consumer Affairs De-

partment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-662-6200

For Canadian customers

1-800-361-4792

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

. Your name, address, and telephone

number

. Vehicle identification number (on dash

panel)

. Date of purchase

. Current odometer reading

. Your INFINITI retailer’s name

. Your comments or questions

You can write to INFINITI with the informa-

tion on the left at:

For U.S. customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

INFINITI Division

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.

com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.infinitiUSA.com (for U.S. customer) or

www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and

thank you for buying a quality INFINITI

vehicle.

Illustrated table of contents

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

Table of

Contents

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)....................................................... 0-2

Exterior front ....................................................... 0-4

Exterior rear......................................................... 0-4

Passenger compartment ...................................... 0-5

Cockpit ................................................................ 0-6

Instrument panel................................................. 0-8

Meters and gauges ............................................. 0-9

Engine compartment ......................................... 0-10

VK56VD engine............................................ 0-10

VQ37VHR engine ......................................... 0-11

Warning and indicator lights ............................. 0-12

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

SSI0715

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-39)

2. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bags (P.1-39)

3. Seat belts (P.1-12)

4. Head restraints (P.1-4)

5. Roof-mounted curt ain side-impact

supplemental air bags (P.1-39)

6. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P.1-35)

7. Occupant classification sensor (pat-

tern sensor) (P.1-44)

8. Front seats (P.1-3)

9. Seat belts with pretensioners (P.1-51)

10. Rear seats

— Child restraints (P.1-21)

11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P.1-23)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

SSI0686

1. Hood (P.3-18)

2. Headlight and turn signal

— Operation (P.2-34)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-31)

3. Windshield wiper and washer

— Operation (P.2-32)

— Maintenance (P.8-24)

4. Moonroof (P.2-55)

5. Power windows (P.2-53)

6. Recovery hook (P.6-15)

7. Fog light (P.2-40)

8. Tires

— Wheel and tires (P.8-34, P.9-9)

— Flat tire (P.6-2)

— Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) (P.2-14, P.5-4)

9. Outside mirrors (P.3-26)

10. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)

— Remote keyless entry system

(P.3-14)

— Welcome light (P.2-58)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR FRONT

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0258X

1. Trunk

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-7)

— Remote keyless entry system

(P.3-14)

— Trunk lid (P.3-18)

2. High-mounted stop light (P.8-31)

3. Rear combination light (bulb replace-

ment) (P.8-31)

4. Satellite antenna (P.4-49)

5. Rear window defroster (P.2-34)

6. Sonar system (if so equipped) (P.5-93)

7. Rear view camera (P.4-27)

8. Fuel-filler door

— Operation (P.3-22)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-4)

9. Child safety rear door locks (P.3-6)

EXTERIOR REAR

JVC0292X

1. Rear sunshade (if so equipped)

(P.2-57)

2. Coat hooks (P.2-52)

3. Rear personal light (P.2-59)

4. Sun visors (P.3-25)

5. Power windows (P.2-53)

6. Moonroof switch (P.2-55)

7. Map light (P.2-59)

— Active noise control system

(P.5-106)

— SOS call switch* (If so equipped)

8. Sunglasses holder (P.2-49)

9. Inside rearview mirror

— Operation (P.3-26)

— HomeLink

(P.2-61)

10. Trunk pass-through/Rear armrest

(P.1-10)

11. Rear cup holders (P.2-48)

12. Rear pocket (P.2-52)

13. Console box

— Power outlet (P.2-47)

— USB input operation (P.4-71)

— iPod

player operation (P.4-81)

14. Front cup holders (P.2-48)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0259X

1. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-39)

2. AFS switch (if so equipped) (P.2-37)

3. Headlight, fog light and turn signal

switch (P.2-34)

4. Trip computer switch (P.2-26)

5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip od-

ometer (P.2-7)

6. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P.2-32)

7. Selector lever (P.5-14)

8. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P.5-100)

9. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-57)

10. Steering heater switch (if so

equipped) (P.2-41)

11. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-19)

12. Sonar system off switch (if so

equipped) (P.5-93)

13. Warning systems switch (if so

equipped) (P.5-23, P.5-32, P.5-82)

14. IBA OFF switch (if so equipped)

(P.5-86)

15. Electric tilting/telescopic steering

wheel lever (P.3-24)

16. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Menu control switch (models with

navigation system)/Audio tuning

switch (models without navigation

system) (P.4-84)

— BACK switch (models with naviga-

tion system) (P.4-84)

— TALK switch (P.4-111)

— Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem (models with navigation system)

(P.4-86)

— Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone Sys-

COCKPIT

tem (models without navigation sys-

tem) (P.4-97)

— Volume control switch (P.4-84)

— Audio source switch (P.4-49)

17. Steering wheel

— Horn (P.2-41)

— Driver supplemental air bag

(P.1-39)

— Heated steering wheel (if so

equipped) (P.2-41)

18. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control switches (P.5-46)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P.5-48)

— Dynamic driver assistance switch

(if so equipped) (P.5-23, P.5-32,

P.5-70)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

JVC0291X

1. Side ventilator (P.4-34)

2. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-16)

3. Meters and gauges (P.2-6)

4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-40)

5. Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch (P.2-34)

6. Center display (P.4-4)/Navigation sys-

tem* (if so equipped)

7. Clock (P.2-46)

8. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system* (if so

equipped)

— Vehicle information and setting

buttons (P.4-10)

— Audio system (P.4-49)

9. Automatic climate control system

(P.4-34)/Forest Air

system* (P.4-34)

10. Center ventilator (P.4-34)

11. Audio system (P.4-49)

12. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P.1-39)

13. Hood release handle (P.3-18)

14. Fuse box cover (P.8-26)

15. Parking brake

— Parking (P.5-19)

16. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-9)

17. Front passenger air bag status light

(P.1-46)

18. Climate controlled seat switch (if so

equipped) (P.2-43) or Seat heater

switch (if so equipped) (P.2-42)

19. Drive mode select switch (P.5-20)

20. Cigarette lighter and ashtray (P.2-47)

21. Glove box lid release handle (P.2-50)

22. Trunk release power cancel switch

(P.3-20)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

SIC4317

1. Tachometer (P.2-8)

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-10)

3. Speedometer (P.2-7)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P.2-8)

5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/

Odometer/twin trip odometer

(P.2-20)

6. Fuel gauge (P.2-9)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

METERS AND GAUGES

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

SDI2538

VK56VD ENGINE

1. Battery (P.8-19)

2. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-13)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-17)

5. Window washer fluid reservoir

(P.8-18)

6. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-16)

7. Air cleaner (P.8-22)

8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-11)

9. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-11)

10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-13)

11. Drive belts (P.8-21)

12. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

SDI2537

VQ37VHR ENGINE

1. Battery (P.8-19)

2. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-13)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-17)

5. Window washer fluid reservoir

(P.8-18)

6. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-16)

7. Air cleaner (P.8-22)

8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-11)

9. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-11)

10. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-13)

11. Drive belts (P.8-21)

12. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-26)

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

light*

2-11

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

2-11

Automatic Transmission check

warning light

2-11

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/

Blind Spot Intervention (BSI)

system warning light (orange)*

2-12

Brake warning light 2-11

Charge warning light 2-12

Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system warning light (orange)*

2-12

Engine oil pressure warning

light

2-13

4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS)

warning light*

2-13

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system warning light (orange)*

2-13

Lane departure warning light

(orange)*

2-13

Low tire pressure warning light 2-14

Master warning light 2-15

Warning

light

Name Page

Preview Function warning light

(orange)*

2-15

Seat belt warning light and

chime

2-15

Supplemental air bag warning

light

2-16

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light

2-16

Indicator

light

Name Page

Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) off indicator light*

2-16

Automatic Transmission (AT)

position indicator light

2-17

Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) ON

indicator light

(green)*

2-17

ECO drive indicator light

2-17

Exterior light indicator 2-17

Front fog light indicator light

2-17

Front passenger air bag status

light

2-17

High beam indicator light

2-17

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off

indicator light*

2-17

Indicator

light

Name Page

Lane Departure Prevention

(LDP) ON indicator light (green)*

2-18

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

2-18

Security indicator light 2-19

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

2-19

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light

2-19

*: if so equipped

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system

Seats................................................................... 1-2

Front seats ...................................................... 1-3

Head restraints................................................ 1-4

Adjustable headrests....................................... 1-8

Armrest ......................................................... 1-10

Seat belts.......................................................... 1-12

Precautions on seat belt usage ..................... 1-12

Pregnant women ........................................... 1-14

Injured persons ............................................. 1-14

Pre-crash seat belts with comfort function

(front seats) (if so equipped) ......................... 1-14

Three-point type seat belt ............................. 1-15

Seat belt extenders ....................................... 1-18

Seat belt maintenance................................... 1-18

Child safety ....................................................... 1-19

Infants........................................................... 1-20

Small children ............................................... 1-20

Larger children .............................................. 1-20

Child restraints.................................................. 1-21

Precautions on child restraints ...................... 1-21

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

System (LATCH) ............................................. 1-23

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH................................................. 1-24

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts..................................... 1-27

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH................................................. 1-29

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts..................................... 1-31

Installing top tether strap ............................ 1-35

Booster seats .............................................. 1-36

Supplemental restraint system.......................... 1-39

Precautions on supplemental

restraint system........................................... 1-39

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)................................................. 1-44

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag systems ..................... 1-49

Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats).... 1-51

Supplemental air bag warning labels........... 1-52

Supplemental air bag warning light ............. 1-52

Repair and replacement procedure............... 1-53

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0133

WARNING

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be danger-

ous. The shoulder belt will not be

against your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and receive neck

or other serious injuries. You could also

slide under the lap belt and receive

serious internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly. See “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” later in this

section.

. Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly

activate switches or controls. Unat-

tended children could become involved

in serious accidents.

. The seatback should not be reclined

further than necessary for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure

not to contact any moving parts to avoid

possible injuries and/or damages.

SEATS

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips:

. The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 sec-

onds, then reactivate the switch.

. Do not operate the power seat switch

for a long period of time when the

engine is off. This will discharge the

battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion for the seat position memory function.

SSS1051

Forward and backward:

Moving the switch

forward or backward

will slide the seat forward or backward to

the desired position.

Reclining:

Move the recline switch

backward until

the desired angle is obtained. To bring the

seatback forward again, move the switch

forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on

seat belt usage” later in this section.) Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow

occupants to rest when the vehicle is

parked.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1052

Seat lifter:

Push the front or rear end of the switch up

or down to adjust the angle of the front

portion or height of the seat.

SSS1053

Lumbar support (if so equipped):

The lumbar support feature provides lower

back support to the driver.

Push the front or back end of the switch to

adjust the seatback lumbar area.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other vehi-

cle safety systems. They may provide addi-

tional protection against injury in certain

rear end collisions. Adjust the head re-

straints properly, as specified in this sec-

tion. Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach anything

to the head restraint stalks or remove the

head restraint. Do not use the seat if the

head restraint has been removed. If the

head restraint was removed, reinstall and

properly adjust the head restraint before an

occupant uses the seating position. Failure

to follow these instructions can reduce the

effectiveness of the head restraints. This

may increase the risk of serious injury or

death in a collision.

JVR0088X

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with head restraints. The

head restraints are adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

SSS0992

Components

1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalk

SSS0997

Adjustment

Adjust the head restraint so the center is

level with the center of your ears.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0993

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

SSS0994

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint down.

SSS0995

Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the

adjustable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest

position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the

seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly in a

secure place so it is not loose in the

vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint before an occupant uses the

seating position.

SSS0996

Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the

holes in the seat. Make sure that the

head restraint is facing the correct

direction. The stalk with the adjustment

notches

must be installed in the

hole with the lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint

before an occupant uses the seating

position.

SSS0508

Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward

utilizing the force that the seatback re-

ceives from the occupant in a rear-end

collision. The movement of the head

restraint helps support the occupant’s

head by reducing its backward movement

and helping absorb some of the forces that

may lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for

collisions at low to medium speeds in

which it is said that whiplash-type injury

occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

certain rear-end collisions. After the colli-

sion, the head restraints return to their

original positions.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly

as described earlier in this section.

ADJUSTABLE HEADRESTS

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement the

other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against injury

in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the

headrest properly, as specified in this

section. Check the adjustment after some-

one else uses the seat. Do not attach

anything to the adjustable headrest stalks

or remove the adjustable headrest. Do not

use the seat if the adjustable headrest has

been removed. If the adjustable headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly adjust

the headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position. Failure to follow these

instructions can reduce the effectiveness of

the adjustable headrests. This may increase

the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

JVR0089X

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with adjustable headrests.

Indicates the seating position is

equipped with an adjustable headrest.

SSS0992

Components

1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

SSS0997

Adjustment

Adjust the headrest so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

SSS0993

To raise the headrest, pull it up.

SSS0994

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the headrest down.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0995

Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the

adjustable headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest

position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly in a secure

place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the headrest

before an occupant uses the seating

position.

SSS0996

Install

1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure that the head-

rest is facing the correct direction. The

stalk with the adjustment notches

must be installed in the hole with the

lock knob

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an

occupant uses the seating position.

SSS1061

ARMREST

Rear armrest

Pull the armrest forward until it is hor-

izontal.

SSS0479

Trunk pass-through

The rear center seatback can be folded to

allow trunk access from inside of the

vehicle.

To access the trunk, pull down the rear

center armrest and pull out the trunk pass-

through lid

To lock the lid, use the mechanical key and

turn it to the LOCK position

. To unlock,

turn the mechanical key to the UNLOCK

position

. For the mechanical key usage,

see “Keys” in the “3. Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section.

Make sure that the mechanical key is

removed from the trunk pass-through lid

key cylinder before opening or closing the

lid. Otherwise the lid and the rear armrest

may be damaged.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on the

floor, your chances of being injured or

killed in an accident and/or the severity of

injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITI

strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you

drive, even if your seating position in-

cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0136A

SSS0134A

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

. Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat and, if appro-

priate, in a child restraint.

. The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the chance

or severity of injury in an accident.

Serious injury or death can occur if the

seat belt is not worn properly.

. Always route the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never

run the belt behind your back, under

your arm or across your neck. The belt

should be away from your face and neck,

but not falling off your shoulder.

. Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in an

accident.

. Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

. Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its effec-

tiveness.

. Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

. Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

. If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat

belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

. No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify

the seat belt, add material or install

devices that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may affect

the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious perso-

nal injury.

. Once a seat belt pretensioner has

activated, it cannot be reused and must

be replaced together with the retractor.

See an INFINITI retailer.

. Removal and installation of the preten-

sioner seat belt system components

should be done by an INFINITI retailer.

. All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware, should

be inspected after any collision by an

INFINITI retailer. INFINITI recommends

that all seat belt assemblies in use

during a collision be replaced unless

the collision was minor and the belts

show no damage and continue to oper-

ate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during a

collision should also be inspected and

replaced if either damage or improper

operation is noted.

. All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any

collision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations. The

child restraints should be replaced if

they are damaged.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0016

SSS0014

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant women

use seat belts. The seat belt should be

worn snug, and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips,

not the waist, and place the shoulder belt

over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your

abdominal area. Contact your doctor for

specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured persons

use seat belts, depending on the injury.

Check with your doctor for specific recom-

mendations.

PRE-CRASH SEAT BELTS WITH COM-

FORT FUNCTION (front seats) (if so

equipped)

The pre-crash seat belt tightens the seat

belt with a motor to help restrain front seat

occupants. This helps reduce the risk of

injury in a collision.

The motor retracts the seat belt under the

following emergency conditions:

. During emergency braking

. During sudden steering maneuvers

. Activation of the Intelligent Brake Assist

(IBA) system. (See “Intelligent Brake

Assist (IBA) system” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.)

The pre-crash seat belt will not be active

when:

. the seat belt is not fastened

. the vehicle speed is under 10 MPH (15

km/h) during emergency braking

. the vehicle speed is under 16 MPH (30

km/h) during sudden steering maneu-

vers.

The pre-crash seat belt will not be active

when the brake pedal is not depressed

except when sudden steering maneuvers

occur and the Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

system activates.

The motor also retracts the seat belt when

the seat belt is fastened or unfastened.

When the seat belt is fastened, the motor

tightens the seat belt for a snug fit. When

the seat belt is unfastened, the motor

retracts the seat belt. If the seat belt is not

fully retracted, the motor retracts the seat

belt when the door is opened.

Always wear your seat belt correctly and sit

upright and well back.

If the motor cannot retract the seat belt

when the seat belt is fastened or unfas-

tened, it may indicate the pre-crash seat

belt system has a malfunction. Have your

INFINITI retailer check and repair the

system.

When the seat belt is retracted repeatedly

in a short period of time, the motor may

not be able to retract the seat belt. After 30

seconds, the motor reactivates and retracts

the seat belt. If the seat belt still cannot be

retracted by the motor, the pre-crash seat

belt system has a malfunction. Have your

INFINITI retailer check and repair the

system.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

. Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times.

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the

seatback is reclined. This can be danger-

ous. The shoulder belt will not be

against your body. In an accident, you

could be thrown into it and receive neck

or other serious injuries. You could also

slide under the lap belt and receive

serious internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back in the

seat with both feet on the floor and

adjust the seat belt properly.

. Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes tight.

This can occur even if the vehicle is

parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release

the child. If the seat belt can not be

unbuckled or is already unbuckled,

release the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

SSS0292

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” earlier in

this section.)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the

retractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage.

The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

belt to move, and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack. Be

sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The three-point type seat belts have two

modes of operation:

. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers

some freedom of movement in the seat.

The ELR locks the seat belt when the

vehicle slows down rapidly or during

impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat

belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt

returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt

fully retracts. For additional information,

see “Child restraints” later in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is

activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position. If they are not com-

pletely secured, passengers may be injured

in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0326

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button

on the buckle. The seat belt automatically

retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

. When the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

. When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

. Grasp the shoulder belt and pull

forward quickly. The retractor should

lock and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check or if you have any question about

seat belt operation, see an INFINITI retailer.

SSS1084

Center of rear seat

Selecting correct set of seat belts:

The center seat belt buckle is identified by

the CENTER mark

. The center seat belt

tongue can be fastened only into the center

seat belt buckle.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0294A

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. (See

“Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in

this section.)

To adjust, push the button

, and then

move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position, so that the belt passes

over the center of the shoulder. The belt

should be away from your face and neck,

but not falling off of your shoulder. Release

the adjustment button to lock the shoulder

belt anchor into position.

WARNING

. After adjustment, release the adjustment

button and try to move the shoulder belt

anchor up and down to make sure it is

securely fixed in position.

. The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position,

it is not possible to properly fit the lap-

shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available that can be purchased.

The extender adds approximately 8 in (200

mm) of length and may be used for either

the driver or front passenger seating

position. See an INFINITI retailer for assis-

tance with purchasing an extender if an

extender is required.

WARNING

. Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should be

used with the INFINITI seat belts.

. Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

. Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured in a collision or a

sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

. To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution

recommended for cleaning upholstery

or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and

allow the seat belts to dry in the shade.

Do not allow the seat belts to retract

until they are completely dry.

. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

. Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors work properly. If

loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other

damage on the webbing is found, the

entire seat belt assembly should be

replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat

belts. Most seating positions are equipped

with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes

wrapped around a child’s neck with the ALR

mode activated, the child can be seriously

injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and

becomes tight. This can occur even if the

vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to

release the child. If the seat belt can not be

unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release

the child by cutting the seat belt with a

suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, includ-

ing doctors, teachers, government traffic

safety offices, and community organiza-

tions. Every child is different, so be sure to

learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child

restraint systems:

. Rear-facing child restraint

. Forward-facing child restraint

. Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be

placed in rear-facing child restraints. For-

ward-facing child restraints are available

for children who outgrow rear-facing child

restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a

vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who

can no longer use a forward-facing child

restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection.

The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit them

properly. The shoulder belt may come too

close to the face or neck. The lap belt may

not fit over their small hip bones. In an

accident, an improperly fitting seat belt

could cause serious or fatal injury. Always

use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved

child restraints for infants and small

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

CHILD SAFETY

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

children. See “Child restraints” later in this

section.

A child restraint may be secured in the

vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower

Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. See “Child

restraints” later in this section for more

information.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”

later in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

INFINITI recommends that infants be placed

in child restraints that comply with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a

rear-facing child restraint as long as

possible up to the height or weight limit

of the child restraint. Children who outgrow

the height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness. Refer to the

manufacturer’s instructions for minimum

and maximum weight and height recom-

mendations. INFINITI recommends that

small children be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehi-

cle Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and

always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they

reach the maximum height or weight limit

allowed by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-

facing child restraint, INFINITI recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper

seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly,

the booster seat should raise the child so

that the shoulder belt is properly posi-

tioned across the chest and the top,

middle portion of the shoulder. The

shoulder belt should not cross the neck

or face and should not fall off the shoulder.

The lap belt should lie snugly across the

lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdo-

men.

A booster seat can only be used in seating

positions that have a three-point type seat

belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle

seat and have a label cer tifying that it

complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. Once the child has

grown so the shoulder belt is no longer

on or near the face and neck, and the lap

belt can be positioned properly across the

lower hips or upper thighs use the seat

belt without the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat

and do not allow a child in the cargo area.

The child could be seriously injured or killed

in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0099

SSS0100

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-

STRAINTS

WARNING

. Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or other

passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

—

The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

—

Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

—

Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

—

INFINITI recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat. If you

must install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, see “For-

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ward-facing child restraint installa-

tion using the seat belts” later in this

section.

—

Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could

seriously injure or kill a child. A

rear-facing child restraint must only

be used in the rear seat.

—

Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

—

Child restraint anchor points are

designed to withstand loads from

child restraints that are properly

fitted.

—

Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts or harnesses.

—

A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

—

Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

—

Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while in the vehicle.

. When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or

collision, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating surface

and buckles before placing a child in the

child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system. Some child restraints

include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to these

anchors.

For details, see “Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH)” later

in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can

be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints

for infants and small children of various

sizes. When selecting any child restraint,

keep the following points in mind:

. Choose only a restraint with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

. Check the child restraint in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the

vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

. If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the

child restraint and check the various

adjustments to be sure the child

restraint is compatible with your child.

Choose a child restraint that is de-

signed for your child’s height and

weight. Always follow all recommended

procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child

restraints be secured to the designated

anchor point on the vehicle.

SSS0567

LATCH label location

Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren System (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special

anchor points that are used with the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

system compatible child restraints. This

system may also be referred to as the

ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With

this system, you do not have to use a

vehicle seat belt to secure the child

restraint.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of child

restraints could result in serious injury or

death of a child or other passengers in a

sudden stop or collision:

. Attach LATCH system compatible child

restraints only at the locations shown in

the illustration.

. Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using the

LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint

will not be secured properly.

. Inspect the lower anchors by inserting

your fingers into the lower anchor area.

Feel to make sure there are no obstruc-

tions over the anchors such as seat belt

webbing or seat cushion material. The

child restraint will not be secured

properly if the lower anchors are ob-

structed.

SSS0637

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear

of the seat cushion near the seatback. A

label is attached to the seatback to help

you locate the LATCH anchors.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0643

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments

that can be connected to anchors located

at certain seating positions in your vehicle.

With this system, you do not have to use a

vehicle seat belt to secure the child

restraint. Check your child restraint for a

label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the

instructions provided by the child restraint

manufacturer.

SSS0644

LATCH rigid attachment

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing child restraints with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments or

seat belts. (See “Installing top tether

strap” later in this section.)

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

SSS0791

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear

parcel shelf.

If you have any questions when installing

a top tether strap child restraint on the

rear seat, consult an INFINITI retailer for

details.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-

STALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-

tions before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

SSS0648

Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.

Check to make sure the LATCH attach-

ment is properly attached to the lower

anchors.

SSS0649

Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0639

Rear-facing — step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

SSS0650

Rear-facing — step 4

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the LATCH attach-

ment path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attach-

ment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the

LATCH attachment as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint or try installing

by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat steps

1 through 4.

SSS0100

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-

STALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when

installing a child restraint. Failure to use the

ALR mode will result in the child restraint

not being properly secured. The restraint

could tip over or be loose and cause injury

to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also,

it can change the operation of the front

passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this section.

SSS0100

Rear-facing — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” earlier in this section and

“Child restraints” earlier in this section

before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts

in the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the

seat. Always follow the restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0654

Rear-facing — step 2

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions

for belt routing.

SSS0655

Rear-facing — step 3

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat

belt retractor is in the Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint

mode). It reverts to the Emergency

Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when

the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0656

Rear-facing — step 4

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

SSS0657

Rear-facing — step 5

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

SSS0658

Rear-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the seat belt path.

The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to

see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the seat belt as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child

restraint is properly secured prior to

each use. If the seat belt is not locked,

repeat steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-

tions before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the LATCH

system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0645

Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower anchors.

Check to make sure the LATCH attach-

ment is properly attached to the lower

anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to the

tether anchor point. See “Installing top

tether strap” later in this section. Do

not install child restraints that require

the use of a top tether strap in seating

positions that do not have a top tether

anchor.

SSS0646

Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 3

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint

when the child restraint is removed.

See “Head restraints” earlier in this

section for head restraint adjustment

information.

If the seating position does not have an

head restraint and it is interfering with

the proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child

restraint.

SSS0647

Forward-facing — step 4

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

SSS0638

Forward-facing — step 6

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the LATCH attach-

ment path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),

from side to side. Try to tug it forward

and check to see if the LATCH attach-

ment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the

LATCH attachment as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat steps

1 through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when

installing a child restraint. Failure to use the

ALR mode will result in the child restraint

not being properly secured. The restraint

could tip over or be loose and cause injury

to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also,

it can change the operation of the front

passenger air bag. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this section.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0640

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) —

step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sec-

tions before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats or in the front

passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move the

seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, therefore,

must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint or headrest to obtain the

correct child restraint fit. If the head

restraint or headrest is removed, store

it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint or headrest when

the child restraint is removed. See

“Head restraints” earlier in this section

or “Adjustable headrests” earlier in this

section for head restraint or headrest

adjustment, removal and installation

information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

SSS0360B

Forward-facing — step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions

for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to the

tether anchor point (rear seat installa-

tion only). See “Installing top tether

strap” later in this section. Do not

install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating

positions that do not have a top tether

anchor.

SSS0651

Forward-facing — step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat

belt retractor is in the Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint

mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking

Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt

is fully retracted.

SSS0652

Forward-facing — step 5

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0653

Forward-facing — step 6

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

SSS0641

Forward-facing — step 8

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push

it from side to side while holding the

child restraint near the seat belt path.

The child restraint should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to

see if the belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the seat belt as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps

2 through 8.

SSS1085

Forward-facing — step 10

10.If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not

illuminated, see “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this

section. Move the child restraint to

another seating position. Have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

SSS0791

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seat

positions only) or the seat belt, as applic-

able.

1. Flip up the anchor cover from the

anchor point which is located directly

behind the child seat.

2. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint or headrest to position the top

tether strap over the top of the seat-

back. If the head restraint or headrest

is removed, store it in a secure place.

Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or

headrest when the child restraint is

removed.

See “Head restraints” earlier in this

section or “Adjustable headrests” ear-

lier in this section for head restraint or

headrest adjustment, removal and in-

stallation information.

Position the top tether strap over the

top of the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point on the rear parcel shelf.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint

installation procedure steps in this

section before tightening the tether

strap.

If you have any questions when installing

a top tether strap, consult your INFINITI

retailer for details.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured in

a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:

. Make sure the shoulder portion of the

belt is away from the child’s face and

neck and the lap portion of the belt does

not cross the stomach.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

. A booster seat must only be installed in

a seating position that has a lap/

shoulder belt.

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following points

in mind:

. Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

. Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the

vehicle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS0453

. Make sure the child’s head will be

properly supported by the booster seat

or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at

or above the center of the child’s ears.

For example, if a low back booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle seatback

must be at or above the center of the

child’s ears. If the seatback is lower

than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat

should be

used.

. If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the

booster seat and check the various

adjustments to be sure the booster

seat is compatible with your child.

Always follow all recommended proce-

dures.

LRS0464

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a

booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the

“Child safety”, “Child restraints” and

“Booster seats” sections earlier in this

section before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

in the rear seat or in the front passenger

seat:

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0640

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a forward-facing direc-

tion. Always follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0454

Front passenger position

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint or headrest to obtain the

correct booster seat fit. If the head

restraint or headrest is removed, store

it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint or headrest when

the booster seat is removed. See “Head

restraints” earlier in this section or

“Adjustable headrests” earlier in this

section for head restraint or headrest

adjustment, removal and installation

information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint or headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take up

extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is

positioned across the top, middle por-

tion of the child’s shoulder. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the seat belt

routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and

instructions for properly fastening a

seat belt shown in “Seat belts” earlier

in this section.

SSS1085

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, push the ignition

switch to the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

may

or may not illuminate depending on the

size of the child and the type of booster

seat used. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this

section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

section contains important information

concerning the driver and passenger front

impact supplemental air bags (INFINITI

Advanced Air Bag System), front seat-

mounted side-impact supplemental air

bag system, roof-mounted curtain side-

impact supplemental air bag and seat belt

with pretensioners.

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front passenger

in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can

help cushion the impact force to the chest

and pelvis area of the driver and front

passenger in certain side impact collisions.

The side air bag is designed to inflate on

the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can

help cushion the impact force to the head

of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side impact

collisions. The curtain air bags are de-

signed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are

designed to supplement the crash protec-

tion provided by the driver and passenger

seat belts and are not a substitute for

them. Seat belts should always be cor-

rectly worn and the occupant seated a

suitable distance away from the steering

wheel, instrument panel and door fin-

ishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this

section for instructions and precautions on

seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates. The supplemental air

bag warning light will turn off after about

7 seconds if the systems are operational.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0131B

SSS0132B

WARNING

. The supplemental front air bags ordina-

rily will not inflate in the event of a side

impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower

severity frontal collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

. The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this

section.

. The seat belts and the supplemental

front air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat with both feet on the floor. The

front air bags inflate with great force.

Even with the INFINITI advanced air bag

system, if you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of

position in any way, you are at greater

risk of injury or death in a crash. You

may also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the supplemental front air bag if

you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far-away as practical from the

steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always use the seat belts.

. The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

Advanced Air Bag System monitors the

severity of a collision and seat belt

usage then inflates the air bags as

needed. Failure to properly wear seat

belts can increase the risk or severity of

injury in an accident.

. The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(pattern sensor) that turns the front

passenger air bag OFF under some

conditions. This sensor is only used in

this seat. Failure to be properly seated

and wearing the seat belt can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident. See “Front passenger air bag

and status light” later in this section.

. Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk of injury if the front air bag inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0009

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0099

SSS0100

WARNING

. Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown in

the illustrations.

. Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

. Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System, never install a rear-facing child

restraint in the front seat. An inflating

front air bag could seriously injure or kill

your child. See “Child restraints” earlier

in this section for details.

SSS0059A

SSS0188A

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemen-

tal air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-

impact supplemental air bags:

. The front seat-mounted side-impact air

bags and roof-mounted curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various kinds

of accidents.

. The seat belts, side air bags and curtain

air bags are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the seat.

The side air bag and curtain air bag

inflate with great force. Do not allow

anyone to place their hand, leg or face

near the side air bag on the side of the

seatback of the front seat or near the

side roof rails. Do not allow anyone

sitting in the front seats or rear outboard

seats to extend their hand out of the

window or lean against the door. Some

examples of dangerous riding positions

are shown in the previous illustrations.

. When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the supplemental side air bag inflates,

you may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who should

always be properly restrained. Some

examples of dangerous riding positions

are shown in the illustrations.

. Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

supplemental side air bag inflation.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1086

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front air bag modules

(INFINITI Advanced Air Bags)

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bags

4. Occupant classification sensor (pat-

tern sensor)

5. Occupant classification system con-

trol unit

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bags

7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag inflators

8. Lap outer pretensioners (if so

equipped)

9. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

10. Satellite sensors

11. Seat belts with pretensioners

INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-

TEM (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is

designed to meet certification require-

ments under U.S. regulations. It is also

permitted in Canada. However, all of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

instrument panel above the glove box. The

front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although

they may inflate if the forces in another

type of collision are similar to those of a

higher severity frontal impact. They may

not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper front air bag

operation.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System has

dual stage air bag inflators. The system

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle switches and the occupant

classification sensor (pattern sensor). In-

flator operation is based on the severity of

a collision and seat belt usage for the

driver. For the front passenger, the occu-

pant classification sensor is also moni-

tored. Based on information from the

sensors, only one front air bag may inflate

in a crash, depending on the crash severity

and whether the front occupants are belted

or unbelted. Additionally, the front pas-

senger air bag may be automatically turned

OFF under some conditions, depending on

the information provided by the occupant

classification sensor. If the front passenger

air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status

light will be illuminated (if the seat is

unoccupied, the light will not be illumi-

nated, but the air bag will be off). (See

“Front passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section for further details.) One

front air bag inflating does not indicate

improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, contact an INFINITI retailer. If

you are considering modification of your

vehicle due to a disability, you may also

contact an INFINITI retailer. Contact infor-

mation is contained in the front of this

Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by release of

smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does

not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation

and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the head and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce

serious injuries. However, an inflating front

air bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far

as practical away from the steering wheel

or instrument panel. The front air bags

inflate quickly in order to help protect the

front occupants. Because of this, the force

of the front air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, the air bag module

during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The supplemental front air bags operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates. The supplemental air

bag warning light will turn off after about

7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1085

Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and status

light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some condi-

tions. Read this section carefully to learn

how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat

belt and child restraints is necessary for

most effective protection. Failure to follow

all instructions in this manual concerning

the use of seats, seat belts and child

restraints can increase the risk or severity

of injury in an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status light

is located on the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

"ON" position, the front passenger air bag

status light illuminates for about 7 sec-

onds and then turns off or operates

depending on the front passenger seat

occupied status. The light operates as

follows:

. Unoccupied passenger seat: The

OFF and the front passenger air bag is

OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

. Passenger seat occupied by a small

adult, child or child restraint as out-

lined in this section: The

illumi-

nates to indicate that the front

passenger air bag is OFF and will not

inflate in a crash.

. Occupied passenger seat and the pas-

senger meets the conditions outlined in

this section: The light

is OFF to

indicate that the front passenger air

bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below as permitted by U.S. regula-

tions. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air

bag and other air bags in your vehicle are

not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by

requiring the air bag to be automatically

turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor) is in the front passenger seat

cushion and is designed to detect an

occupant and objects on the seat. For

example, if a child is in the front passenger

seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is

designed to turn the passenger air bag

OFF in accordance with the regulations.

Also, if a child restraint of the type

specified in the regulations is on the seat,

the occupant classification sensor can

detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the passenger air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. For small adults it

may be turned OFF, however, if the

occupant does not sit in the seat properly

(for example, by not sitting upright, by

sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effective

protection by the seat belt and supple-

mental air bag.

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. INFINITI also recommends that appro-

priate child restraints and booster seats be

properly installed in a rear seat. If this is

not possible, the occupant classification

sensor is designed to operate as described

above to turn the front passenger air bag

OFF for specified child restraints. Failing to

properly secure child restraints and to use

the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may

allow the restraint to tip or move in an

accident or sudden stop. This can also

result in the passenger air bag inflating in

a crash instead of being OFF. (See “Child

restraints” earlier in this section for proper

use and installation.)

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the passenger air bag is designed not to

inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object being

detected by the occupant classification

sensor. Other conditions could also result

in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are

on the seat, contrary to the instructions in

this manual. Always be sure that you and

all vehicle occupants are seated and

restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light,

you can monitor when the front passenger

air bag is automatically turned OFF with the

seat occupied. The light will not illuminate

when the front passenger seat is unoccu-

pied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

passenger air bag status light is illumi-

nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it

could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the passenger air bag status light

may or may not be illuminated, depending

on the size of the child and the type of

child restraint being used. If the passenger

air bag status light is not illuminated

(indicating that the air bag might inflate

in a crash), it could be that the child

restraint or seat belt is not being used

properly. Make sure that the child restraint

is installed properly, the seat belt is used

properly and the occupant is positioned

properly. If the passenger air bag status

light is still not illuminated, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the

child restraint, the seat belts and the

occupant are properly positioned, the

system may be sensing an unoccupied

seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your

INFINITI retailer can check that the system

is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your retailer

that your air bag is working properly,

reposition the occupant or child restraint

in a rear seat.

The INFINITI advanced air bag system and

passenger air bag status light will take a

few seconds to register a change in the

passenger seat status. However, if the seat

becomes unoccupied, the air bag status

light will remain off.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If a malfunction occurs in the front

passenger air bag system, the supplemen-

tal air bag warning light

, located in the

meter and gauges area will blink. Have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Other supplemental front-impact

air bag precautions

WARNING

. Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel.

Also, do not place any objects between

any occupant and the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

. Do not place objects with sharp edges

on the seat. Also, do not place heavy

objects on the seat that will leave

permanent impressions in the seat. Such

objects can damage the seat or occupant

classification sensor (pattern sensor).

This can affect the operation of the air

bag system and result in serious perso-

nal injury.

. Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifica-

tion sensor. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and

result in serious personal injury.

. Immediately after inflation, several front

air bag system components will be hot.

Do not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the air bag system. This is to prevent

accidental inflation of the supplemental

air bag or damage to the supplemental

air bag system.

. Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-

sion system or front end structure. This

could affect proper operation of the front

air bag system.

. Tampering with the air bag system may

result in serious personal injury. Tamper-

ing includes changes to the steering

wheel and the instrument panel assem-

bly by placing material over the steering

wheel pad and above the instrument

panel or by installing additional trim

material around the air bag system.

. Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injur y. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing

material on the seat cushion or by

installing additional trim material, such

as seat covers, on the seat that is not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor.

. No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with the

seat belt system may result in serious

personal injury.

. Work on and around the front air bag

system should be done by an INFINITI

retailer. Installation of electrical equip-

ment should also be done by an INFINITI

retailer. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should

not be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment and

probing devices should not be used on

the air bag system.

. A cracked windshield should be replaced

immediately by a qualified repair facility.

A cracked windshield could affect the

function of the supplemental air bag

system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors

are yellow and orange for easy

identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-

ual.

SSS0521

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-

PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND

ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM-

PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYS-

TEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The

curtain air bags are located in the side roof

rails. These systems are designed to meet

voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk

of injury to out-of-position occupants.

However, all of the information, cautions

and warnings in this manual still apply

and must be followed. The side air bags

and curtain air bags are designed to inflate

in higher severity side collisions, although

they may inflate if the forces in another

type of collision are similar to those of a

higher severity side impact. They are

designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in

certain side collisions on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper supplemental side

air bag and curtain side-impact air bag

operation.

When side air bags and cur tain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke. This smoke

is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest and pelvis of the front occupants.

Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in the front

and rear outboard seating positions. They

can help save lives and reduce serious

injuries. However, an inflating side air bags

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

and curtain air bags may cause abrasions

or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain

air bags do not provide restraint to the

lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and passenger seated

upright as far as practical away from the

side air bag. Rear seat passengers should

be seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side

air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the occupants.

Because of this, the force of the side air

bags and curtain air bags inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, these air bag

modules during inflation. The side air bags

and curtain air bags will deflate quickly

after the collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates. The air bag warning

light will turn off after about 7 seconds if

the systems are operational.

WARNING

. Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher and

the front seat. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause injury if

side air bag inflates.

. Right after inflation, several side air

bags and curtain air bag system compo-

nents will be hot. Do not touch them;

you may severely burn yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

side air bag and curtain air bags. This is

to prevent damage to or accidental

inflation of the side air bag and curtain

air bag systems.

. Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-

sion system or side panel. This could

affect proper operation of the side air

bag and cur tain air bag systems.

. Tampering with the air bag system may

result in serious personal injury. For

example, do not change the front seats

by placing material near the seatback or

by installing additional trim material,

such as seat covers, around the side air

bags.

. Work around and on the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems should be done

by an INFINITI retailer. Installation of

electrical equipment should also be

done by an INFINITI retailer. The Supple-

mental Restraint System (SRS) wiring

harnesses* should not be modified or

disconnected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side-impact

air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors

are yellow and orange for easy

identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(front seats)

WARNING

. The pretensioners cannot be reused after

activation. They must be replaced to-

gether with the retractor and buckle as a

unit.

. If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but a pretensioner is not

activated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if necessary,

replaced by an INFINITI retailer.

. No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioners. This is to prevent

damage to or accidental activation of the

pretensioner system. Tampering with the

pretensioner system may result in ser-

ious personal injury.

. Work around and on the pretensioners

should be done by an INFINITI retailer.

Installation of electrical equipment

should also be done by an INFINITI

retailer. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pretensioner system.

. If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact an

INFINITI retailer. Correct pretensioner

disposal procedures are set forth in the

appropriate INFINITI Service Manual.

Incorrect disposal procedures could

cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with

the supplemental air bag system in certain

types of collisions. Working with the seat

belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in

certain types of collisions, helping to

restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat

belt retractor. These seat belts are used the

same way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner seat belt activates,

smoke is released and a loud noise may be

heard. The smoke is not harmful, and it

does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken not to inhale it as it may cause

irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters

allow the seat belt to release webbing (if

necessary) to reduce forces against the

chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in the

pretensioner system. (See “Supplemental

air bag warning light” later in this section.

in this section for more details.) If the

supplemental air bag warning light indi-

cates there is a malfunction, have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the seat belt

pretensioners and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Man-

ual.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS1016

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag systems are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SRS air bag

The warning labels

are located on the

surface of the sun visors.

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying

in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits of the supplemental

front-impact air bag, front seat-mounted

side-impact supplemental air bag, roof-

mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bag, and seat belt pretensioner sys-

tems. The monitored circuits include the Air

bag Control Unit (ACU), satellite sensors,

crash zone sensor, occupant classification

system, front air bag modules, side air bag

modules, curtain air bag modules, preten-

sioner, front passenger air bag status light

and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates for about 7 seconds and

then turns off. This means the SRS air bag

systems are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems need servi-

cing:

. The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on approximately 7 seconds

after the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner

systems may not operate properly. They

must be checked and repaired. Take your

vehicle to the nearest INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is

on, it could mean that the front air bag, side

air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner

systems will not operate in an accident. To

help avoid injury to yourself or others, have

your vehicle checked by a retailer as soon as

possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCE-

DURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioners are designed to

activate on a one-time-only basis. As a

reminder, unless it is damaged, the sup-

plemental air bag warning light will remain

illuminated after inflation has occurred.

Repair and replacement of these systems

should be done only by an INFINITI retailer.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags, pretensioners and related

parts should be pointed out to the person

conducting the maintenance. The ignition

switch should always be in the LOCK

position when working under the hood or

inside the vehicle.

WARNING

. Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag

module will not function again and must

be replaced. Additionally, the activated

pretensioner must also be replaced. The

air bag module and pretensioner should

be replaced by an INFINITI retailer. The

air bag module and pretensioner system

cannot be repaired.

. The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air

bag and the pretensioner system should

be inspected by an INFINITI retailer if

there is any damage to the front end or

side portion of the vehicle.

. If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner or scrap

the vehicle, contact an INFINITI retailer.

Correct supplemental air bag and seat

belt pretensioner system disposal pro-

cedures are set forth in the appropriate

INFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause personal

injury.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit ................................................................ 2-3

Instrument panel ................................................. 2-5

Meters and gauges.............................................. 2-6

Speedometer and odometer ............................ 2-7

Tachometer...................................................... 2-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge .................. 2-8

Fuel gauge ...................................................... 2-9

Warning/indicator lights and

audible reminders ............................................. 2-10

Checking bulbs.............................................. 2-10

Warning lights............................................... 2-11

Indicator lights .............................................. 2-16

Audible reminders ......................................... 2-19

Dot matrix liquid crystal display ........................ 2-20

Indicators for operation................................. 2-22

Indicators for maintenance ............................ 2-25

Trip computer................................................ 2-26

Security systems ............................................... 2-29

Vehicle Security System ................................ 2-29

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System .............. 2-30

Windshield wiper and washer switch ................. 2-32

Rain-sensing auto wiper system .................... 2-33

Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch................................................. 2-34

Headlight and turn signal switch ....................... 2-34

Xenon headlights......................................... 2-34

Headlight switch.......................................... 2-35

Turn signal switch........................................ 2-39

Fog light switch ........................................... 2-40

Hazard warning flasher switch .......................... 2-40

Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) ............. 2-41

Horn ................................................................. 2-41

Heated seats..................................................... 2-42

Climate controlled seats (if so equipped) .......... 2-43

Warning systems switch (if so equipped) .......... 2-44

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) OFF switch (if

so equipped)..................................................... 2-45

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......... 2-45

Clock................................................................. 2-46

Adjusting the time ....................................... 2-46

Power outlet ..................................................... 2-47

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays ........................... 2-47

Front............................................................ 2-47

Rear............................................................. 2-48

Storage............................................................. 2-48

Cup holders................................................. 2-48

Sunglasses holder ....................................... 2-49

Glove box .................................................... 2-50

Console box................................................. 2-51

Card holder.................................................. 2-51

Rear pocket................................................... 2-52

Coat hooks.................................................... 2-52

Trunk hooks .................................................. 2-52

Windows ........................................................... 2-53

Power windows ............................................. 2-53

Moonroof........................................................... 2-55

Automatic moonroof ...................................... 2-56

Rear sunshade (if so equipped) ......................... 2-57

Welcome light.................................................... 2-58

Battery saver system ..................................... 2-58

Interior lights..................................................... 2-59

Map lights..................................................... 2-59

Personal lights .............................................. 2-59

Interior light control switch............................ 2-60

Vanity mirror lights ........................................... 2-61

Trunk light ........................................................ 2-61

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver ...................... 2-61

Programming HomeLink

............................. 2-62

Programming HomeLink

for Canadian

customers and gate openers........................ 2-64

Operating the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver ................................... 2-64

Programming troubleshooting ...................... 2-64

Clearing the programmed information.......... 2-65

Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button....................................... 2-65

If your vehicle is stolen ............................... 2-65

JVC0259X

1. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-39)

2. AFS switch (if so equipped) (P.2-37)

3. Headlight, fog light and turn signal

switch (P.2-34)

4. Trip computer switch (P.2-26)

5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip od-

ometer (P.2-7)

6. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P.2-32)

7. Selector lever (P.5-14)

8. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P.5-100)

9. Rear sunshade switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-57)

10. Steering heater switch (if so

equipped) (P.2-41)

11. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-19)

12. Sonar system off switch (if so

equipped) (P.5-93)

13. Warning systems switch (if so

equipped) (P.5-23, P.5-32, P.5-82)

14. IBA OFF switch (if so equipped)

(P.5-86)

15. Electric tilting/telescopic steering

wheel lever (P.3-24)

16. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)

— Menu control switch (models with

navigation system)/Audio tuning

switch (models without navigation

system) (P.4-84)

— BACK switch (models with naviga-

tion system) (P.4-84)

— TALK switch (P.4-111)

— Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem (models with navigation system)

(P.4-86)

— Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone Sys-

Instruments and controls 2-3

COCKPIT

2-4 Instruments and controls

tem (models without navigation sys-

tem) (P.4-97)

— Volume control switch (P.4-84)

— Audio source switch (P.4-49)

17. Steering wheel

— Horn (P.2-41)

— Driver supplemental air bag

(P.1-39)

— Heated steering wheel (if so

equipped) (P.2-41)

18. Steering-wheel-mounted controls

(right side)

— Cruise control switches (P.5-46)

— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P.5-48)

— Dynamic driver assistance switch

(if so equipped) (P.5-23, P.5-32,

P.5-70)

JVC0291X

1. Side ventilator (P.4-34)

2. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-16)

3. Meters and gauges (P.2-6)

4. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-40)

5. Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch (P.2-34)

6. Center display (P.4-4)/Navigation sys-

tem* (if so equipped)

7. Clock (P.2-46)

8. Center multi-function control panel

— Navigation system* (if so

equipped)

— Vehicle information and setting

buttons (P.4-10)

— Audio system (P.4-49)

9. Automatic climate control system

(P.4-34)/Forest Air

system (P.4-34)

10. Center ventilator (P.4-34)

11. Audio system (P.4-49)

12. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P.1-39)

13. Hood release handle (P.3-18)

14. Fuse box cover (P.8-26)

15. Parking brake

— Parking (P.5-19)

16. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-9)

17. Front passenger air bag status light

(P.1-46)

18. Climate controlled seat switch (if so

equipped) (P.2-43) or Seat heater

switch (if so equipped) (P.2-42)

19. Drive mode select switch (P.5-20)

20. Cigarette lighter and ashtray (P.2-47)

21. Glove box lid release handle (P.2-50)

22. Trunk release power cancel switch

(P.3-20)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

Instruments and controls 2-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-6 Instruments and controls

SIC4317

1. Tachometer (P.2-8)

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-10)

3. Speedometer (P.2-7)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

(P.2-8)

5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/

Odometer/twin trip odometer

(P.2-20)

6. Fuel gauge (P.2-9)

*: The needle indicators in the speed-

ometer, tachometer, engine coolant tem-

perature gauge and fuel gauge may move

slightly after the ignition switch is pushed

to the LOCK position. This is not a

malfunction.

METERS AND GAUGES

SIC4318

Speedometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed

in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per

hour (km/h).

SIC4319

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer

and twin trip odometer

are displayed on the dot matrix crystal

display when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

on the

right of the combination meter panel

changes the display as follows:

TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch

for more

than 1 second resets the trip odometer to

zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to

empty information is also available. (See

“Dot matrix liquid crystal display” later in

this section and “How to use STATUS

button” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems”

section.)

Instruments and controls 2-7

2-8 Instruments and controls

SIC4320

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev

the engine into the red zone

The scale length and the red zone vary with

the engine model.

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine

speed. Operating the engine in the red zone

may cause serious engine damage.

SIC4321

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature.

The engine coolant temperature is within

the normal range when the gauge needle

points within the zone

shown in the

illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with

the outside air temperature and driving

conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature is near the hot (H) end of the

normal range, reduce vehicle speed to

decrease the temperature. If the gauge is

over the normal range, stop the vehicle as

soon as safely possible and let the engine

idle. If the engine is overheated, continued

operation of the vehicle may seriously

damage the engine. See “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section for immediate action required.

SIC4322

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during

braking, turning, acceleration, or going up

or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to “0” (Empty)

after the ignition switch is pushed to the

OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge

registers “0” (Empty).

The low fuel warning

appears on the

dot matrix liquid crystal display when the

fuel level is getting low. Refuel as soon as

it is convenient, preferably before the

gauge reaches “0”. There will be a small

reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel

gauge needle reaches “0”.

CAUTION

. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips, the

light

should turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected by an INFINITI retailer.

. For additional information, see “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in

this section.

Instruments and controls 2-9

2-10 Instruments and controls

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light*

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

warning light (orange)*

ECO drive indicator light

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light

Lane departure warning light

(orange)*

Exterior light indicator

Low tire pressure warning light Front fog light indicator light

Automatic transmission check warning light Master warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Brake warning light

Preview Function warning light (orange)* High beam indicator light

Seat belt warning light and chime

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) off indicator

light*

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Blind Spot Inter-

vention (BSI) system warning light (orange)*

Supplemental air bag warning light

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) ON indica-

tor light (green)*

Charge warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system warn-

ing light (orange)*

Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) off

indicator light*

Security indicator light

4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) warning light*

Automatic transmission (AT) position indi-

cator light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light

Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) ON indicator

light (green)*

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator

light

*: if so equipped

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake and push the ignition switch to the

ON position without starting the engine.

The following lights will come on (if so

equipped):

, or , , , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and

then go off (if so equipped):

, or , , , , , ,

, ,

If any light does not come on, it may

indicate a burned-out bulb or an open

circuit in the electrical system. Have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Some indicators and warnings are also

displayed on the dot matrix crystal display

between the speedometer and tachometer.

(See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display”

later in this section.)

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

WARNING LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning

light (if so equipped)

The warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is pushed to ON. It turns off

soon after the engine is started.

If the Intelligent AWD system malfunctions,

or the diameter of the front and the rear

wheels are different, the warning light will

either remain illuminated or blink. (See

“Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.)

CAUTION

. If the warning light comes on while

driving there may be a malfunction in

the Intelligent AWD system. Reduce the

vehicle speed and have your vehicle

checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon

as possible.

. If the AWD warning light blinks on when

you are driving:

—

blinks rapidly (about twice a sec-

ond):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and

idle the engine. The driving mode will

change to 2WD to prevent the AWD

system from malfunctioning. If the

warning light turns off, you can drive

again.

—

blinks slowly (about once every 2

seconds):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and

idle the engine. Check that all tire

sizes are the same, tire pressure is

correct and tires are not worn.

. If the warning light is still on after the

above operations, have your vehicle

checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon

as possible.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminates and then

turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-

tional.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the engine is running, or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system

then operates normally, but without anti-

lock assistance. (See “Brake system” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.)

Automatic transmission check

warning light

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, the light comes on for 2

seconds. If the light comes on at any other

time, it may indicate the transmission is

not functioning properly. Have your INFINITI

retailer check and repair the transmission.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the light comes on when the

parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake

fluid level. If the light comes on while the

engine is running with the parking brake

not applied, stop the vehicle and perform

the following:

Instruments and controls 2-11

2-12 Instruments and controls

1. Check the brake fluid level. If brake

fluid is necessary, add fluid and have

the system checked by your INFINITI

retailer. (See “Brake fluid” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and

the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both

the brake warning light and the Anti-lock

Braking System (ABS) warning light illumi-

nate, it may indicate the ABS is not

functioning properly. Have the brake sys-

tem checked, and if necessary repaired, by

an INFINITI retailer promptly. (See “Anti-

lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”

earlier in this section.)

WARNING

. Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you judge

it to be safe, drive carefully to the

nearest service station for repairs.

Otherwise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be dangerous.

. Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

. If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the brake fluid

reservoir, do not drive until the brake

system has been checked at an INFINITI

retailer.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/

Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) sys-

tem warning light (orange; if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, the indicator light will first

illuminate in orange and turn green before

turning off. This indicates that the Blind

Spot Warning (BSW) and Blind Spot Inter-

vention (BSI) systems are operational.

If the light comes on in orange and remains

on, it may indicate that the BSW and BSI

systems are not functioning properly.

Although the vehicle is still driveable, have

the systems checked by an INFINITI retailer.

See “Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/

Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI) system” in

the “5. Starting and driving” section.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging

system is not functioning properly. Turn

the engine off and check the alternator

belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or

if the light remains on, see an INFINITI

retailer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator belt

is loose, broken or missing.

Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system warning light (orange; if so

equipped)

This light comes on if there is a malfunc-

tion in the Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system.

If the warning light illuminates, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and turn

on the DCA system again.

If it is not possible to turn on the system

or the warning light stays on, it may

indicate that the system is malfunctioning.

Although the vehicle is still driveable

under normal conditions, have the vehicle

checked at an INFINITI retailer.

4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS)

warning light (if so equipped)

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate that there is a

malfunction with the 4 Wheel Active Steer

(4WAS) portion of the steering system.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position

and then to the ON position. If the light

does not turn off after cycling the engine,

have the system checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

For further information about the 4 Wheel

Active Steer system, see “4 Wheel Active

Steer (4WAS) system” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the 4

Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) function will

cease but driving can be continued. How-

ever, the steering wheel is slightly turned

even when driving on a straight road. Drive

carefully to the nearest INFINITI retailer.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure.

If the light flickers or comes on during

normal driving, pull off the road in a safe

area, stop the engine immediately and call

an INFINITI retailer or other authorized

repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See

“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.)

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not covered

by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as

it is safe to do so.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system warning light (orange; if so

equipped)

This light comes on if there is a malfunc-

tion in the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system.

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and set

the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the

system is malfunctioning. Although the

vehicle is still driveable under normal

conditions, have the vehicle checked at

an INFINITI retailer.

Lane departure warning light

(orange; if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, the light will come on in

orange, turn green, and then turn off. This

indicates that the Lane Departure Warning

(LDW) and Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

systems are operational.

While the LDW and/or LDP system is on,

the light will blink in orange and a warning

chime will sound if the vehicle is traveling

close to either the left or the right of a

traveling lane with detectable lane mar-

kers.

If the light comes on in orange and remains

on, it may indicate that the LDW and LDP

Instruments and controls 2-13

2-14 Instruments and controls

systems are not functioning properly. Have

the systems checked by an INFINITI retailer.

See “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-

tem/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) sys-

tem” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that

monitors the tire pressure of all tires

except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this

light illuminates for about 1 second and

turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also

appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal

display.

If you select tire pressure information in

the display, the LOW PRESSURE warning

message will be displayed. The tire pres-

sure for each tire will also be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automati-

cally turn off when the tire pressure is

adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must

be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25

km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the

low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire

pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is

active as long as the low tire pressure

warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, see “Dot matrix

liquid crystal display” later in this section,

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is pushed ON. The light will remain

on after the 1 minute. Have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer. The CHECK

TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if

the low tire pressure warning light illumi-

nates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, see “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

. If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch pushed ON, have the

vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer as

soon as possible.

. If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury. Check

the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire

may be flat. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after the 1

minute. Contact your INFINITI retailer as

soon as possible for tire replacement

and/or system resetting.

. Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

. The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

. If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of

less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS

may not operate correctly.

. Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the master warning light illumi-

nates if any of the following are displayed

on the dot matrix liquid crystal display:

. No key warning

. Low fuel warning

. Low washer fluid warning

. Parking brake release warning

. Door/trunk open warning

. Loose fuel cap warning

. Check tire pressure warning

. Intelligent Key system warning

See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” later

in this section.

Preview Function warning light

(orange; if so equipped)

The light comes on if there is a malfunction

in the Brake Assist (with Preview Function)

system.

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, then resume driving.

If the indicator stays on, it may indicate

that the system is malfunctioning.

Although the vehicle is still driveable

under normal conditions, have the vehicle

checked at an INFINITI retailer.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever

the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, and will remain illuminated until

the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime will sound for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front

passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is

not fastened when the front passenger’s

seat is occupied. For 7 seconds after the

ignition switch is in the ON position, the

system does not activate the warning light

for the front passenger.

See “1. Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system” section for precautions on

seat belt usage.

Instruments and controls 2-15

2-16 Instruments and controls

Supplemental air bag warning

light

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light will illuminate. The supplemental air

bag warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the supplemental front air bag

and supplemental side air bag, curtain

side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-

tensioner seat belt are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bag, supplemental

side air bag, supplemental curtain side-

impact air bag and pretensioner seat belt

needs servicing and your vehicle must be

taken to your nearest INFINITI retailer.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-

mental Restraint Systems and/or the pre-

tensioner seat belt may not function

properly.

For additional information, see “Supple-

mental restraint system” in the “1. Safety

— Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is

on, it could mean that the supplemental

front air bag, supplemental side air bag,

curtain side-impact air bag systems and/or

pretensioner seat belt will not operate in an

accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked by a

retailer as soon as possible.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light

The light will blink when the VDC system or

the traction control system is operating,

thus alerting the driver that the vehicle is

nearing its traction limits. The road surface

may be slippery.

When the vehicle dynamic control warning

light illuminates when the vehicle dynamic

control system is turned on, this light

alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle

dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode is

operating, for example the vehicle dynamic

control, active trace control (if so

equipped), Rise-up & Build-up function,

Brake Force Distribution or hill start assist

system may not be functioning properly.

Have the system checked by an INFINITI

retailer. If a malfunction occurs in the

system, the vehicle dynamic control sys-

tem function will be canceled but the

vehicle is still driveable. For additional

information, see “Variable voltage control

system” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) off indicator light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, the Adaptive Front lighting

System (AFS) off indicator light will illumi-

nate. The light will turn off in about 1

second if the AFS is operational.

This light also illuminates when the AFS is

turned off using the AFS switch.

If the AFS off indicator light blinks, it may

indicate the AFS is not functioning prop-

erly. Have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

See “Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)”

later in this section.

Automatic Transmission (AT)

position indicator light

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, the indicator shows the

automatic selector position.

In the manual shift mode, when the

transmission does not shift to the selected

gear due to a transmission protection

mode, the AT position indicator light will

blink and a chime will sound.

See “Automatic transmission” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section for further

details.

Blind Spot Intervention (BSI)

ON indicator light (green; if so

equipped)

The light comes on in green when the Blind

Spot Intervention (BSI) system is turned

on. The light turns off when the system is

turned off.

NOTE:

This light is common with the blind spot

warning light (orange). (See “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)/Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI) system warning light” earlier in this

section).

For more details, see “Blind Spot Warning

(BSW) system/Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI) system” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.

ECO drive indicator light

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, the light will come on in

orange, turn green, and then turn off.

When the drive mode select switch is

turned to the ECO mode, the ECO drive

indicator light will illuminate or change its

color depending on the accelerator pedal

operation to help assist the driver to drive

economically. For more details, see “Eco

mode” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.

Exterior light indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

light switch is turned to the AUTO,

position and the front parking lights,

instrument panel lights, rear combination

lights, license plate lights or headlights are

on. The indicator turns off when these

lights are turned off.

Front fog light indicator light

The front fog light indicator light illumi-

nates when the front fog lights are on. (See

“Fog light switch” later in this section.)

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light

(

) will be lit and the passenger front air

bag will be OFF depending on how the front

passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light

operation, see “INFINITI Advanced Air Bag

System (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

This light comes on when the headlight

high beam is on and goes out when the low

beam is selected.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

off indicator light (if so equipped)

The light illuminates when the Intelligent

Brake Assist (IBA) off switch is pushed to

OFF. This indicates that the Intelligent

Brake Assist (IBA) system is not operating.

When the IBA off indicator light illuminates

Instruments and controls 2-17

2-18 Instruments and controls

while the system is turned on (without the

warning chime sound), this light indicates

that the system control is temporarily

unavailable.

When the IBA off indicator light illuminates

with the warning chime sound while the

IBA system is turned on, this light indicates

that the system may not be functioning

properly. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

Check to see if the laser sensor is clean.

Turn the engine off, then restart the

engine.

If the IBA off indicator light illuminates

after following the procedures above, it

may indicate that the system or Active

Trace Control (if so equipped) is malfunc-

tioning. Although the vehicle is still drive-

able under normal conditions, have the

vehicle checked at an INFINITI retailer. (See

“Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system” in

the “5. Starting and driving” section and

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in

the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

Lane Departure Prevention

(LDP) ON indicator light (green; if so

equipped)

The light comes on in green when the Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system is

turned on. The light turns off when the

system is turned off.

NOTE:

This light is common with the lane

departure warning light (orange). (See

“Lane departure warning light” earlier in

this section.)

For more details, see “Lane Departure

Warning (LDW) system/Lane Departure

Prevention (LDP) system” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is

running, it may indicate a potential emis-

sion control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also

come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose

or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel.

Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is

installed and closed tightly, and that the

vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (14 liters)

of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the

light

should turn off if no other potential

emission control system malfunction ex-

ists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20

seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indicates

that the vehicle is not ready for an

emission control system inspection/main-

tenance test. (See “Readiness for Inspec-

tion/Maintenance (I/M) test (US only)”.)

Operation:

The malfunction indicator light will come

on in one of two ways:

. Malfunction indicator light on steady —

An emission control system malfunc-

tion has been detected. Check the fuel-

filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning appears in the dot matrix

liquid crystal display. If the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, tighten or

install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The

light should turn off

after a few driving trips. If the

light

does not turn off after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by an

INFINITI retailer. You do not need to

have your vehicle towed to the retailer.

. Malfunction indicator light blinking —

An engine misfire has been detected

which may damage the emission con-

trol system.

To reduce or avoid emission control

system damage:

1) Do not drive at speeds above 45

MPH (72 km/h).

2) Avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

3) Avoid steep uphill grades.

4) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may

stop blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected by an

INFINITI retailer. You do not need to

have your vehicle towed to the retailer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without having

the emission control system checked and

repaired as necessary could lead to poor

driveability, reduced fuel economy, and

possible damage to the emission control

system.

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch is

in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This

function indicates the security system

equipped on the vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning,

this light will remain on while the ignition

switch is in the ON position. For additional

information, see “Security systems” later

in this section.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The light flashes when the turn signal

switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle

dynamic control off switch is pushed to

OFF. This indicates that the vehicle dynamic

control system and traction control system

are not operating.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door is

opened while the ignition switch is pushed

to the ACC position. Make sure the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position, and

take the Intelligent Key with you when

leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver side

door is opened with the light switch in the

or position and the ignition switch

in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

The chime will also sound for 2 seconds

when the ignition switch is turned to the

OFF position with the fog lights on while

the headlight switch is in the AUTO

position.

Parking brake reminder chime

The parking brake reminder chime will

sound if the vehicle is driven at more than

4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking brake

applied. Stop the vehicle and release the

parking brake.

Instruments and controls 2-19

2-20 Instruments and controls

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a brake pad requires

replacement, it will make a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in

motion. This scraping sound will first occur

only when the brake pedal is depressed.

After more wear of the brake pad, the

sound will always be heard even if the

brake pedal is not depressed. Have the

brakes checked as soon as possible if the

warning sound is heard.

SIC4323

The dot matrix liquid crystal display

located between the tachometer and the

speedometer, and it displays the auto-

matic transmission position indicator, the

cruise control, the Intelligent Cruise Con-

trol (ICC) system (if so equipped), the

Distance Assist (DCA) system (if so

equipped) information, the Intelligent Key

operation information and other warnings

and information.

For details about the automatic transmis-

sion position indicator, see “Indicator

lights” earlier in this section. For details

about the cruise control, see “Cruise

control” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section. For details about the ICC system,

see “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys-

tem” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section. For details about the DCA system,

see “Distance Control Assist (DCA) system”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section. For

the details about the Intelligent Key

system, see “Intelligent Key system” in

the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-

ments” section.

DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

SIC4678

Instruments and controls 2-21

2-22 Instruments and controls

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicator

This indicator appears when the selector

lever is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will

start by pushing the ignition switch with

the brake pedal depressed. You can start

the engine directly in any position.

2. Steering lock release malfunc-

tion indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator appears when the steering

wheel cannot be released from the LOCK

position.

If this indicator appears, push the push-

button ignition switch while lightly turning

the steering wheel right and left.

3. NO KEY warning

This warning appears in either of the

following conditions.

No key inside the vehicle:

The warning appears when the door is

closed with the Intelligent Key left outside

the vehicle and the ignition switch in the

ACC or ON position. Make sure that the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key:

The warning appears when the ignition

switch is pushed from the LOCK position

and the Intelligent Key cannot be recog-

nized by the system. You cannot start the

engine with an unregistered key. Use the

registered Intelligent Key.

See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section

for more details.

4. SHIFT “P” warning

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is pushed to stop the engine with

the selector lever in any position except

the P (Park) position.

If this warning appears, move the selector

lever to the P (Park) position or push the

ignition switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.

(See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion.)

5. “PUSH” warning

This warning appears when the selector

lever is moved to the P (Park) position with

the ignition switch in the ACC position after

the SHIFT “P” warning appears.

To push the ignition switch to the OFF

position, perform the following procedure:

. SHIFT “P” warning ? (Move the selec-

tor lever to “P”) ? PUSH warning ?

(Push the ignition switch ? ignition

switch position is turned to ON) ?

PUSH warning ? (Push the ignition

switch ? ignition switch position is

turned to OFF)

6. Intelligent Key battery discharge

indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent

Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the

battery with a new one. (See “Intelligent

Key battery replacement” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

7. Engine start operation for Intel-

ligent Key system indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent

Key battery is running out of power and

when the Intelligent Key System and

vehicle are not communicating normally.

If this indicator appears, touch the ignition

switch with the Intelligent Key while

depressing the brake pedal. (See “Intelli-

gent Key battery discharge” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

8. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehicle

speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the

parking brake is applied.

9. Low fuel warning

This warning appears when the fuel level in

the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it

is convenient, preferably before the fuel

gauge reaches the empty (0) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel remaining

in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches

the empty (0) position.

10. Low washer fluid warning

This warning appears when the washer

tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid

as necessary. (See “Window washer fluid”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.)

11. Door/trunk open warning (igni-

tion switch is in the ON position)

This warning appears if any of the doors

and/or the trunk lid are open or not closed

securely. The vehicle icon indicates which

door or the trunk lid is open on the display.

12. Intelligent Key system warning

This warning appears if there is a malfunc-

tion in the steering lock system (if so

equipped) or Intelligent Key system.

If this warning appears while the engine is

stopped, the steering lock (if so equipped)

cannot be released or the engine cannot be

started. If this warning appears while the

engine is running, the vehicle can be

driven. However, contact an INFINITI retai-

ler for repair as soon as possible.

13. Loose fuel cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. (See “Fuel-filler

cap” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section.)

14. Check tire pressure warning

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and low tire pressure is detected. If

this warning appears, stop the vehicle and

adjust the pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label. (See

“Low tire pressure warning light” earlier in

this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.)

15. “TIMER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set

“TIMER” indicator activates. You can set

the time for up to 6 hours. (See “Trip

computer” later in this section.)

16. Low outside temperature warn-

ing

This warning appears if the outside tem-

perature is below 378F(38C). The warning

can be set not to be displayed. (See “Trip

computer” later in this section.)

17. Cruise indicator

Cruise main switch indicator:

The indicator is displayed when the cruise

control main switch is pushed. When the

main switch is pushed again, the indicator

disappears. When the cruise control main

switch indicator is displayed, the cruise

control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator:

The indicator is displayed while the vehicle

speed is controlled by the cruise control

system. If the indicator blinks while the

Instruments and controls 2-23

2-24 Instruments and controls

engine is running, it may indicate that the

cruise control system is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

See “Cruise control” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section for details.

18. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system MAIN switch indicator (if so

equipped)

The indicator is displayed when the In-

telligent Cruise Control (ICC) system main

switch is pushed. When the main switch is

pushed again, the indicator disappears.

While the main switch indicator is dis-

played, the ICC system is operational. (See

“Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system” in

the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

19. Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system switch indicator (if so

equipped)

The indicator is displayed when the Dis-

tance Control Assist (DCA) system switch is

pushed on. When the switch is pushed

again, the indicator disappears. While the

indicator is displayed, the DCA system is

operational. (See “Distance Control Assist

(DCA) system” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.)

20. INFINITI Drive Mode Selector

indicator

When a driving mode is selected, the

selected mode indicator is displayed for

approximately 2 seconds.

. STANDARD

. SPORT

. ECO

. SNOW

(See “INFINITI drive mode selector” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.)

SIC4325

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE

1. Engine oil replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the customer

set time comes for changing the engine oil.

You can set or reset the distance for

changing the engine oil. (See “Trip compu-

ter” later in this section.)

2. Oil filter replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the customer

set time comes for replacing the oil filter.

You can set or reset the distance for

replacing the oil filter. (See “Trip compu-

ter” later in this section.)

3. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the customer

set distance comes for replacing tires. You

can set or reset the distance for replacing

tires. (See “Trip computer” later in this

section.)

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, including

tire pressure checks. See “Changing wheels

and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section. Many factors including

tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and

road conditions affect tire wear and when

tires should be replaced. Setting the tire

replacement indicator for a certain driving

distance does not mean your tires will last

that long. Use the tire replacement indicator

as a guide only and always perform regular

tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire

checks, including tire pressure checks could

result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to a collision,

which could result in serious personal injury

or death.

4. “OTHER” indicator

This indicator appears when the customer

set time comes for replacing items other

than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. You

can set or reset the distance for replacing

the items. (See “Trip computer” later in

this section.)

More maintenance reminders are also

available on the center display. (See

“How to use INFO button” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section.)

Instruments and controls 2-25

2-26 Instruments and controls

SIC4326

SIC4327

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are located

on the right side of the combination meter

panel. To operate the trip computer, push

the side or front of the switches as shown

above.

switch

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, modes of the trip computer

can be selected by pushing the

switch

Each time the

switch

is pushed, the

display will change as follows:

Current fuel consumption ? Average fuel

consumption and speed ? Elapsed time

and trip odometer ? Distance to empty

(dte) ? Outside air temperature (ICY) ?

Setting ? Warning check

1. Current fuel consumption

The current fuel consumption mode shows

the current fuel consumption.

2. Average fuel consumption (MPG

or l (liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH

or km/h)

Fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption mode shows

the average fuel consumption since the

last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the

switch

for longer than 1 second.

(The average speed is also reset at the

same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a

reset, the display shows “——”.

Speed:

The average speed mode shows the

average vehicle speed since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the

switch

for longer than 1 second. (The

average fuel consumption is also reset at

the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The first 30 seconds after a reset, the

display shows “——”.

3. Elapsed time and trip odometer

(mls or km)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the time

since the last reset. The displayed time can

be reset by pushing the

switch

for

longer than 1 second. (The trip odometer is

also reset at the same time.)

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer mode shows the total

distance the vehicle has been driven since

the last reset. Resetting is done by pushing

the

switch

for longer than 1

second. (The elapsed time is also reset at

the same time.)

4. Distance to empty (dte — mls or

km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides

you with an estimation of the distance that

can be driven before refueling. The dte is

constantly being calculated, based on the

amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the

actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning

is displayed on the screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the

dte display will change to “——”.

. If the amount of fuel added is small, the

display just before the ignition switch

is pushed to the OFF position may

continue to be displayed.

. When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

5. Outside air temperature (ICY — 8F

or 8C)

The outside air temperature is displayed in

8For8C in the range of −22 to 1318F(−30

to 558C).

The outside air temperature mode includes

a low temperature warning feature. If the

outside air temperature is below 378F

(38C), the warning is displayed on the

screen.

The outside temperature sensor is located

in front of the radiator. The sensor may be

Instruments and controls 2-27

2-28 Instruments and controls

affected by road or engine heat, wind

directions and other driving conditions.

The display may differ from the actual

outside temperature or the temperature

displayed on various signs or billboards.

6. Setting

Setting cannot be made while driving. A

message “Setting can only be operated

when stopped” is also displayed on the

dot matrix crystal display.

The

switch

and switch

are

used in the setting mode to select and

decide a menu.

SKIP:

Push the

switch

to move to the

warning check mode.

Push the

switch

to select other

menus.

ALERT:

There are 3 submenus under the alert

menu.

. BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top

page of the setting mode.

. TIMER

Select this submenu to specify when

the “TIMER” indicator activates.

. ICY

Select this submenu to display the low

outside temperature warning.

MAINTENANCE:

There are 5 submenus under the main-

tenance menu.

. BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top

page of the setting mode.

. OIL

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for changing the engine oil.

. FILTER

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing the oil filter.

. TIRE

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing tires.

. OTHER

Select this submenu and set or reset

the distance for replacing items other

than the engine oil, oil filter and tires.

OPTIONS:

There are 4 submenus under the display

menu.

. BACK

Select this submenu to return to the top

page of the setting mode.

. LANGUAGE

Select this submenu to choose English

or French for display.

. UNIT

Select this submenu to choose the unit

from miles, MPG, 8F or km, l/100km,

8C.

. EFFECTS

Select this menu to set the dial effects

described below to on or off.

— The indicator needles sweep in the

meters when the engine is started.

7. Warning check

SKIP:

Push the

switch

to move to the

warning check mode.

Push the

switch

to select other

menus.

DETAIL:

This item is available only when a warning

is displayed.

Select this menu to see the details of

warnings.

SIC2132

Your vehicle has two types of security

systems, as follows:

. Vehicle security system

. INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual

and audio alarm signals if someone opens

the doors, hood, or trunk lid when the

system is armed. It is not, however, a

motion detection type system that acti-

vates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-

nents in all situations. Always secure your

vehicle even if parking for a brief period.

Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in the

vehicle, and always lock it when unat-

tended. Be aware of your surroundings,

and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever

possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and speci-

alty shops. Your INFINITI retailer may also

offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be

eligible for discounts for various theft

protection features.

SIC2045

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the

windows are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the

vehicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock

all doors. The doors can be locked with

the Intelligent Key, door handle request

switch, power door lock switch or

mechanical key.

Instruments and controls 2-29

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-30 Instruments and controls

5. Confirm that the security indicator light

comes on. The security indicator light

stays on for about 30 seconds. The

vehicle security system is now pre-

armed. After about 30 seconds the

vehicle security system automatically

shifts into the armed phase. The

security light begins to flash once every

approximately 3 seconds. If, during this

30-second pre-arm time period, the

door is unlocked, or the ignition switch

is pushed to ACC or ON, the system will

not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will activate

with all doors, hood, and trunk lid locked

with the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. When pushing the ignition switch

to the ACC or ON position, the system will

be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

. The headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently.

. The alarm automatically turns off after

approximately 1 minute. However, the

alarm reactivates if the vehicle is

tampered with again.

The alarm is activated by:

. Unlocking the door or opening the trunk

lid without using the button on the

Intelligent Key, the door handle request

switch or the mechanical key. (Even if

the door is opened by releasing the

door inside lock knob, the alarm will

activate.)

. Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by

pushing the unlock button on the Intelli-

gent Key, the door handle request switch

or using the mechanical key. The alarm will

not stop if the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position.

If the system does not operate as de-

scribed above, have it checked by an

INFINITI retailer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered Intelligent Key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

SIC2045

Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on

the meter panel. It indicates the status of

the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the ignition switch

was in the LOCK, ACC or OFF position. This

function indicates the security systems

equipped on the vehicle are operational.

If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

is malfunctioning, this light will remain on

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, see an INFINITI

retailer for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

System service as soon as possible.

Please bring all Intelligent Keys that you

have when visiting an INFINITI retailer for

service.

Instruments and controls 2-31

2-32 Instruments and controls

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm windshield with the defros-

ter before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

. Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

. Do not fill the window washer reservoir

tank with washer fluid concentrates at

full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the window washer reser-

voir tank.

. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the window washer reservoir tank.

Do not use the window washer reservoir

tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

SIC4281

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

AUTO — operates the rain-sensing

auto wiper system. (See “Rain-sen-

sing auto wiper system” later in this

section.)

LO — continuous low speed operation

HI — continuous high speed operation

MIST — one sweep operation of the

wiper

Pull the lever toward you

to operate the

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

washer. Then the wiper will also operate

several times.

Pulling up the wiper arm:

The wiper arm should be in the up position

when replacing the wiper.

To pull up the wiper arm, push up

twice, the wiper operation stops in mid-

operation. The wiper arm can be pulled up.

The selector lever should be in the P (Park)

position.

To replace the wiper arm, place the wiper

arm in the down position and then push

the lever

up once.

CAUTION

Do not operate the windshield wiper while

the wiper arm is pulled up. The wiper arm

may be damaged.

Wiper drip wipe system:

The wiper will also operate once about 3

seconds after the washer and wiper are

operated. This operation is to wipe washer

fluid that has dripped on the windshield.

SIC4190

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYS-

TEM

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can

automatically turn on the wipers and

adjust the wiper speed depending on the

rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the

rain sensor located on the upper part of

the windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,

push the lever down to the AUTO position

. The wiper will sweep once while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be

adjusted by turning the knob toward

(High) or toward

(Low).

. High — High sensitive operation

. Low — Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system

off, push up the lever to the OFF position,

or pull down the lever to the LO or HI

position.

CAUTION

Do not touch the rain sensor and around it

when the wiper switch is in the AUTO

position and the ignition switch is in the

ON position. The wipers may operate un-

expectedly and cause to an injury or a wiper

damage.

. The rain-sensing auto wipers are in-

tended for use during rain. If the switch

is left in the AUTO position, the wipers

may operate unexpectedly when dirt,

fingerprints, oil film or insects are

stuck on or around the sensor. The

wipers may also operate when exhaust

gas or moisture affect the rain sensor.

. The rain-sensing auto wipers may not

operate if rain does not hit the rain

sensor even if it is raining.

Instruments and controls 2-33

2-34 Instruments and controls

. When the windshield glass is coated

with water repellent, the speed of the

rain-sensing auto wipers may be high-

er even though the amount of the

rainfall is small.

. Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing

auto wiper system when you use a car

wash.

. Using genuine wiper blades is recom-

mended for proper operation of the

rain-sensing auto wiper system. (See

“Windshield wiper blades” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion for wiper blade replacement.)

SIC4330

To defog/defrost the rear window glass

and outside mirrors, start the engine and

push the switch

on. The indicator light

will come on. Push the switch again to

turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or damage

the rear window defroster.

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

. When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to modify

or disassemble. Always have your xenon

headlights replaced at an INFINITI retai-

ler.

. Xenon headlights provide considerably

more light than conventional headlights.

If they are not correctly aimed, they

might temporarily blind an oncoming

driver or the driver ahead of you and

cause a serious accident. If headlights

are not aimed correctly, immediately

take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer

and have the headlights adjusted cor-

rectly.

When the xenon headlight is initially

turned on, its brightness or color varies

slightly. However, the color and brightness

will soon stabilize.

. The life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off operation.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR

DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

It is generally desirable not to turn off

the headlights for short intervals (for

example, when the vehicle stops at a

traffic signal). Even when the daytime

running lights are active (Canada only),

the xenon headlights do not turn on.

This way the life of the xenon head-

lights is not reduced.

. If the xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will dras-

tically decrease, the light will start

blinking, or the color of the light will

become reddish. If one or more of the

above signs appear, contact an INFINITI

retailer.

SIC3267

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

Turn the switch to the position:

The front parking, side marker, tail

and license plate lights will come on.

Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the

other lights remain on.

SIC3268

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights

to be set so they turn on and off

automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position.

3. The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF,

or position.

Instruments and controls 2-35

2-36 Instruments and controls

The autolight system can turn on the

headlights automatically when it is dark

and turn off the headlights when it is light.

For US models: The headlights will also be

turned on automatically at twilight or in

rainy weather (when the windshield wiper

is operated continuously).

If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position and one of the doors is opened

and this condition is continued, the head-

lights remain on for 5 minutes.

Automatic headlights off delay:

You can keep the headlights on for up to

180 seconds after you push the ignition

switch to OFF and open any door then close

all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the automatic

headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF)

to 180 seconds. The factory default setting

is 45 seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay setting,

see “Light Off Delay” in the “4. Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-

tion systems” section.

SAA0642A

Be sure not to put anything on top of the

photo sensor

located on the top of the

instrument panel. The photo sensor con-

trols the autolight; if it is covered, the

photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the

headlights will illuminate.

SIC3269

Headlight beam select

To select the low beam, put the lever

in the neutral position as shown.

To select the high beam, push the

lever forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to select the

low beam.

Pulling the lever toward you will flash

the headlight high beam even when

the headlight switch is in the OFF

position.

Battery saver system

A chime will sound when the driver side

door is opened with the light switch in the

or position and the ignition switch

in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.

When the headlight switch is in the

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights will automati-

cally turn off within a period of time after

the ignition switch has been pushed to the

OFF position.

When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights

automatically turn off, the lights will turn

on when the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position.

CAUTION

. When you turn on the headlight switch

again after the lights automatically turn

off, the lights will not turn off auto-

matically. Be sure to turn the light

switch to the OFF position when you

leave the vehicle for extended periods of

time, otherwise the battery will be

discharged.

. Never leave the light switch on when the

engine is not running for a period of time

even if the headlights turn off automa-

tically.

Daytime running light system (Ca-

nada only)

The daytime running lights automatically

illuminate when the engine is started with

the parking brake released. The daytime

running lights operate with the headlight

switch in the OFF position or in the

position. Turn the headlight switch to the

position for full illumination when

driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the daytime running

lights do not illuminate. The daytime

running lights illuminate once the parking

brake is released. The daytime running

lights will remain on until the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position.

Adaptive Front lighting System

(AFS) (if so equipped)

The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

will automatically adjust the headlights

(low beam) toward the turning direction to

improve the driver’s view. When the head-

light switch is ON and the driver operates

the steering wheel in a turn, the AFS

system will be activated.

The AFS will operate:

. when the headlight switch is ON.

. when the selector lever is in any

position other than P (Park) or R

(Reverse).

. when the vehicle is driven at above 16

MPH (25 km/h) for the left-side head-

light. Note that the right-side low beam

headlight will swivel but the left side

will not swivel when the vehicle is

below 3 MPH (5 km/h) and the steering

wheel is turned. The vehicle must attain

a speed above 16 MPH (25 km/h)

before AFS activates the left-side head-

light.

Instruments and controls 2-37

2-38 Instruments and controls

SIC4333

To turn the AFS off, push the AFS switch.

(The AFS OFF indicator light will illuminate.)

Push the switch again to turn the system

on again.

AFS will also adjust the headlight to a

proper axis automatically, depending on

the number of occupants in the vehicle, the

load the vehicle is carrying and the road

conditions.

If the AFS OFF indicator light blinks after

the ignition switch has been pushed to the

ON position, this may indicate that the AFS

is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

When the engine is started, the headlights

will vibrate to check the system condition.

This is not a malfunction.

SIC4331

SIC3270

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control switch

can be operated when the ignition switch

is in the ON position. When the switch is

operated, the dot matrix liquid crystal

display switches to the brightness adjust-

ment mode.

Push the upper switch

to brighten the

instrument panel lights. The bar

moves

to the + side. When reaching the maximum

brightness, “MAX” appears on the display

Push the lower switch

to dim the

instrument panel lights. The bar

moves

to the − side. When reaching the minimum

brightness, “MIN” appears on the display

. However, “MIN” does not appear

during the nighttime.

The dot matrix liquid crystal display

returns to the normal display under the

following conditions:

. when the instrument brightness control

switch is not operated for more than 5

seconds.

. when the side or front of the

switch

switch on the right side of the

combination meter panel is pushed.

SIC3271

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-

cally.

Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the point where lights begin

flashing.

Instruments and controls 2-39

2-40 Instruments and controls

SIC3272

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the

position, then turn the

switch to the

position. To turn them

off, turn the switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on for the fog

lights to operate.

When the headlight switch is in the AUTO

position, turning the fog light switch to the

position will turn on the headlights,

fog lights and the other lights while the

ignition switch is in the ON position or the

engine is running.

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under

emergency conditions. All turn signal lights

will flash.

WARNING

. If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

. Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to drive

so slowly that your vehicle might be-

come a hazard to other traffic.

. Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the

ignition switch in any position.

When an impact that could activate the

supplemental air bags is detected, the

hazard warning flasher lights blink auto-

matically. If the hazard warning flasher

switch is pushed, the hazard warning

flashers will turn off.

WARNING

Do not turn the hazard warning flasher

switch to off until you can make sure that it

is safe to do so. Also, the hazard flasher

warning may not blink automatically de-

pending on the force of impact.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

JVI0395X

The heated steering wheel system is

designed to operate only when the surface

temperature of the steering wheel is below

688F (208C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to

warm the steering wheel after the engine

starts. The indicator light

on the switch

will illuminate.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is below 688F (208C), the system will

heat the steering wheel and cycle off and

on to maintain a temperature above 688F

(208C). The indicator light will remain on as

long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The

indicator light will turn off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is above 688F (208C) when the

switch is turned on, the system will not

heat the steering wheel. This is not a

malfunction.

SIC4332

To sound the horn, push the center pad

area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the supple-

mental front air bag system. Tampering with

the supplemental front air bag system may

result in serious personal injury.

Instruments and controls 2-41

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped) HORN

2-42 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants can not

monitor elevated seat temperatures or have

an inability to feel pain in those body parts

in contact with the seat. Use of the seat

heater by such people could result in

serious injury.

CAUTION

. The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

. Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

. Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the

seat may become overheated.

. Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

. When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar materi-

als.

. If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked

by an INFINITI retailer.

SSS0911

The front seats are warmed by built-in

heaters. The switches located on the center

console can be operated independently of

each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob

to the right

and select the desired heat range.

For high heat, turn the knob to the

right

For low heat, turn the knob to the left

The indicator light

will illuminate

when the heater is on.

3. To turn off the heater, return the knob

HEATED SEATS

to the OFF position

. Make sure that

the indicator light turns off.

The heater is controlled by a thermis-

tor, automatically turning the heater on

and off. The indicator light will remain

on as long as the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,

or before you leave the vehicle, be sure

to turn off the switch.

SIC4334

The climate controlled seat warms up or

cools down the front seats by blowing

warm or cool air from the surface of the

seat. The switches located on the center

console can be operated independently of

each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob

to the heat

side

or to the cool side

. The

indicator light

on the control knob

will illuminate.

3. Adjust the temperature using the con-

trol knob

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed

or cooled, and/or before you leave the

vehicle, be sure to turn the control

knob to the OFF position (center). The

indicator light

on the control knob

goes off at the OFF position.

To check the air filter for the climate

controlled seat, contact an INFINITI

retailer.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

climate controlled seats if you or the

occupants can not monitor seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

those body parts in contact with the seat.

Use of the climate controlled seats by such

people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

. The battery could run down if the climate

controlled seat is operated while the

engine is not running.

. Do not use the climate controlled seat

for extended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

Instruments and controls 2-43

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if so

equipped)

2-44 Instruments and controls

. Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the

seat may become overheated.

. Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

climate controlled seat.

. Any liquid spilled on the seat should be

removed immediately with a dry cloth.

. The climate controlled seat has an air

filter. Do not operate climate controlled

seat without an air filter. This may result

in damage to the system.

. When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar materi-

als.

. If any malfunctions are found or the

climate controlled seat does not operate,

turn the switch off and have the system

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

SIC4335

The warning systems switch is used to turn

on and off the warning systems (Forward

Collision Warning (FCW), Lane Departure

Warning (LDW) and Blind Spot Warning

(BSW) systems) that are activated using

the settings menu on the center display.

When the warning systems switch is turned

off, the indicator

on the switch is off.

The indicator will also be off if all of the

warning systems are deactivated using the

settings menu.

The FCW system will sound a warning

chime and the vehicle ahead detection

indicator light blinks to alert the driver if

the vehicle is traveling close to the vehicle

ahead. (See “Forward Collision Warning

(FCW) system” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.)

The LDW system will sound a warning

chime and blink the lane departure warn-

ing light (orange) to alert the driver if the

vehicle is traveling close to either the left

or the right of a traveling lane with

detectable lane markers. (See “Lane De-

parture Warning (LDW) system/Lane De-

parture Prevention (LDP) system” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

The BSW system will turn on the BSW/

Blind Spot Intervention (BSI) indicator

lights, located next to the outside mirrors,

if the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone. If the turn signal is

activated in the direction of the detected

vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the

BSW/BSI indicator light will flash. (See

“Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind

Spot Intervention

(BSI) system” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.)

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so

equipped)

SIC4337

The vehicle should be driven with the

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system on

for most driving conditions.

The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system

will sound a warning chime and the vehicle

ahead detection indicator light blinks to

alert the driver when the vehicle is travel-

ing too close to the vehicle ahead. The

system will also apply the brake control if

necessary.

To turn off the system, push the IBA OFF

switch. The

indicator will illuminate.

The IBA system will remain in the last ON

or OFF state it was left in until it is

manually changed by pushing the IBA OFF

switch.

See “Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

SIC4336

The vehicle should be driven with the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on

for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is

depressed to the floor. If maximum engine

power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The

indicator will illumi-

nate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. (See

Instruments and controls 2-45

INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) OFF

SWITCH (if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF

SWITCH

2-46 Instruments and controls

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in

the “5. Starting and driving” section.)

SIC4338

If the power supply is disconnected, the

clock will not indicate the correct time.

Readjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

1. To set the clock forward, push the

button

2. To set the clock backward, push the

button

3. To move forward or backward faster,

push and hold the button more than 5

seconds.

For details about display clock adjustment

(if so equipped), see “How to use SETTING

button” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems”

section.

CLOCK

SIC4339

The power outlet is located in the center

console.

CAUTION

. The outlet and plug may be hot during or

immediately after use.

. Do not use with accessories that exceed

a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do

not use double adapters or more than

one electrical accessory.

. Use power outlet with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

. Avoid using power outlet when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

. This power outlet is not designed for use

with a cigarette lighter unit.

. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may blow.

. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,

be sure the electrical accessory being

used is turned OFF.

. When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any liquid to

contact the outlet.

SIC4340

FRONT

To open the ashtray lid, push the lid down

and release it

To empty the ashtray, pull out

The cigarette lighter operates when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lighter in all the way

, then

release it. When the lighter is heated, it will

spring out. Return the lighter to its original

position after use.

Instruments and controls 2-47

POWER OUTLET CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAYS

2-48 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

. The cigarette lighter socket is a power

source for the cigarette lighter element

only. The use of the cigarette lighter

socket as a power source for any other

accessory is not recommended.

. Do not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter.

SIC4341

REAR

To open the ashtray lid, pull

To empty the ashtray, pull

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

. Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

. Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

STORAGE

SIC4342

Front

To open the cup holder, push the lid

To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull

it up as illustrated

SIC2875

Rear

Open the lid of the rear center armrest to

use the cup holder.

SIC4344

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while

driving to prevent an accident.

To open the sunglasses holder, push

CAUTION

. Do not use for anything other than

glasses.

Instruments and controls 2-49

2-50 Instruments and controls

. Do not leave glasses in the sunglasses

holder while parking in direct sunlight.

The heat may damage the glasses.

SIC4345

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle

To close, push the lid in until the lock

latches.

To lock

/unlock

the glove box, use

the mechanical key. For the mechanical key

usage, see “Keys” in the “3. Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section.

SIC4346

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, push up the knob

and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

SIC3929

Type A

SIC4348

Type B

CARD HOLDER

The card holder is located on or behind the

driver’s or passenger’s sun visor.

To use the card holder, slide the card in the

card holder.

Instruments and controls 2-51

2-52 Instruments and controls

SIC4351

REAR POCKET

To open the rear pocket, push the button

SIC3248

COAT HOOKS

The coat hooks are equipped beside the

rear personal lights.

CAUTION

Do not place items which are more than 2 lb

(1 kg) on the hook.

SIC4350

TRUNK HOOKS

WARNING

. Always make sure that the cargo is

properly secured. Use the suitable ropes

and hooks.

. Unsecured cargo can become dangerous

in an accident or sudden stop.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 22 lb

(10 kg) to a single hook.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

. Make sure that all passengers have their

hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is

in motion and before closing the win-

dows. Use the window lock switch to

prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

. Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly

activate switches or controls and be-

come trapped in the window. Unat-

tended children could become involved

in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the

ignition switch is in the ON position or for

about 45 seconds after the ignition switch

is pushed to the OFF position. If the

driver’ s or front passenger’s door is

opened during this period of about 45

seconds, power to the windows is can-

celed.

SIC4352

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Rear left passenger side window

4. Rear right passenger side window

5. Window lock button

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

To open or close the window, push down

or pull up

the switch and hold it.

The main switch (driver side switches) will

open or close all the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-53

WINDOWS

2-54 Instruments and controls

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button

is pushed in, only

the driver side window can be opened or

closed. Push it in again to cancel.

SIC4353

Passenger side power window

switch

The passenger side switch will open or

close only the corresponding window. To

open or close the window, push down or

pull up the switch and hold it.

SIC4354

Automatic operation

To fully open or close the window, com-

pletely push down or pull up the switch

and release it; it need not be held. The

window will automatically open or close all

the way. To stop the window, just push or

lift the switch in the opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause

the window to open or close until the

switch is released.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately

before the closed position which cannot be

detected. Make sure that all passengers

have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle

before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something

caught in the window as it is closing, the

window will be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated

when the window is closed by automatic

operation when the ignition switch is in the

ON position or for 45 seconds after the

ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window

occurs.

If the windows do not close auto-

matically

If the power window automatic function

(closing only) does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initi-

alize the power window system.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Close the door.

3. Open the window completely by oper-

ating the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold

it to close the window, and then hold

the switch more than 3 seconds after

the window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch.

Operate the window by the automatic

function to confirm the initialization is

complete.

6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for

other windows.

If the power window automatic function

does not operate properly after performing

the procedure above, have your vehicle

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

. In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child re-

straints.

. Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the moonroof opening while the vehicle

is in motion or while the moonroof is

closing.

CAUTION

. Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

. Do not place any heavy object on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Instruments and controls 2-55

MOONROOF

2-56 Instruments and controls

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof only operates when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

The automatic moonroof is operational for

about 45 seconds, even if the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position. If the

driver’s door or the passenger’s door is

opened during this period of about 45

seconds, power to the moonroof is can-

celed.

SIC4355

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatically

when the moonroof is opened. However,

it must be closed manually.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then

push the switch to the tilt up position

and release it; it need not be held. To tilt

down the moonroof, push the switch to the

tilt down position

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push

the switch to the open

or close

position and release it; it need not be held.

The roof will automatically open or close all

the way. To stop the roof, push the switch

once more while it is opening or closing.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately

before the closed position which cannot be

detected. Make sure that all passengers

have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle

before closing the moonroof.

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof when it is closing,

the moonroof will be immediately opened.

The auto reverse function can be activated

when the moonroof is closed by automatic

operation when the ignition switch is in the

ON position or for about 45 seconds after

the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

If the moonroof cannot be closed auto-

matically when the auto reverse function

activates due to a malfunction, push and

hold the moonroof switch to the close

position

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the moonroof

occurs.

If the moonroof does not operate

If the moonroof does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initi-

alize the moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by

repeatedly pushing the moonroof

switch to the close position

to tilt

the moonroof up.

2. Push and hold the switch to the close

position

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof moves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the switch to the open

position

to fully tilt the moonroof

down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch operates

normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly

after performing the procedure above, have

your vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

. To avoid personal injury, keep your

hands, fingers and head away from the

sunshade arm, arm rail and sunshade

inlet port.

. Do not allow children near the rear

sunshade system. They could be injured.

. Do not place objects on or near the rear

sunshade. This could cause improper

operation or damage it.

. Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.

This could cause improper operation or

damage it.

SIC4349

The rear sunshade operates when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

The rear sunshade switch is located on the

instrument panel.

To raise and lower the sunshade, push the

switch.

The switch need not be held.

When the selector lever is moved to the "R"

(Reverse) position, the rear sunshade

automatically lowers.

Instruments and controls 2-57

REAR SUNSHADE (if so equipped)

2-58 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

. Do not place objects (such as news-

papers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the

sunshade inlet port. Doing so may

entangle these objects in the sunshade

when it is extending or retracting,

causing improper operation or damage

to the sunshade.

. Do not push the sunshade arm with your

hands, etc., as this may deform it.

Improper operation or damage to the

sunshade may result.

. Do not put any object into the sunshade

inlet port as this may result in improper

operation or damage the sunshade.

. Do not hang any object on the arm rail

as this may result in improper operation

or damage the sunshade.

. Do not forcefully pull the sunshade.

Doing so may elongate the sunshade.

Improper operation or damage to the

sunshade may result.

SIC4328

To activate or deactivate the welcome light

function, perform the following procedure.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Open the driver’s side door.

3. Within 20 seconds after the ignition

switch is pushed to the ON position,

push the door open request switch on

the driver’s side door handle for more

than 5 seconds with the driver’s door

open.

4. A chime sounds when the setting is

completed.

Once the welcome light function is active,

the courtesy light

and the passenger

cabin illumination will illuminate when you

approach the vehicle with the Intelligent

Key (within approximately 3.3 ft ( 1 m) of

the antenna built inside the door handles)

and the following conditions are met.

. All doors are closed and locked.

. The ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF

position.

. The Intelligent Key is outside the

vehicle.

. The courtesy light operates within a set

duration.

In order to help maximize battery life, do

not store the Intelligent Key within the

vehicle detection range.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

The welcome light function will be deacti-

vated automatically to prevent battery

discharge under the following conditions.

. If the welcome light function does not

operate within a set duration. Note that

the duration is set to 9 days as the

factory default setting. To activate the

welcome light function again, start the

engine.

. If the welcome light function is acti-

vated 15 consecutive times when you

WELCOME LIGHT

approach and leave the vehicle with the

Intelligent Key without the doors being

unlocked. To activate the welcome light

function again, unlock any door.

SIC4356

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn the

light on or off.

SIC3250

PERSONAL LIGHTS

Rear

Push the button as illustrated to turn the

light on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-59

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-60 Instruments and controls

SIC4357

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

ON switch

When the ON switch

is pushed on, the

map lights and rear personal lights will

illuminate. When the switch is turned off,

the lights will not illuminate, regardless of

the condition.

DOOR OFF switch

When the DOOR OFF switch

is not

pushed on, the map lights and rear

personal lights will illuminate under the

following conditions:

. ignition switch is switched to the OFF

position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

. doors are unlocked by pushing the

UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key

or door handle request switch with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

. any door is opened and then closed

with the ignition switch in the LOCK

position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

. any door is opened

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights

go off.

When the DOOR OFF switch

is pushed

on, the map and rear personal lights will

not illuminate under the above condition.

The map and rear personal lights can be

turned on only with the ON switch

The lights will also turn off after a period

of time when the lights remain illuminated

after the ignition switch has been pushed

to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the

battery from becoming discharged.

When the auto interior illumination is set

to the OFF position (see “Vehicle informa-

tion and settings” in the “4. Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-

tion systems” section), the lights will

illuminate under the following condition:

. any door is opened with the ignition

switch in any position

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights

go off.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with

the engine stopped. This could result in a

discharged battery.

SIC3869

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on

when the cover on the vanity mirror is

opened.

When the cover is closed, the light will turn

off.

The lights will also turn off after a period

of time when the lights remain illuminated

to prevent the battery from becoming

discharged.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the

light will turn off.

The light will also turn off after a period of

time when the light remains illuminated

after the ignition switch has been pushed

to the OFF or LOCK position to prevent the

battery from becoming discharged.

The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-

held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver:

. Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates,

home and office lighting, entry door

locks and security systems.

. Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s battery is discharged or is

disconnected, HomeLink

will retain all

programming.

When the HomeLink

Universal Transcei-

ver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming proce-

dures (Example: new vehicle purchases).

Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink

Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes.

For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink

” later in this sec-

tion.

WARNING

. Do not use the HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver with any garage door opener

Instruments and controls 2-61

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS TRUNK LIGHT HomeLink

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

2-62 Instruments and controls

that lacks safety stop and reverse

features as required by federal safety

standards. (These standards became

effective for opener models manufac-

tured after April 1, 1982). A garage door

opener which cannot detect an object in

the path of a closing garage door and

then automatically stop and reverse,

does not meet current federal safety

standards. Using a garage door opener

without these features increases the risk

of serious injury or death.

. During the programming procedure your

garage door or security gate will open

and close (if the transmitter is within

range). Make sure that people or objects

are clear of the garage door, gate, etc.

that you are programming.

. Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe

exhaust gases; they contain colorless

and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon

monoxide is dangerous. It can cause

unconsciousness or death.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink

buttons, refer to the HomeLink

web site

at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

NOTE:

It is also recommended that a new battery

be placed in the hand-held transmitter of

the device being programmed to

HomeLink

for quicker programming and

accurate transmission of the radio-fre-

quency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away

from the HomeLink

surface, keeping

the HomeLink

indicator light

view.

JVI0428X

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink

button and handheld transmitter but-

ton. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink

indicator light

flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light flashes rapidly, both

buttons may be released. (The rapid

flashing indicates successful program-

ming.)

NOTE:

Some devices to be programmed may

require you to replace Step 2 with the

cycling procedure noted in the “Pro-

gramming HomeLink

for Canadian

customers and gate openers” later in

this section.

JVI0429X

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink

button and observe the

indicator light.

If the indicator light

is solid/

continuous, programming is com-

plete and your device should acti-

vate when the HomeLink

button is

pressed and released.

If the indicator light

blinks

rapidly for two seconds and then

turns to a solid/continuous light,

continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling

code device. A second person may

make the following steps easier. Use

a ladder or other device. Do not

stand on your vehicle to perform the

next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage, locate

the “learn” or “smart” button (the

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer but it is usually

located near where the hanging anten-

na wire is attached to the unit). If there

is difficulty locating the button, refer-

ence the garage door opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or

“smart” button.

NOTE:

Once the button is pressed, you have

approximately 30 seconds to initiate

the next step.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the programmed HomeLink

button for two seconds and release.

Repeat the “press/hold/release” se-

quence up to 3 times to complete the

programming process. HomeLink

should now activate your rolling code

equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your

HomeLink

buttons, refer to the

Instruments and controls 2-63

2-64 Instruments and controls

HomeLink

web site at: www.homelink.

com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE

OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink

to pick up the signal during

programming. Similar to this Canadian

law, some U.S. gate operators are de-

signed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having

difficulties programming a gate operator or

garage door opener by using the “Pro-

gramming HomeLink

” procedures, re-

place “Programming HomeLink

” Step 2

with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., unplug the device during the “cy-

cling” process to prevent possible damage

to the garage door opener components.

Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink

button and the hand-held transmitter

button. During programming, your hand-

held transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press and hold

the desired HomeLink

button while you

press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-

held transmitter every two seconds until

the frequency signal has been learned. The

HomeLink

indicator light will flash slowly

and then rapidly after several seconds

upon successful programming. DO NOT

release until the HomeLink

indicator light

flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. The rapid flashing

indicates successful programming.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink

”

step 3 to complete.

Remember to plug the device back in when

programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HomeLink

UNI-

VERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver, after

it is programmed, can be used to activate

the programmed device. To operate, simply

press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink

Universal Transceiver

button. The amber indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being trans-

mitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter

of the device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT-

ING

If the HomeLink

does not quickly learn

the hand-held transmitter information:

. replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.

. position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink

surface.

. press and hold both the HomeLink

and hand-held transmitter buttons

without interruption.

. position the hand-held transmitter 1-3

in (26-76 mm) away from the

HomeLink

surface. Hold the transmit-

ter in that position for up to 15

seconds. If HomeLink

is not pro-

grammed within that time, try holding

the transmitter in another position -

keeping the indicator light in view at all

times.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink

buttons, refer to the HomeLink

web site

at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-

FORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared.

However, individual buttons can be repro-

grammed, see “Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button” later in this section.

To clear all programming

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash in approximately

10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than

20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink

is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any time

beginning with “Programming HomeLink

”

- Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HomeLink

BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver button, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink

button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink

” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com or 1-

800-355-3515.

The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver but-

ton has now been reprogrammed. The new

device can be activated by pushing the

HomeLink

button that was just pro-

grammed. This procedure will not affect

any other programmed HomeLink

but-

tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device

that has been programmed into

HomeLink

. Consult the Owner’s Manual

of each device or call the manufacturer or

retailer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink

Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new transmit-

ter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-65

2-66 Instruments and controls

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys .................................................................... 3-2

Intelligent Key ................................................. 3-2

Valet hand-off.................................................. 3-3

Doors .................................................................. 3-4

Locking with mechanical key ........................... 3-4

Opening and closing windows with the

mechanical key................................................ 3-5

Locking with inside lock knob ......................... 3-5

Locking with power door lock switch ............... 3-5

Automatic door locks....................................... 3-6

Child safety rear door lock .............................. 3-6

Intelligent Key system ......................................... 3-7

Intelligent Key operating range........................ 3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution ....................... 3-9

Intelligent Key operation ............................... 3-10

Battery saver system ..................................... 3-11

Warning signals............................................. 3-12

Troubleshooting guide................................... 3-13

Remote keyless entry system ............................. 3-14

How to use remote keyless entry system....... 3-14

Hood ................................................................. 3-18

Trunk lid............................................................ 3-18

Trunk lid release switch................................. 3-19

Trunk open request switch........................... 3-19

Opening with key......................................... 3-20

Trunk open button ....................................... 3-20

Trunk release power cancel switch............... 3-20

Auto closure ................................................ 3-20

Interior trunk lid release .............................. 3-21

Fuel-filler door................................................... 3-22

Opening the fuel-filler door.......................... 3-22

Fuel-filler cap............................................... 3-22

Tilt/telescopic steering...................................... 3-24

Electric operation......................................... 3-24

Sun visors......................................................... 3-25

Mirrors.............................................................. 3-26

Inside mirror................................................ 3-26

Outside mirrors............................................ 3-26

Vanity mirror................................................ 3-28

Automatic drive positioner ................................ 3-28

Entry/exit function ....................................... 3-28

Seat synchronization function ..................... 3-29

Memory storage........................................... 3-30

Setting memory function.............................. 3-31

System operation......................................... 3-31

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in

the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see an

INFINITI retailer for duplicates by using the

key number. INFINITI does not record any

key numbers so it is very important to keep

track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, this

key can be duplicated by an INFINITI

retailer.

SPA2222

1. Intelligent Keys (2 sets)

2. Mechanical keys (inside the Keys) (2

sets)

3. Key number plate (1 set)

INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to

your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-

ponents and INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

System components. As many as 4 Intelli-

gent Keys can be registered and used with

one vehicle. The new keys must be

registered by an INFINITI retailer prior to

use with the Intelligent Key system and

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System of your

vehicle. Since the registration process

requires erasing all memory in the Intelli-

gent Key components when registering

new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent

Keys that you have to the INFINITI retailer.

It is possible that the Intelligent Key

functions become canceled. Contact an

INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a

precision device with a built-in transmit-

ter. To avoid damaging it, please note

the following.

—

The Intelligent Key is water resis-

tant; however, wetting may damage

the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent

Key gets wet, immediately wipe until

it is completely dry.

—

Do not bend, drop or strike it

against another object.

—

If the outside temperature is below

148F(−108C), the battery of the

Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

KEYS

—

Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in a place where

temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

—

Do not change or modify the In-

telligent Key.

—

Do not use a magnet key holder.

—

Do not place the Intelligent Key near

an electric appliance such as a

television set or personal computer.

—

Do not allow the Intelligent Key to

come into contact with water or salt

water, and do not wash it in a

washing machine. This could affect

the system function.

. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code

of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent

the Intelligent Key from unauthorized

use to unlock the vehicle. For informa-

tion regarding the erasing procedure,

please contact an INFINITI retailer.

SPA2033

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the

lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert

it into the Intelligent Key until the lock

knob returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the doors, glove box and trunk pass-

through lid, if they are equipped with a

key cylinder.

See “Doors” later in this section and

“Trunk lid” later in this section, “Storage”

in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section and “Seats” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-

straint system” section.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed in

the key.

VALET HAND-OFF

When you have to leave a key with a valet,

give them the Intelligent Key itself and

keep the mechanical key with you to

protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk

from being opened during valet hand-off,

follow the procedures below.

1. Push the trunk release power cancel

switch to the CANCEL side.

2. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

3. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass-

through with the mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,

keeping the mechanical key in your

pocket or bag for insertion into the

Intelligent Key when you retrieve your

vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

See “Trunk lid” later in this section,

“Storage” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “Seats” in the “1.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section.

WARNING

. Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat belts,

this provides greater safety in the event

of an accident by helping to prevent

persons from being thrown from the

vehicle. This also helps keep children

and others from unintentionally opening

the doors, and will help keep out

intruders.

. Before opening any door, always look for

and avoid oncoming traffic.

. Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly

activate switches or controls. Unat-

tended children could become involved

in serious accidents.

SPA2527

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors simultaneously

using the mechanical key.

. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to

the front of the vehicle

will lock all

doors.

. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder

once to the rear of the vehicle

will

unlock the driver’s door. After returning

the key to the neutral position

turning it to the rear again within 60

seconds will unlock all doors.

DOORS

. You can switch the lock system to the

mode that allows you to open all the

doors when the key is turned once.

(See “How to use SETTING button” in

the “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone

and voice recognition systems” sec-

tion.)

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS

WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY

The driver’s door key operation also allows

you to open and close the window that is

equipped with the automatic open/close

function. (See “Power windows” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section).

To open the window, turn the driver’s door

key cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for

longer than 1 second. The door is unlocked

and the window keeps opening while

turning the key.

This function can also be performed by

pushing and holding the door UNLOCK

button of the Intelligent Key. (See “Remote

keyless entry system” later in this section.)

To close the window, turn the driver’s door

key cylinder to the front of the vehicle for

longer than 1 second. The door is locked

and the window keeps closing while turn-

ing the key.

SPA2726

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the

inside lock knob to the lock position

then close the door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position

When locking the door without an Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the

Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.

SPA2727

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will

lock or unlock all the doors. The switches

are located on the driver’ s and front

passenger’s door armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power door

lock switch to the lock position

with the

driver’s or front passenger’s door open,

then close the door.

When locking the door this way, be certain

not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

door, push the power door lock switch to

the unlock position

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved

to the lock position and any door open, all

doors will lock and unlock automatically.

With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle

and any door open, all doors will unlock

automatically and a chime will sound after

the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the In-

telligent Key from being accidentally

locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

. All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24

km/h).

. All doors unlock automatically when the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

The automatic unlock function can be

deactivated or activated. To deactivate or

activate the automatic door unlock system,

perform the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position.

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step

2, push and hold the power door lock

switch to the

position (UNLOCK) for

more than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator

will flash twice. When deactivated, the

hazard indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in

the OFF and ON position again between

each setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is

deactivated, the doors do not unlock when

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position. To unlock the door manually, use

the inside lock knob or the power door lock

switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).

SPA2728

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

The child safety rear door lock helps

prevent doors from being opened acciden-

tally, especially when small children are in

the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock position

, the rear doors can be opened only

from the outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the

unlock position

WARNING

. Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufacturer

for the possible influences before use.

. The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pushed.

The FAA advises that the radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Make sure the buttons are not operated

unintentionally when the unit is stored

during a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all

the doors and the trunk lid using the

remote controller function or pushing the

request switch on the vehicle without

taking the key out from a pocket or purse.

The operating environment and/or condi-

tions may affect the Intelligent Key system

operation.

Be sure to read the following before using

the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

. Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicat-

ing with the vehicle as it receives radio

waves. The Intelligent Key system trans-

mits weak radio waves. Environmental

conditions may interfere with the operation

of the Intelligent Key system under the

following operating conditions.

. When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted,

such as a TV tower, power station and

broadcasting station.

. When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular telephone,

transceiver, and CB radio.

. When the Intelligent Key is in contact

with or covered by metallic materials.

. When any type of radio wave remote

control is used nearby.

. When the Intelligent Key is placed near

an electric appliance such as a perso-

nal computer.

. When the vehicle is parked near a

parking meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-

tions before using the Intelligent Key

function or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies

depending on the operating conditions,

the battery’s life is approximately 2 years.

If the battery is discharged, replace it with

a new one.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously

receiving radio waves, if the key is left near

equipment which transmits strong radio

waves, such as signals from a TV and

personal computer, the battery life may

become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a

battery, see “Intelligent Key battery repla-

cement” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

For models with a steering wheel lock

mechanism: Because the steering wheel is

locked electrically, unlocking the steering

wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK

position is impossible when the vehicle

battery is completely discharged. Pay

special attention that the vehicle battery

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. For

information about the purchase and use of

additional Intelligent Keys, contact an

INFINITI retailer.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to come

into contact with water or salt water.

This could affect the system function.

. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

. Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

. Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

. Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.

If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immedi-

ately wipe until it is completely dry.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

. If the outside temperature is below 148F

(−108C), the battery of the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

. Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

. Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment

and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code

of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This

may prevent the unauthorized use of the

Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For

information regarding the erasing proce-

dure, contact an INFINITI retailer.

SPA2538

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING

RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the request

switch

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent

Key system’s operating range becomes

narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not

function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80

cm) from each request switch

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the

operating range, it is possible for anyone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key to

push the request switch to lock/unlock the

doors and open the trunk lid.

SPA2407

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-

TION

. Do not push the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key held in

your hand as illustrated. The close

distance to the door handle will cause

the Intelligent Key system to have

difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

. After locking with the door handle

request switch, verify the doors are

securely locked by testing them.

. To prevent the Intelligent Key from

being left inside the vehicle or the

trunk, make sure you carry the key with

you and then lock the doors or the

trunk.

. Do not pull the door handle before

pushing the door handle request

switch. The door will be unlocked but

will not open. Release the door handle

once and pull it again to open the door.

. The Intelligent Key system (opening/

closing doors with the door handle

request switch) can be set to remain

inactive. (See “Vehicle information and

settings” in the “4. Monitor, climate,

audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section.)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2729

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the key out from your pocket or bag.

SPA2730

When you carry the Intelligent Key with

you, you can lock or unlock all doors by

pushing the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s)

within

the range of operation.

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash

and the horn (if so equipped) (or the

outside chime) will sound as a confirma-

tion. For details, see “Setting hazard

indicator and horn mode” later in this

section.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s)

while

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will

lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key

while the ignition switch is in the ACC

or ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent

Key while any door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock by pushing the

door handle request switch with the

Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.

However, when an Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle, doors can be

locked with another registered Intelli-

gent Key.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the door handle request switch

(driver’s or front passenger’s)

once

while carrying the Intelligent Key with

you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside chime sounds once. The corre-

sponding door will unlock.

The fuel-filler door will also unlock

when the driver’s door handle request

switch is pushed.

3. Push the door handle request switch

again within 1 minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside chime sounds once again. All

the doors will unlock.

All doors and the fuel-filler door will be

locked automatically unless one of the

following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the request switch

while the doors are locked.

. Opening any door

. Pushing the ignition switch

During this 1-minute time period, if the

UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key

is pushed, all doors will be locked auto-

matically after another 1 minute.

SPA2731

SPA2732

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the trunk open request switch

for more than 1 second.

2. The trunk will unlatch. An outside

chime will sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key system.

When the trunk lid is closed with the

Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside

chime will sound and the trunk will open.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met

for a period of time, the battery saver

system will cut off the power supply to

prevent batter y discharge.

. The ignition switch is in the ACC

position, and

. All doors are closed, and

. The selector lever is in the P (Park)

position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of

the Intelligent Key listed on the following

chart or to help prevent the vehicle from

being stolen, chime or beep sounds inside

and outside the vehicle and a warning

displays in the dot matrix liquid crystal

display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the

warning displays, be sure to check the

vehicle and Intelligent Key.

See “Troubleshooting guide” later in this

section and “Dot matrix liquid crystal

display” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch

to stop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display

and the inside warning chime sounds con-

tinuously.

The selector lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

When opening the driver’s door to

get out of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds continu-

ously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

When closing the door after get-

ting out of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the display,

the outside chime sounds 3 times and the

inside warning chime sounds for a few

seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display

and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF

position and the selector lever is not in

the P (Park) position.

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

When closing the door with the

inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds

and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle

or trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the request switch

or LOCK button on the Intelligent

Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle

or trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

When closing the trunk lid

The outside chime sounds for approximately

10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves

when the buttons are pushed. The FAA

advises that the radio waves may affect

aircraft navigation and communication sys-

tems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key

while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons

are not operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored during a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel-

filler door, activate the panic alarm and

open the windows by pushing the buttons

on the Intelligent Key from outside the

vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key can operate at a distance of

approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the

vehicle. (The effective distance depends

upon the conditions around the vehicle.)

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used

with one vehicle. For information concern-

ing the purchase and use of additional

Intelligent Keys, contact an INFINITI retai-

ler.

The lock and unlock buttons on the

Intelligent Key will not operate when:

. the distance between the Intelligent Key

and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).

. the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

After locking with the remote keyless entry

function, pull the door handle to make sure

the doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies

depending on the environment. To securely

operate the lock and unlock buttons,

approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m)

from the door.

SPA2100

1. LOCK button

2. UNLOCK button

3. TRUNK button

4. PANIC button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

When you lock or unlock the doors or the

trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash

and the horn (or the outside chime) will

sound as a confirmation. For details, see

“Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”

later in this section.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position and make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.

3. Push the LOCK

button

on the

Intelligent Key.

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door will

lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and

the horn chirps once.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key

while the ignition switch is in the ACC

or ON position.

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Push the UNLOCK button

on the

Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door and fuel-filler door will

unlock.

3. Push the UNLOCK

button on the

Intelligent Key again within 1 minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once

again. All the doors will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically

unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute after pushing

the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key

while the doors are locked. If during this 1-

minute time period, the UNLOCK button on

the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will

be locked automatically after another 1

minute.

. Opening any door

. Pushing the ignition switch

Opening windows

The UNLOCK button

operation also

allows you to open the window that is

equipped with the automatic open/close

function. (See “Power windows” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section).

To open the window, push the door

UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key

for about 3 seconds after the door is

unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK

button.

If the window open operation is stopped in

mid-operation while pushing the UNLOCK

button, release and push the UNLOCK

button again until the window opens

completely.

Window cannot be closed using the In-

telligent Key.

The door window can also be operated by

turning the mechanical key in a door lock.

(See “Doors” earlier in this section.)

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button

on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The trunk will unlatch.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

For model with auto closure function:

If the trunk lid does not unlock, push the

trunk request switch and manually lift the

trunk lid if:

. there is snow on the trunk lid.

. a heavy object such as rear spoiler is

attached to the trunk lid.

. the trunk lid is frozen.

When the auto closure operation is per-

formed repeatedly in a short period of

time, the auto closure function may be

temporarily disabled. If this occurs, wait a

few minutes until the motor cools down. If

the auto closure still does not operate,

have the system checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel

threatened, you may activate the alarm to

call attention as follows:

1. Push the PANIC

button

on the

key for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights

will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

It has run for 25 seconds, or

Any of the buttons on the Intelligent

Key are pushed. (Note: Panic button

should be pushed for more than 1

second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and

horn mode when you first receive the

vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when

the LOCK

button

is pushed, the

hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn

chirps once. When the UNLOCK

button

is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes

once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can

be switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes twice. When the UNLOCK

button is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or trunk

request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - 4

times

Remote keyless entry system

(Using

, or button)

HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or trunk

request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

Remote keyless entry system

(Using

, or button)

HAZARD - twice

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn

(chime) operation, push the LOCK

and UNLOCK

buttons on the In-

telligent Key simultaneously for more than

2 seconds.

. When the hazard indicator mode is set,

the hazard indicator flashes 3 times.

. When the hazard indicator and horn

mode is set, the hazard indicator

flashes once and the horn chirps once.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2733

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

located below the instrument panel;

the hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever

up at the front of the

hood with your fingertips and raise the

hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close

the hood down to latch both the right

and left locks. Push the hood down to

lock the hood securely into place.

WARNING

. Make sure the hood is completely closed

and latched before driving. Failure to do

so could cause the hood to fly open and

result in an accident.

. If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

WARNING

. Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases to

be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust

gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

. Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from play-

ing and becoming locked in the trunk

where they could be seriously injured.

Keep the car locked, with the trunk

closed, when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to Intelligent Keys.

HOOD TRUNK LID

SPA2734

TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH

The trunk lid release switch

is located

on the instrument panel.

To open the trunk lid, push the release

switch. To close, push the trunk lid down.

You can open the trunk lid with Intelligent

Key. (See “Intelligent Key system” earlier in

this section or “ Remote keyless entry

system” earlier in this section.)

Auto closure function

If the trunk lid does not unlock, push the

trunk request switch and manually lift the

trunk lid if:

. there is snow on the trunk lid.

. a heavy object such as rear spoiler is

attached to the trunk lid.

. the trunk lid is frozen.

When the auto closure operation is per-

formed repeatedly in a short period of

time, the auto closure function may be

temporarily disabled. If this occurs, wait a

few minutes until the motor cools down. If

the auto closure still does not operate,

have the system checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

SPA2732

TRUNK OPEN REQUEST SWITCH

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the

trunk open request switch

when the

Intelligent Key is within the operating

range of the trunk lock/unlock function

regardless of the inside lock knob position.

(See “Intelligent Key system” earlier in this

section.)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2766

OPENING WITH KEY

To open the trunk lid, insert the mechanical

key to the trunk key cylinder and turn the

key to the right side of the vehicle. To

close, remove the key and push the trunk

lid down.

TRUNK OPEN BUTTON

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the

TRUNK OPEN button

on the Intelligent

Key for more than 1 second.

SPA2767

TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL

SWITCH

When the switch located inside the glove

box is in the OFF position

, the power to

the trunk lid will be canceled and the trunk

lid cannot be opened by the trunk lid

release switch, the trunk open request

switch or the TRUNK button on the

Intelligent Key.

When you have to leave the vehicle with a

valet and want to keep your belongings

safe in the glove box and the trunk, push

this switch to OFF and lock the glove box

with the mechanical key. Then leave the

vehicle and the Intelligent Key with the

valet and keep the mechanical key with

you.

See “Keys” earlier in this section.

To connect the power to the trunk lid, push

the switch to the ON

position.

AUTO CLOSURE

If the trunk lid is pulled down to a partly

open position, the trunk lid will pull itself

to the closed position.

Do not apply excessive force when the

auto closure is operating. Excessive force

applied may cause the mechanism to

malfunction.

CAUTION

. The trunk lid will automatically close

from a partly open position. To avoid

pinching, keep hands and fingers away

from trunk lid opening.

. Do not let children operate the trunk lid.

The auto closure may not function if the

battery is weak. If the auto closure does

not work, close the trunk lid manually, or

perform the auto closure operation again

after starting the engine.

If the auto closure operation is performed

repeatedly with the trunk overloaded, the

auto closure may not operate properly.

Reduce the amount of items in trunk. If the

auto closure still does not operate, have

the system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

SPA2768

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from playing

and becoming locked in the trunk where

they could be seriously injured. Keep the car

locked, with the trunk lid securely latched,

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to Intelligent Keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism

allows opening of the trunk lid in the event

that people become locked inside the trunk

or in the event of the loss of electrical

power such as a discharged battery.

Releasing inside the trunk

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull

the release handle

until the lock

releases and push up on the trunk lid.

The release lever is made of a material that

glows in the dark after a brief exposure to

ambient light.

The handle is located on the back of the

trunk lid as illustrated.

Releasing from the rear seat

You can access the release handle through

the trunk pass-through (rear seat armrest).

(See “Armrest” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section.)

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,

pull the release handle towards front of

vehicle until the lock releases.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2735

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-

filler door by using one of the following

operations, then push the upper left side

of the door.

. Push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key carried with

you.

. Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key.

. Insert the mechanical key into the door

lock cylinder and turn it to the rear of

the vehicle.

. Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely

and lock all doors by operating the door

handle request switch, the LOCK button on

the Intelligent Key, the mechanical key or

the power door lock switch.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

. Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop engine and do not smoke or

allow open flames or sparks near the

vehicle when refueling.

. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

. Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap can

result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause the

malfunction indicator light to come on.

. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

. Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

—

Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

—

Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

—

Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

—

Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

damage.

. Insert the cap straight into the fuel-filler

tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap

clicks. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler

cap properly may cause the

mal-

function indicator light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the

light illuminates

because the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

light should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the

light does not turn off

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected by an INFINITI retailer.

. The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear

if the fuel-filler cap is not properly

tightened. It may take a few driving

trips for the message to be displayed.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning appears may cause the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to

illuminate.

. For additional information, see “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section.

JVP0046X

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise

to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

SPA2832

Loose fuel cap warning

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on

the dot matrix liquid crystal display when

the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly

after the vehicle has been refueled. It may

take a few driving trips for the warning to

be displayed.

To turn off the warning, perform the

following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

soon as possible. (See “Fuel-filler cap”

earlier in this section.)

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

3. Push the reset switch

on the right

side of the combination meter panel for

longer than 1 second to turn off the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning after tighten-

ing the fuel cap.

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

. Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and comfort.

The driver’s air bag inflates with great

force. If you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of

position in any way, you are at greater

risk of injury or death in a crash. You

may also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel. Always use the

seat belts.

SPA2737

ELECTRIC OPERATION

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steering wheel

up or down, forward or rearward to the

desired position.

Entry/Exit function operation:

The automatic drive positioner system will

make the steering wheel move up auto-

matically when the driver’s door is opened

with the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. This lets the driver get into and

out of the seat more easily.

For more information, see “Automatic drive

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

positioner” later in this section.

SPA2471

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor from the center

mount and swing the visor to the side

3. Slide the sun visor

in or out as

needed.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

SUN VISORS

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the

inside mirror to the desired position.

SPA2450

Automatic anti-glare type

The inside mirror is designed so that it

automatically changes reflection according

to the intensity of the headlights of the

following vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automatically

turned on when the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position.

The anti-glare system also operates for the

outside rearview mirrors.

When the anti-glare system is turned on,

the indicator light

will illuminate and

excessive glare from the headlights of the

vehicle behind you will be reduced.

Push the “*” switch

to make the

inside rearview mirror operate normally.

The indicator light will turn off. Push the “I”

switch

to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the

sensors

or apply glass cleaner on

them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity

of the sensor, resulting in improper

operation.

For the HomeLink

Universal Transceiver

operation, see “ HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the

passenger side are closer than they appear.

Be careful when moving to the right. Using

only this mirror could cause an accident.

Use the inside mirror or glance over your

shoulder to properly judge distances to

other objects.

MIRRORS

SPA2739

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located

on the armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Move the switch right or left to select the

right or left side mirror

, then adjust

using the control switch

Defrosting outside mirrors

The outside mirrors will be heated when

the rear window defroster switch is oper-

ated.

SPA2738

Foldable outside mirrors

CAUTION

. Do not touch the mirrors while they are

moving. Your hand may be pinched, and

the mirror may malfunction.

. Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You

will be unable to see behind the vehicle.

. If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by

hand, there is a chance that the mirror

will move forward or backward during

driving. If the mirrors were folded or

unfolded by hand, be sure to adjust

them again electrically before driving.

The outside rearview mirror remote control

operates when the ignition switch is in the

“ACC” or “ON” position.

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push

the outside rearview mirror folding switch

to the CLOSE position

. To unfold, push

to the OPEN position

If mirrors are manually operated or

bumped, the mirror body can become

loose at the pivot point. To correct electro-

nic mirror operation, cycle mirrors by

pushing the “CLOSE” switch until comple-

tely closed, then push “OPEN” until mirror

is in the open position.

Reverse tilt-down feature

When backing up the vehicle, the right and

left outside mirrors will turn downward

automatically to provide better rear visibi-

lity.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position.

2. Move the selector lever to the R

(Reverse) position.

3. Select the right or left side mirror by

operating the outside mirror control

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

switch.

4. The outside mirror surface moves

downward.

When one of the following conditions has

occurred, the outside mirror surface will

return to its original position.

. The selector lever is moved to any

position other than R (Reverse).

. The outside mirror control switch is set

to the center position.

. The ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position.

Automatic anti-glare

The outside rearview mirrors are designed

so that its automatically change reflection

according to the intensity of the headlights

of the vehicle following you.

The anti-glare system will be automatically

turned on when you push the ignition

switch to the “ON” position.

SIC3869

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down

the sun visor and pull up the cover.

The automatic drive positioner system has

four features:

. Entry/exit function

. Seat synchronization function

. Memory storage

. Setting memory function

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s

seat and steering column will automati-

cally move when the selector lever is in the

P (Park) position. This allows the driver to

get into and out of the driver’s seat more

easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and

the steering wheel will move up when the

driver’s door is opened with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will

return to the previous positions when the

ignition switch is pushed to the ACC

position.

The driver’s seat will not return to the

previous positions if the seat or steering

adjusting switch is operated when the seat

is at the exit position.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

Cancel or activate entry/exit func-

tion

The selector lever must be in the P (Park)

position with the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The entry/exit function can be activated or

canceled by pressing and holding the SET

switch for more than 10 seconds.

The indicator lights on the memor y

switches (1 and 2) will blink once when

the function is canceled, and the indicator

lights will blink twice when the function is

activated. Note that the indicator lights

may illuminate after 5 seconds while

holding the SET switch. This indicates

readiness for linking the Intelligent Key to

a stored memory position. Keep the SET

switch pressed for more than 10 seconds

to turn on or off the entry/exit function.

The entry/exit function can also be acti-

vated or canceled if the “Lift Steering

Wheel on Exit” key or “Slide Driver Seat

Back on Exit” key is turned to ON or OFF in

the “Comfort settings” settings. (See “Ve-

hicle information and settings” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section.)

Initialize entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if

the fuse opens, the entry/exit function will

not work though this function was set on

before. In such a case, after connecting the

battery or replacing with a new fuse, open

and close the driver’s door more than two

times after the ignition switch is turned

from the ON position to the LOCK position.

The entry/exit function will be activated.

SPA2792

SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION

The seat synchronization function automa-

tically adjusts the positions of the steering

wheel and outside mirrors when the seat is

adjusted using the power seat switches.

However, the steering wheel and outside

mirrors will not move if the seat is adjusted

over the maximum thresholds. The system

considers that the steering wheel and

outside mirror adjustments are not neces-

sary because the seat may not be adjusted

for the driving position. Note that the

function is set to disabled as the factory

default setting.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The seat synchronization function operates

under the following conditions:

. The ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

. The selector lever is in the P (Park)

position.

If the outside mirrors or the steering wheel

reaches its maximum adjustment, the

function is automatically disabled. Restar t

the function by selecting a previously

stored seat memory position using the

memory switches (1 or 2). An Intelligent

Key that was previously linked to the

stored seat memory can also be used to

restart the function.

If a seat position was not previously stored

in the seat memory, restart the function by

adjusting the steering wheel and outside

mirrors manually for your best driving

position and then drive the vehicle above

4 MPH (7 km/h).

Cancel or activate seat synchroni-

zation function

The selector lever must be in the P (Park)

position with the ignition switch in the ACC

position.

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering

column and outside mirrors can be stored

in the automatic drive positioner memory.

Follow these procedures to use the mem-

ory system.

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering col-

umn and outside mirrors to the desired

positions by manually operating each

adjusting switch. For additional infor-

mation, see “Seats” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section and “Tilt/

telescopic steering” earlier in this

section and “Outside mirrors” earlier

in this section.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5

seconds, push the memory switch (1

or 2) fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed

memory switch will stay on for approxi-

mately 5 seconds after pushing the

switch.

If memory is stored in the same

memory switch, the previous memory

will be deleted.

Linking Intelligent Key to a stored

memory position

The Intelligent Key can be linked to a

stored memory position with the following

procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory

position.

2. While the indicator light for the memory

switch being set is illuminated for 5

seconds, push the

button on the

Intelligent Key. If the indicator light

blinks, the Intelligent Key is linked to

that memory setting.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion, and then push the

button on the

Intelligent Key. The driver’s seat, steering

wheel and outside mirrors will move to the

memorized position.

Confirming memory storage

. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position and push the SET switch. If

the main memory has not been stored,

the indicator light will come on for

approximately 0.5 second. When the

memory has stored in position, the

indicator light will stay on for approxi-

mately 5 seconds.

. If the battery cable is disconnected, or if

the fuse opens, the memory will be

canceled. In this case, reset the desired

position using the previous procedure.

. If optional Intelligent Keys are added to

your vehicle, the memory storage pro-

cedure to switch 1 or 2 and linking

Intelligent Key procedure to a stored

memory position should be performed

again for each Intelligent Key. For

additional Intelligent Key information,

see “Keys” earlier in this section.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Use one of the following methods to

move the driver’s seat, the outside

mirrors and the steering wheel.

Push the ignition switch to the ON

position and push the memory

switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1

second.

Within 45 seconds of opening the

driver’s door, push the memory

switch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1

second.

The driver’s seat, steering column

and outside mirrors will move to the

memorized position with the indica-

tor light flashing, and then the light

will stay on for approximately 5

seconds.

SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION

The status of the following settings can be

linked to the Intelligent Key and the

memorized settings can be available for

each Intelligent Key.

. Climate control system

. Navigation system (if so equipped)

. Audio system

To use the memory function, lock the doors

with the Intelligent Key that is linked to the

settings.

To enable the memorized settings:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked

to the settings, and unlock the doors by

pushing the driver’s door handle re-

quest switch or UNLOCK

button on

the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the ignition switch to the “ON”

position. “Connection with the key has

been done” will be displayed on the

screen and the memorized settings are

available (only when a new Intelligent

Key is used).

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will

not work or will stop operating under the

following conditions:

. When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH

(7 km/h).

. When the adjusting switch for the

driver’s seat and steering column is

turned on while the automatic drive

positioner is operating.

. When the memory switch 1 or 2 is not

pushed for at least 1 second.

. When the seat, steering column and

outside mirrors have already been

moved to the memorized position.

. When no position is stored in the

memory switch.

. When the engine is started while

moving the automatic drive positioner.

. When the selector lever is moved from

the P (Park) position to any other

position. (However, it will not be

canceled if the switch is pushed while

the seat and steering column are

returning to the previous positions

(entry/exit function).)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

. When the driver’s door remains open

for more than 45 seconds and the

ignition switch is not in the ON posi-

tion.

. The seat synchronization function is

automatically disabled if the outside

mirrors or steering wheel reaches its

maximum adjustment.

. The seat synchronization function will

not operate if the seat is adjusted over

one of the following maximum thresh-

olds:

— Seat sliding: 3.0 in (76 mm)

— Seatback reclining: 9.1 degrees

— Seat lifter (rear side): 0.8 in (20 mm)

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-

tion systems

Safety note.......................................................... 4-3

Center multi-function control panel...................... 4-4

How to use INFINITI controller.......................... 4-6

How to use touch screen (models with

navigation system) .......................................... 4-6

Menu options (models with

navigation system) .......................................... 4-8

How to select menus on the screen................. 4-9

Vehicle information and settings........................ 4-10

How to use STATUS button ............................ 4-10

How to use brightness control and display

ON/OFF button .............................................. 4-10

How to use DISP button ................................ 4-10

How to use ECON button (models without

navigation system) ........................................ 4-10

How to use INFO button ................................ 4-10

How to use SETTING button........................... 4-16

RearView monitor .............................................. 4-27

How to read displayed lines.......................... 4-27

How to park with predictive course lines ....... 4-28

Difference between predictive and

actual distances ............................................ 4-29

Predictive course line settings ....................... 4-32

How to adjust screen .................................... 4-32

Sonar indicator (if so equipped) .................... 4-33

Operating tips.............................................. 4-33

Ventilators ........................................................ 4-34

Automatic climate control.................................. 4-34

Automatic climate control (Type A) ............... 4-37

Automatic climate control (Type B)............... 4-41

Forest Air

(if so equipped) ......................... 4-43

Operating tips.............................................. 4-47

Linking intelligent key.................................. 4-48

In-cabin microfilter....................................... 4-48

Servicing climate control.............................. 4-48

Audio system .................................................... 4-49

Audio operation precautions ........................ 4-49

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc

(CD) player................................................... 4-64

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player operation

(models with navigation system).................. 4-68

USB input operation .................................... 4-71

Bluetooth

streaming audio (models with

navigation system)....................................... 4-76

iPod

player operation ................................ 4-81

CD/DVD/USB memory care and cleaning...... 4-83

Steering-wheel-mounted controls

for audio ..................................................... 4-84

Antenna....................................................... 4-85

Car phone or CB radio ....................................... 4-86

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

(models with navigation system)........................ 4-86

Regulatory information .................................. 4-88

Voice commands ........................................... 4-88

Control buttons ............................................. 4-88

Connecting procedure.................................... 4-89

Phone selection............................................. 4-89

Vehicle phonebook........................................ 4-89

Making a call ................................................ 4-92

Receiving a call ............................................. 4-93

During a call ................................................. 4-94

Phone setting................................................ 4-94

Troubleshooting guide................................... 4-96

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

(models without navigation system)................... 4-97

Regulatory information .................................. 4-98

Control buttons ............................................. 4-99

Voice recognition system ............................. 4-99

Pairing procedure ...................................... 4-104

Phonebook registration.............................. 4-105

Making a call............................................. 4-106

Receiving a call.......................................... 4-106

During a call.............................................. 4-106

Phone settings........................................... 4-107

Voice adaptation mode .............................. 4-110

INFINITI Voice Recognition system

(models with navigation system) ..................... 4-111

INFINITI Voice Recognition

standard mode .......................................... 4-112

Using the system....................................... 4-115

INFINITI Voice Recognition alternate

command mode......................................... 4-124

Using the system....................................... 4-133

Troubleshooting guide ............................... 4-139

WARNING

. Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

. Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

. In case you notice any foreign object in

the system hardware, spill liquid on it,

or notice smoke or smell coming from it,

stop using the system immediately and

contact your nearest INFINITI retailer.

Ignoring such conditions may lead to

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

. Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake to view the

images on the front center display

screen.

Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme temperature conditions [below

−48F(−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].

Operating this system under these condi-

tions may result in system malfunctions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

SAFETY NOTE

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2953

Models with navigation system

1. “DISP” display setting button (P.4-10)

2, 5, 6.

For navigation system control buttons

(Refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.)

3. “INFO” vehicle and navigation infor-

mation button (P.4-10)

4. “SETTING” button (P.4-16)

7. INFINITI controller (P.4-6)

8. “STATUS” status display button

(P.4-10)

9. “

OFF” brightness control and

display ON/OFF button (P.4-10)

CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL

SAA2954

Models without navigation system

1. “INFO” vehicle information button

(P.4-10)

2. “STATUS” status display button

(P.4-10)

3. “DISP” display setting button (P.4-10)

4. “

” brightness UP button (P.4-10)

5. “

ECON” button (P.4-10)

6. “SETTING” button (P.4-16)

7. INFINITI controller (P.4-6)

8. “

OFF” brightness control and

display ON/OFF button (P.4-10)

9. “

” brightness DOWN button

(P.4-10)

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will use up all the battery power,

and the engine will not start.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2955

Models with navigation system

SAA2956

Models without navigation system

HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display by rotating

or pushing the center dial

upward/

downward, and push the ENTER button

for operation.

If you push the BACK button

before the

setup is completed, the setup will be

canceled and/or the display will return to

the previous screen.

After the setup is completed, push the

BACK button

and return to the previous

screen.

For the VOICE button

functions, refer to

the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

(models with navigation system)

CAUTION

. The glass screen on the liquid crystal

display may break if it is hit with a hard

or sharp object. If the glass screen

breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could

result in an injury.

. To clean the display, use a soft, dry

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary,

use a small amount of neutral detergent

with a soft cloth. Never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

. Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

To ensure safe driving, some functions

cannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not

available while driving will be “ grayed

out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then

operate the navigation system.

WARNING

. ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

. Avoid using vehicle features that could

distract you. If distracted, you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an

accident.

SAA2473

Example

Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations as

those for the INFINITI controller are possi-

ble using the touch screen operation.

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select it. To select the

“Audio” settings, touch the “Audio” area

on the screen.

Touch the “BACK”

key to return to the

previous screen.

SAA2474

Adjusting an item:

Touch the +

or −

key to adjust the

settings.

Touch the

key to move to

the previous or next item.

Touch the

key to move to

the previous or next page.

SAA2475

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number

There are some options available when

inputting characters.

. Uppercase:

Shows uppercase characters.

. Lowercase:

Shows lowercase characters.

. Symbols:

Shows symbols such as the question

mark (?).

. Space:

Inserts a space.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. Delete:

Deletes the last character that has been

input with one touch. Push and hold to

delete all of the characters.

. OK:

Completes character inputs.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry,

soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-

sary, use a small amount of neutral

detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray

the screen with water or detergent. Dam-

pen the cloth first, and then wipe the

screen.

SAA3011

MENU OPTIONS (models with navi-

gation system)

The start menu can be displayed using the

menu control switch on the steering-wheel-

mounted controls.

1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is

displayed, push and hold the menu

control switch until the “Menu Options”

screen appears.

2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting

the menu control switch up or down,

and then push the menu control switch

to select it.

SAA2476

Available items

Destination/Route:

These items are for the navigation system.

See the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for details.

Info:

Displays the information screen. It is the

same screen that appears when you push

the INFO button.

Settings:

Displays the settings screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you push the

SETTING button.

SAA2477

Models with navigation system

SAA3149

Models without navigation system

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the display

screen in menus. To select each key item,

highlight the preferred item using the

INFINITI controller and push the ENTER

button.

Whenever a menu selection is made or

menu item is highlighted, different areas

on the screen provide you with important

information. See the following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the

current screen.

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within

that menu screen.

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:

Shows that the INFINITI controller may

be used to move UP/DOWN on the

screen and select more options.

4. Menu Items Counter:

Shows the total number of items listed

across all pages for the current menu.

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)

about the menu selection currently

highlighted.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON

You can check information related to the

audio, climate control system, fuel con-

sumption and navigation system (if so

equipped) by pressing the STATUS button

repeatedly.

HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-

TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

Push the “ OFF” button to switch the

display brightness to the daytime mode or

the nighttime mode, and to adjust the

display brightness using the INFINITI con-

troller while the indicator is displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

Push and hold the “

OFF” button for

more than 2 seconds to turn the display

off. Push the button again to turn the

display on.

Models without navigation system:

The display brightness can also be ad-

justed using the “

” button or “ ”

button.

HOW TO USE DISP BUTTON

Push the DISP button to show the display

setting screen. (See “Display settings

(models without navigation system)” or

“Display settings (models with navigation

system)” later in this section .)

HOW TO USE ECON BUTTON (mod-

els without navigation system)

Push the “ ECON” button to show fuel

economy information. (See “Fuel Economy

information” later in this section.)

HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON

The display screen shows vehicle and

navigation (if so equipped) information

for your convenience.

The information shown on the screen

should be a guide to determine the

condition of the vehicle. See the following

for details.

JVH0256M

Models with navigation system

SAA2145

Models without navigation system

VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS

Vehicle information display

1. Push the INFO button on the control

panel.

2. Select an item from the INFO menu.

3. After viewing or adjusting the informa-

tion on the following screens, push the

BACK button to return to the INFO

menu.

See the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual for the following items:

. Infiniti Connection

. Traffic Info

. Weather Info

. Where am I?

. Map Update

. Navigation Version

. GPS Position

When the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the “Navigation Version” key is

displayed after selecting the “Others” key.

SAA2479

Models with navigation system

SAA2480

Models with navigation system

JVH0180M

Models without navigation system

JVH0181M

Models without navigation system

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Fuel Economy information

The approximate distance to empty, aver-

age fuel economy and current fuel econo-

my will be displayed for reference.

To reset the average fuel economy (Avg

Fuel Econ), select the “Reset Fuel Eco” or

“Reset” key.

If the “Fuel Eco History” or “View” key is

selected, the average fuel consumption

history will be displayed in graph form

along with the average for the previous

Reset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US”

and “Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING

button” later in this section.)

The fuel economy information may differ

from the information displayed on the

vehicle information display. This is due to

the timing difference in updating the

information and does not indicate a mal-

function.

For models without the navigation system,

the information can be displayed by

pushing the

ECON button on the

control panel.

JVH0248X

Models with navigation system

JVH0249X

Models without navigation system

TIRE PRESSURE information

WARNING

. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, tire pressure will not be

indicated, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

. Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

The tire pressure will be displayed for

reference.

The pressure indication “*** kPa” or “***

psi” on the screen means that the pressure

is being measured. After a few driving

trips, the pressure for each tire will be

displayed.

For models with navigation system, to

change the measurement units, select the

“Select Units” key with the INFINITI con-

troller and push the ENTER button.

The unit can be converted in the LANGUAGE

& UNITS settings display. (See “How to use

SETTING button” later in this section for

details.)

In case of low tire pressure, LOW PRES-

SURE information will be displayed on the

screen. Check the pressure of all tires.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling

condition and the temperature.

After tire rotation is performed, tire pres-

sure will not be displayed in the actual tire

position. Drive the vehicle at over 25 MPH

(40 km/h) for approximately 10 minutes to

reset the display.

For more details about the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS), see “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC

position, the “Tire Pressure” key is not

displayed.

SAA2481

SAA2482

Models with navigation system

JVH0183M

JVH0184M

Models without navigation system

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Maintenance information

The maintenance intervals can be dis-

played for the engine oil, oil filter, tire

and other reminders.

To set a maintenance interval, select a

preferred item from the list.

You can also set to display a message to

remind you that the maintenance needs to

be performed.

The following example shows how to set

the engine oil maintenance information.

Use the same steps to set the other

maintenance information.

1. Set the interval (mileage) of the main-

tenance schedule. To determine the

recommended maintenance interval,

refer to your “INFINITI Service and

Maintenance Guide”.

2. To display the reminder automatically

when the desired distance is reached,

select the “Reminder” key.

3. Reset the driving distance to the new

maintenance schedule.

4. To return to the previous screen, push

the BACK button.

The unit can be converted between “US”

and “Metric”. (See “How to use SETTING

button” later in this section.)

SAA3003

Models with navigation system

SAA1611

Models without navigation system

The Reminder will be automatically dis-

played when the specified distance has

been driven and every time the ignition

switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position.

The reminder will not appear while driving.

Select the “OK” key to hide the reminder

for the rest of the current drive.

To stop the reminder from appearing,

perform one of the following actions:

. Select the “Reset Distance” key.

. Deactivate the “Reminder”.

. Increase the “Interval” distance to be

more than the current distance being

tracked.

JVH0272M

Others information (models with

navigation system)

The Others information display will appear

when pushing the INFO button and select-

ing the “Others” key.

Map Update:

For the details of this item, see the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

Navigation Version:

For the details of this item, see the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

When the ignition switch is in the ignition

position, the “Navigation Version” key is

displayed after pushing the INFO button.

GPS Position:

For the details of this item, see the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

Voice Recognition:

For the details of this item, see “INFINITI

Voice Recognition system (models with

navigation system)” later in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA3009

Models with navigation system

JVH0250X

Models without navigation system

HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON

The display as illustrated will appear when

the SETTING button is pushed.

For navigation settings, refer to the sepa-

rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA2485

Models with navigation system

JVH0251X

Models without navigation system

Audio settings

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting

the “Audio” key.

Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:

To adjust the speaker tone quality and

sound balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”,

“Balance” or “Fade” key and adjust it with

the INFINITI controller.

These items can also be adjusted by

pushing and turning the AUDIO knob.

Speed Sensitive Vol. (if so equipped):

The audio system’s volume is increased

with the vehicle speed. Select the “Speed

Sensitive Vol.” key and adjust the effect

level with the INFINITI controller. The Speed

Sensitive Volume function is turned off

when the level is set to OFF. Increasing the

value will cause the volume to increase

faster with vehicle speed.

Precision Phased Audio (if so equipped):

When this item is turned to ON, super high

pitch sound and super low pitch sound are

emphasized and midrange sound is played

naturally.

BOSE

Centerpoint

(if so equipped):

When this item is turned to ON, an exciting

surround sound effect is generated from a

traditional stereo recording.

BOSE

AudioPilot

(if so equipped):

BOSE

AudioPilot

adjusts the volume and

sound quality depending on the changes of

the vehicle speeds and the noise picked up

by the microphone. It compensates for

noise for different road surface conditions

and open windows.

Surround Effect (if so equipped):

To adjust the surround sound volume,

select “Surround Effect” key and adjust it

with the INFINITI controller.

DivX

Registration Code (models with

navigation system):

The registration code for a device that is

used to download DivX

files will be

displayed on the screen. If a disc is loaded

or a USB memory is connected to the audio

system, this function will not be activated.

Display Album Cover Art (models with

navigation system):

When this item is turned to ON, the album

cover image is displayed when playing

iPod

or MP3 music files through a CD,

DVD or USB memory. When the image is

not properly embedded in the file or

device, the image will not be displayed.

Phone settings (models with navi-

gation system)

For details of the “Phone” settings, see

“Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

(models with navigation system)” later in

this section.

Bluetooth

settings (models with

navigation system)

For details of the “Bluetooth

” settings,

see “Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

(models with navigation system)” later in

this section or “Bluetooth

streaming

audio (models with navigation system)”

later in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2554

Volume and Beeps settings (models

with navigation system)

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button, selecting the

“Volume & Beeps” key.

Audio Volume:

To increase or decrease the audio volume,

select the “Audio Volume” key and adjust

it with the INFINITI controller. You can also

adjust the audio volume by turning the

VOLUME control knob.

Guidance Volume:

To adjust the guidance voice volume, select

the “Guidance Volume” key and adjust it

with the INFINITI controller.

You can also adjust the guidance voice

volume by turning the VOLUME control

knob while voice guidance is being an-

nounced.

Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call:

For the details of these items, see “Blue-

tooth

Hands-Free Phone System (models

with navigation system)” later in this

section.

Switch Beeps:

When this item is turned to ON, you will

hear a beep sound when you use a button.

Guidance Voice:

When this item is turned to ON, you will

hear voice guidance in the navigation

operation or in other operations.

NOTE:

When the voice guidance is being an-

nounced during audio playback, turning

the volume knob does not adjust the

music level; it adjusts the guidance

volume level. If voice guidance is not

being heard, please check the Guidance

Volume level.

JVH0176M

Switch Beeps settings (models

without navigation system)

The “Switch Beeps” screen will appear

when pushing the SETTING button, select-

ing the “Switch Beeps” key with the

INFINITI controller and pushing the ENTER

button.

Switch Beeps:

When this item is turned to ON, you will

hear a beep sound when you use a button.

ECO DRIVE settings (if so equipped)

To adjust the Eco pedal driver’s assist,

select the “Standard”, “Soft“ or “OFF” key

and adjust it with the INFINITI controller.

For the details of “ECO DRIVE”, see “ECO

pedal system” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.

DRIVER ASSISTANCE settings (if so

equipped)

For the details of the “Driver Assistance”

settings, see the following items:

. “Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-

tem/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

system” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.

. “Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/

Blind Spot Interv ention

(BSI) system”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

. “Distance Control Assist (DCA) system”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

. “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) sys-

tem” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.

SAA3008

Others settings (models with navi-

gation system)

The Others settings display will appear

when pushing the SETTING button and

selecting the “Others” key.

The following items are available:

. Comfort

. Language & Units

. Voice Recognition

. Infiniti Connection

. Camera

. Sonar

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. Image Viewer

Depending on the vehicle equipment,

pushing SETTING button will display the

following items.

. Display

. Clock

SAA2486

Display settings (models with na-

vigation system)

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting

the “Others” key, and then selecting the

“Display” key.

Also, the “Display” screen will display

when the DISP button on the control panel

is pushed.

Display Adjustment:

To adjust the display settings, select the

“Display Adjustment” key. The following

settings are available.

. Display

To turn off the screen, push the ENTER

button and turn the “Display” indicator off.

The other method is to push and hold the

“

OFF” button for more than 2 seconds.

When any mode button is pushed with the

screen off, the screen turns on for further

operation. The screen will turn off auto-

matically 5 seconds after the operation is

finished.

To turn on the screen, set this item to the

ON position, or push and hold the “

OFF” button.

. Brightness/Contrast/Background Color

To adjust the brightness and contrast of

the screen, select the “Brightness” or

“Contrast” key.

Then, you can adjust the brightness and

the contrast using the INFINITI controller.

For information on the “Background Color”

key, refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

Color Theme:

Choose the theme color of the menu screen

from “Black”, “Brown” or “Silver”.

SAA2115

Display settings (models without

navigation system)

The “Display” screen will appear when

pushing the DISP button on the control

panel.

Display:

To turn off the screen, push the ENTER

button and turn the “ON” indicator off.

When any mode button is pushed with the

screen off, the screen turns on for further

operation. The screen will turn off auto-

matically 5 seconds after the operation is

finished.

To turn on the screen, set this item to the

“ON” position or push the “

” button.

Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:

To adjust the brightness, contrast and

background color of the screen, select the

appropriate “ Brightness”, “Contrast” or

“Background Color” key and push the

ENTER button.

Then, you can adjust the brightness, and

the contrast using the INFINITI controller.

Switch the background color to the day-

time mode or the nighttime mode by

pushing the ENTER button.

SAA3151

Models with navigation system

JVH0182M

Models without navigation system

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Comfort settings

Models with navigation system

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting

the “Others” key, and then selecting the

“Comfort” key. This key does not appear on

the display until the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position.

Models without navigation system

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting

the “Comfort” key. This key does not

appear on the display until the ignition

switch is pushed to the ON position.

Auto Interior Illumination:

When this item is turned to ON, the interior

lights will illuminate if any door is un-

locked.

Light Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic

headlights higher (right) or lower (left).

Lift Steering Wheel on Exit (if so

equipped):

When this item is turned to ON, the

steering wheel moves upward for easy exit

if the ignition switch is in the LOCK

position and the driver’s door is opened.

After getting into the vehicle and pushing

the ignition switch to the ACC position, the

steering wheel moves to the previous

position.

Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit (if so

equipped):

When this item is turned to ON, the driver’s

seat moves backward for easy exit if the

ignition switch is in the OFF position and

the driver’s door is opened. After getting

into the vehicle and pushing the ignition

switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat

moves to the previous position.

Light Off Delay:

Choose the duration of the automatic

headlight off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90,

120, 150 and 180 second periods.

Selective Door Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, only the

driver’s door is unlocked first after the door

unlock operation. When the door handle

request switch on the driver’s or front

passenger’s side door is pushed to be

unlocked, only the corresponding door is

unlocked first. All the doors can be

unlocked if the door unlock operation is

performed again within 60 seconds.

When this item is turned to OFF, all the

doors will be unlocked after the door

unlock operation is performed once.

Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, door lock/

unlock function by pushing the door

handle request switch will be activated.

Return All Settings to Default:

Select this item and then select “YES” to

return all settings to the default.

SAA2487

Clock settings (models with navi-

gation system)

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting

the “Others” key, and then selecting the

“Clock” key.

The clock settings display cannot be

operated while driving. Stop the vehicle

in a safe place and apply the parking brake

before setting the clock.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock is

always displayed in the upper right corner

of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost

exactly because it is always adjusted by

the GPS system.

Clock Format (24h):

When this item is turned to ON, the 24-

hour clock is displayed. When this item is

not turned to ON, the 12-hour clock is

displayed.

Offset (hour)/(min):

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing

per hour or per minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

Turn this item to ON for daylight saving

time application.

Time Zone:

Choose the time zone from the following

. Pacific

. Mountain

. Central

. Eastern

. Atlantic

. Newfoundland

. Hawaii

. Alaska

SAA3007

Models with navigation system

JVH0252X

Models without navigation system

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Language & Units settings

The Language & Units settings display will

appear when pushing the SETTING button,

selecting the “Language & Units” key with

the INFINITI controller and pushing the

ENTER button.

For models with the navigation system,

select the “Others” key to show the

“Language & Units” key.

Select Language:

Select the “Select Language” key. Choose

“English”, “Français” or “Español” for your

favorite display appearance.

If you select the “Français” key, the French

language will be displayed, so please use

the French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a

French Owner’s Manual, see “Owner’s

Manual/Service Manual order information”

in the “9. Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section.

Select Units:

Select the “Select Units” key. Choose “US”

(Mile, 8F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, 8C, L/100

km) for your favorite display appearance.

Select Units (Tire Pressure):

Choose the “Select Units (Tire Pressure)”

key and push the ENTER button. From the

following display, select “kPa” or “psi”.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC

position, the “Select Units (Tire Pressure)”

key is not displayed.

Voice Recognition settings (models

with navigation system)

For details about the “Voice Recognition”

settings, see “INFINITI Voice Recognition

system (models with navigation system)”

later in this section.

Camera settings

The “CAMERA” screen will appear when

selecting the “Camera” key with the

INFINITI controller and pushing the ENTER

button.

For the details about the camera system

operation, see “RearView monitor” later in

this section.

Infiniti Connection (models with

navigation system)

The information feeds history and the UNIT

ID can be confirmed and Infiniti Connection

history can be deleted. For further details,

see the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

JVH0141M

Models with navigation system

Sonar settings (models with navi-

gation system)

The “Sonar” screen will appear when

selecting the “Sonar” key with the INFINITI

controller and pushing the ENTER button.

For the details of the sonar system opera-

tion, see “Sonar system” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

Sonar Display:

When this item is turned ON, the corner/

center sonar indicator will appear when the

sonar detect rear obstacles near the

bumper.

Corner Sonar Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity level of the corner

sonar higher (right) or lower (left).

Center Sonar Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity level of the center

sonar higher (right) or lower (left).

SAA2491

Image Viewer (models with naviga-

tion system)

The image files in the USB memory will be

displayed. To display the Image Viewer,

push the SETTING button, select the

“Other” key and then select the “Image

Viewer” key. The image of the selected file

is displayed on the right side of the screen.

When a number of folders are included in

the USB memory, select a folder from the

list to display the file list.

Images will not be shown on the display

while the vehicle is in any drive position to

reduce driver distraction. To view images,

stop the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2492

Full Screen Display:

The full screen display will appear when

selecting the “Full Screen Display” key.

To operate the Image Viewer or to change

the settings, select the desired key using

the INFINITI controller.

(Start)

Select the “

” key to start playing

the slideshow.

(Stop)

Select the “

” key to stop the

slideshow.

(Next)

Select the “

” key to display the next

file.

(Previous)

Select the “

” key to display the

previous file.

Setting the Image Viewer:

The Image Viewer setting display will

appear when selecting the “Settings” key

on the full screen display. The following

settings are available for the full screen

display.

. Slideshow Speed

Select the “Slideshow Speed” key.

From the following display, select the

changing time from 5, 10, 30, 60

seconds or “No Auto Change”.

. Slideshow Order

Select the “Slideshow Order” key. From

the following display, select “Random”

or “Order List”. For “Order List”, the

image order is the order of the files as

stored on the USB memory.

Operating tips:

. Only files that meet the following

conditions will be displayed.

— Image type: JPEG

— File Extensions: *.jpg, *jpeg

— Maximum Resolution: 2048 6 1536

pixels

— Maximum Size: 2-MB

— Colors: 32768 (15-bit)

— Maximum File Name lengths: 253-

Bytes

— Maximum Folders: 500

— Maximum Images per Folder: 1024

. If an electronic device (such as a digital

camera) is directly connected to the

vehicle using a USB cable, no image

will be displayed on the screen.

. If the file name is too long, some file

names may not be entirely displayed.

. When the total number of characters in

the file name exceeds 100 or if 1 file

name in a directory exceeds 100

characters, all files will show a shor-

tened 8-character version. The image

will still be displayed when selected.

When the selector lever is shifted into the

“R” (Reverse) position, the monitor display

shows view to the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary objects

to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The

system will not detect small objects below

the bumper and may not detect objects

close to the bumper or on the ground.

WARNING

. The RearView camera is a convenience

but it is not a substitute for proper

backing up. Always turn and check that

it is safe to do so before backing up.

Always back up slowly.

. Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor

differ from actual distance because a

wide-angle lens is used. Objects in the

RearView Monitor will appear visually

opposite like ones viewed in the inside

and outside mirrors.

. Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

. Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on

the RearView monitor because of its

monitoring range limitation.

. Do not put anything on the RearView

camera. The RearView camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

. When washing the vehicle with high-

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing water

condensation on the lens, a malfunction,

fire or an electric shock.

. Do not strike the camera. It is a precision

instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunc-

tion or cause damage resulting in a fire

or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera. Do

not scratch the cover when cleaning dirt or

snow from the cover.

SAA1896

HOW TO READ DISPLAYED LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with re-

ference to the bumper line

are dis-

played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the bumper.

. Red line

: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

. Yellow line

: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

. Green line

: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

. Green line

: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

REARVIEW MONITOR

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

up.

Predictive course lines

Indicate the predictive course when back-

ing up. The predictive course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the selector

lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position and

the steering wheel is turned. The predictive

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and will

not be displayed while the steering wheel

is in the neutral position.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE

COURSE LINES

WARNING

. Always turn and check that it is safe to

park your car before backing up. Always

back up slowly.

. Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle

position, road condition and road grade.

. If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predictive course line

may not be displayed correctly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predictive course line and the actual

course line.

. If predictive course lines are displayed

incorrectly, drive the vehicle on a

straight road for 110 yd (100 m) at a

speed of above 20 MPH (30 km/h).

. The displayed lines will appear slightly

off to the right because the RearView

camera is not installed in the rear center

of the vehicle.

. The distance guide line and the vehicle

width guide line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

level paved surface. The distance viewed

on the monitor is for reference only and

may be different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed ob-

jects.

. When backing up the vehicle up a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are further

than they appear. When backing up the

vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the

monitor are closer than they appear. Use

the inside mirror or glance over your

shoulder to properly judge distances to

other objects.

The vehicle width and predictive course

lines are wider than the actual width and

course.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The RearView of the vehicle is dis-

played on the screen

as illustrated

when the selector lever is moved to the

“R” (Reverse) position.

SAA1898

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the predic-

tive course lines

enter the parking

space

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines

parallel to the parking space

while

referring to the predictive course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the selector lever to

the P (Park) position and apply the

parking brake.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle

width guide line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

level, paved surface. The distance viewed

on the monitor is for reference only and

may be different from the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA1899

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the

actual distance. For example, the display

shows 3 ft (1 m) to the place

, but the

actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on the hill is the

place

. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

SAA1900

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown further than

the actual distance. For example, the

display shows 3 ft (1 m) to the place

but the actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on the hill

is the place

. Note that any object on

the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object

The predictive course lines

do not

touch the object in the display. However,

the vehicle may hit the object if it projects

over the actual backing up course.

SAA1924

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position

is shown further than the

position

in the display. However, the

position

is actually at the same

distance as the position

. The vehicle

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

may hit the object when backing up to the

position

if the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

SAA2404

Models with navigation system

SAA2606

Models without navigation system

PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE SETTINGS

To turn ON or OFF the predictive course line

display, push the SETTING button, select

the “Camera” key and push the ENTER

button.

. Predictive Course Lines

When this item is turned to ON, the

predictive course lines will be displayed

on the monitor when the selector lever is in

the “R” (Reverse) position.

HOW TO ADJUST SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,

Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the

RearView monitor, push the SETTING but-

ton with the RearView monitor on, select

the “Display” key on the screen and select

the item key and adjust the level using the

INFINITI controller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,

Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make

sure the parking brake is firmly applied

and the engine is not running.

SONAR INDICATOR (if so equipped)

When the “Sonar Display” key is ON, the

sonar indicator will appear in the display.

(See“How to use SETTING button” earlier in

this section and “Sonar system” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

OPERATING TIPS

. When the selector lever is shifted to the

“R” (Reverse) position, the monitor

screen automatically changes to the

RearView monitor mode. However, the

radio can be heard.

. It may take some time until the Rear-

View monitor is displayed after the

selector lever has been shifted to “R”

from another position or to another

position from “R”. Objects may be

distorted momentarily until the Rear-

View monitor screen is displayed com-

pletely.

. When the temperature is extremely high

or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

. When strong light directly enters the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly. This is not a malfunction.

. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong

reflected light from the bumper. This

is not a malfunction.

. The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light. This is not a malfunction.

. The colors of objects on the RearView

monitor may differ somewhat from

those of the actual object.

. Objects on the monitor may not be clear

in a dark place or at night. This is not a

malfunction.

. If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the

camera, the RearView monitor may not

clearly display objects. Clean the cam-

era.

. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration. To clean the camera,

wipe with a cloth dampened with

diluted mild cleaning agent and then

wipe with a dry cloth.

. Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely af-

fected.

. Do not use wax on the camera window.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with mild detergent diluted

with water.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA3142

Front

SAA3012

Rear

Open or close, and adjust the air flow

direction of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are

closed.

: This symbol indicates that the ventilators are

open.

WARNING

. The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is run-

ning.

. Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support of

others alone in your vehicle. Pets should

not be left alone either. On hot, sunny

days, temperatures in a closed vehicle

could quickly become high enough to

cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

. Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

Start the engine and operate the automatic

climate control system.

VENTILATORS AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

SAA3143

Models with navigation system

JVH0055M

Models without navigation system

When the “STATUS” button is pushed, the

automatic climate control status screen

will appear. (See “How to use STATUS

button” earlier in this section.)

You can individually set the driver and front

passenger side temperature using each

temperature control button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2952

Type A

1. “

” front defroster button

2. “

” rear window defroster button

(See “Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section.)

3. “OFF” button for climate control sys-

tem

4. “

” fan speed decrease button

5. “

” fan speed increase button

6. “AUTO” automatic climate control ON

button

7. “

” air intake control button

8. “

” air recirculation button

9. “CLIMATE” button

10, 11.

Temperature control button (driver

side)

12. “

” manual air flow control button

(driver side)

13. “

” manual air flow control button

(passenger side)

14, 15.

Temperature control button (passen-

ger side)

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(Type A)

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO):

This mode may be used all year round. The

system works automatically to control the

inside temperature, air flow distribution

and fan speed after the preferred tempera-

ture is set manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The

indicator on the button will illuminate

and AUTO will be displayed.)

2. Push the temperature control button

(driver side) to set the desired tem-

perature.

The temperature can be set within

the following range.

— For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C)

— For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to

328C)

The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained

automatically. Air flow distribution

and fan speed will also be controlled

automatically.

3. To turn off the climate control system,

push the “OFF” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the

air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate

a malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:

1. Push the front defroster “

” button.

(The indicator light on the button will

come on.)

2. Push the temperature control button

(driver side) to set the desired tem-

perature.

The temperature can be set within

the following range.

— For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C)

— For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to

328C)

The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained

automatically. Air flow distribution

and fan speed will also be controlled

automatically.

3. To turn off the climate control system,

push the “OFF” button.

. To quickly remove ice from the outside

of the windows, push the fan speed

increase “

” button and set it to

the maximum position.

. As soon as possible after the wind-

shield is clean, push the “AUTO” button

to return to the auto mode.

. When the front defroster “

” button

is pushed, the air conditioner will

automatically be turned on at outside

temperatures above 238F(−58C) to

defog the windshield, and the air

recirculate mode will automatically be

turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging

performance.

Manual operation

Fan speed control:

Push the fan speed increase “

” or

decrease “

” button to manually control

the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to

automatic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

. The temperature can be set within the

following range.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

— For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C)

— For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C)

Air recirculation:

Push the air recirculation “

” button to

change the air circulation mode. When the

indicator light illuminates, the flowing air

is recirculated inside the vehicle.

The air recirculation mode cannot be

activated when the air conditioner is in

the front defrosting mode “

”.

Outside air circulation:

Push the outside air circulation “

”

button to change the air circulation mode.

When the indicator light illuminates, the

flowing air is drawn from outside the

vehicle.

Automatic air intake control:

To set the automatic control mode, perform

one of the following operations.

. When the outside air circulation mode

is on, push and hold the outside air

circulation “

” button for more than

2 seconds.

. When the air recirculation mode is on,

push and hold the air recirculation

“

” button for more than 2 seconds.

When setting the automatic control mode,

both indicator lights will blink twice

indicating that the system is in the

automatic control mode.

Air flow control:

Pushing the “

” button selects the air

outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side ventilators.

: Air flows from center and side ventilators and

foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

SAA3002

Models with navigation system

JVH0054M

Models without navigation system

CLIMATE setting screen

Climate control settings can be changed on

the screen.

Push the CLIMATE button on the instrument

panel and turn the display to the Climate

mode.

Heating (A/C OFF):

The air conditioner does not activate in this

mode. When you need to heat only, use

this mode.

1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on.

2. If the “A/C” indicator on the screen

illuminates, select the “A/C” key. (The

“A/C” indicator will turn off.)

3. Push the temperature control button to

set the desired temperature.

. The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution and fan

speed are also controlled automati-

cally.

. Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Otherwise

the system may not work properly.

. Not recommended if windows fog up.

When the outside temperature decreases

to approximately −238F(08C), the A/C

function does not activate even if the

“A/C” indicator light illuminates.

Dual control mode setting:

You can individually set the driver and front

passenger side temperature and air flow

mode using each temperature control

button or manual air flow control button.

1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on.

2. By selecting the “DUAL” key, or when

the passenger side temperature control

button or manual air control button is

pushed, the “DUAL” indicator on the

screen will illuminate.

3. To turn off the passenger side tempera-

ture control, select the “DUAL” key and

the “DUAL” indicator will turn off.

. The Dual control mode cannot be

activated when the air conditioner is

in the front defrosting mode “

”.

Automatic upper ventilator system:

In this mode, air from the center ventilators

flows both straight and upward in order to

control the cabin temperature without

blowing air directly on the occupants.

1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on.

2. Select the “Upper Vent” key, and the

indicator on the screen will illuminate.

The air flow against the driver’sor

passenger’s upper body becomes gen-

tle.

. Distribution between straight and up-

ward flows is determined automatically

by the climate control system. If you

prefer strong air flow against your

upper body, select the “Upper Vent”

key to turn the indicator light off.

. When the outside temperature de-

creases to approximately 148 F

(−108C), the “Upper Vent” function

does not activate. The “Upper Vent”

function reactivates automatically when

ambient temperature is 148F(−108C) or

more.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2951

Type B

1. “

” front defroster button

2. “

” rear window defroster button

(See “Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section.)

3. “OFF” button for climate control sys-

tem

4. “

” fan speed decrease button

5. “

” fan speed increase button

6. “AUTO” automatic operation button

7. “

” Forest button

8. “

” intake air control button

9. “CLIMATE” button

10, 11.

Temperature control button (driver

side)

12. “

” manual air flow control button

(driver side)

13. “

” manual air flow control button

(passenger side)

14, 15.

Temperature control button (passen-

ger side)

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(Type B)

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO):

This mode may be used year-round as the

system automatically controls constant

temperature, air flow distribution and fan

speed after the desired temperature is set

manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button.

(The AUTO indicator light on the button

will illuminate and “AUTO” will appear

on the display.)

2. Push the temperature control button

(driver’s side) to set the desired tem-

perature.

The temperature can be set within

the following range.

— For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C)

— For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to

328C)

The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained

automatically. Air flow distribution

and fan speed will also be controlled

automatically.

3. To turn off the climate control system,

push the “OFF” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the

air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate

a malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:

1. Push the “

” button. (The indicator

light will illuminate.)

2. Push the temperature control button

(driver side) to set the desired tem-

perature.

To remove frost from the outside

surface of the windshield quickly,

set the temperature control and fan

speed control to their maximum

position.

After the windshield is cleared, push

the “AUTO” button to set to the

automatic mode.

When the “ ” button is pushed,

the air conditioner will automatically

turn on when the outside air tem-

perature is above 238F(−58C) to

defog the windshield. The air recir-

culation mode will automatically

turn off. The outside air circulation

mode will be selected to improve the

defogging performance.

Manual operation

The manual mode can be used to control

the heater and air conditioner to your

desired settings.

To turn off the heater and air conditioner,

push the “OFF” button.

Fan speed control:

Push the fan speed control “

” button

to increase the fan speed.

Push the fan speed control “

” button to

decrease the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to change the fan

speed to the automatic mode.

Air flow control:

Push the “

” button to change the air

flow mode.

: Air flows from the center and side ventilators.

: Air flows from the center and side ventilators,

and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.

: Air flows from the defroster and foot outlets.

Temperature control:

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. The temperature can be set within the

following range.

— For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C)

— For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C)

Air recirculation:

Push the intake air control “

” button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The “

” indicator light on the button will

come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot be

activated when the air conditioner is in

the front defrosting mode “

”.

Outside air circulation:

Push the intake air control “

” button to

change the air circulation from the intake

air to the outside air. The “

” indicator

light will turn off.

Automatic air intake control:

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. To manually con-

trol the intake air, push the intake air

control “

” button. To return to the

automatic control mode, push the intake

air control “

” button for approximately

2 seconds. The indicator lights will flash

twice, and then the intake air will be

controlled automatically.

SAA2959

CLIMATE setting screen

Climate control settings can be changed on

the screen.

Push the “CLIMATE” button on the instru-

ment panel and turn the display to the

“Climate” screen.

Heating (A/C off):

The air conditioner does not activate in this

mode. When you need to heat only, use

this mode.

1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on.

2. Push the “AUTO” button. (The “AUTO”

indicator on the screen will illuminate

and “AUTO” will appear on the display.)

3. If the “A/C” indicator illuminates,

select the “ A/C” key. (The “A/C”

indicator will turn off.)

4. Push the temperature control button to

set the desired temperature.

. Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Doing so

may cause the temperature to not to be

controlled properly.

. If the windows fog up, use dehumidified

heating instead of A/C off heating.

Dual control mode setting:

You can individually set driver and front

passenger side temperature and air flow

mode using each temperature control or

manual air flow control button.

1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on.

2. By selecting the “DUAL” key, or when

the passenger side temperature control

button or manual air control button is

pushed, the “DUAL” indicator on the

screen will illuminate.

3. To turn off the passenger side tempera-

ture control, select the “DUAL” key and

the “DUAL” indicator will turn off.

. The Dual control mode cannot be

activated when the air conditioner is

in the front defrosting mode “

”.

Automatic upper ventilator system:

1. Push the “CLIMATE” button to on.

2. Select the “Upper Vent” key and the

indicator on the screen will illuminate.

The air flow against the driver’sor

passenger’s upper body becomes gen-

tle.

In this mode, air from the center

ventilators flows both straight and

upward in order to control the cabin

temperature without blowing air di-

rectly on the occupants.

Distribution between straight and upward

flows is determined automatically by the

climate control system. If you prefer strong

air flow against your upper body, select

“Upper Vent” key to turn the indicator off.

. When the outside temperature de-

creases to approximately 148 F

(−108C), the “Upper Vent” function

does not activate. The “Upper Vent”

function reactivates automatically when

the ambient temperature is 148F

(−108C) or more.

Display Forest Air

system setting screen:

The “Forest Air setting” screen will appear

when selecting the “Forest Air Setting” key.

For the details about the Forest Air

system setting operation, see “Setting

Forest Air

” later in this section.

Display Forest Air

Information screen:

The Forest Air

system information screen

will appear when selecting the “Forest Air

Info” key.

For details about the Forest Air

system

information screen, see “Forest Air

sys-

tem Information” later in this section.

FOREST AIR

(if so equipped)

The Forest Air

system keeps the air inside

the vehicle clean using the automatic air

intake system and automatic ventilation.

The Forest Air

system also makes the

inside of the vehicle more comfortable,

using a combination of the upper ventilator

and center ventilators at random.

*Forest Air

is a trademark of Nissan Motor

Co., Ltd.

Main operation

Push the “ ” Forest button.

(The “

” and “AUTO” indicator light on

the button will illuminate.)

When the following functions and sensors

are turned on, the Forest Air

system

settings will activate.

. Breeze Mode

. Outside odor and exhaust gas detection

sensor

. Inside Air Quality sensor

. Auto humidity control

The fan speed and air flow is automatically

set to the AUTO position.

. The Forest Air

system can be adjusted

and/or activated/deactivated for each

function. For details of The Forest Air

system settings, see later in this

section.

. When the “

” Forest button is

pushed while the air conditioner is

off, the air conditioner will automati-

cally activate.

. When the outside temperature de-

creases to approximately 328F(08C),

the outside odor and exhaust gas

detection sensor and auto humidity

control functions will not operate. The

system will not be reactivated auto-

matically even if the outside tempera-

ture reaches 328F(08C). To reactivate

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

the system, push the Forest button

manually. (The indicator light on the

Forest button will illuminate.)

. The air flow control is not available in

the front defroster mode. When the

“

” button is pushed while the

Forest Air

system is turned on, the

Forest Air

system will turn off.

Operating tips

Breeze Mode:

When this mode is ON, fan speed fluc-

tuates during the Forest Air

system

operation, creating a wind breeze similar

to a natural breeze using a combination of

the upper ventilator and the center venti-

lators at random.

. Breeze Mode will activate after the

temperature of the passenger compart-

ment becomes suitable.

. This function will not operate immedi-

ately after the engine starts.

. Breeze Mode will activate when the air

flow mode is in the “

” and “ ”

mode.

. This function will turn off if the fan

speed or a ventilator outlet is manually

adjusted.

. The breeze patterns may change in

accordance with the amount of sun

load.

. When operating fan speed or air flow

control while the Forest Air

system is

turned on, the “

” indicator light on

the button will turn off automatically,

and the Breeze Mode function will turn

off.

. When the Breeze Mode function is

turned off while the Forest Air

system

is on, the Breeze Mode function will

remain off until the “

” Forest button

is turned off and on again.

Outside odor and exhaust gas detection

sensor:

This vehicle is equipped with an outside

odor and exhaust gas detection sensor.

When the automatic intake air control is

on, the sensor detects odors and exhaust

gas, and then the system automatically

changes from the outside air circulation

mode to the recirculation mode. When the

“

” Forest button is pushed, the outside

odor and exhaust gas detection sensor will

turn on.

When the Forest Air

system is on, for the

first 40 seconds, the recirculation mode is

selected to prevent dust, dirt and pollen

from entering the vehicle, and the system

cleans the air inside of the vehicle with

Plasmacluster

ion that are emitted from

the ventilator. After 40 seconds, the out-

side odor and exhaust gas sensor activates

and automatically alternates between the

recirculation mode and outside air circula-

tion mode.

. The outside odor and exhaust gas

detection sensor detects industry odors

such as pulp or chemicals, and exhaust

gas such as gasoline or diesel.

Inside Air Quality sensor:

This vehicle is equipped with an inside air

quality sensor. When the sensor detects

odor in the cabin, the system increases the

fan speed automatically. When the Forest

Air

system is on, the inside air quality

sensor will turn on. This function may not

work during the first 5 minutes after the

engine is started because the system is

still warming up.

. The Outside/Inside Air Mix function will

turn off when the air recirculation and

outside air circulation modes are chan-

ged manually. When the Outside/Inside

Air Mix function is not active, turn off

and on the Forest Air

system, the

Outside/Inside Air Mix function will

activate again.

Auto humidity control:

The sensor installed on the upper side of

the windshield detects the temperature

and humidity of the passenger compart-

ment and the surface of the windshield,

and controls the humidity of the passenger

compartment to not be over-dry or moist

enough to fog the windows. Moreover, it

detects potential fog before formation on

the windows and operates to remove it.

. Push the “AUTO” or “

” Forest button

(The “AUTO” or “

” indicator light on

the button will illuminate and “AUTO

DEF” will appear on the display.)

. The “Auto humidity control” function

will not operate if the fan speed or a

vent outlet is manually adjusted.

(“AUTO DEF” will disappear from the

display.)

. When auto humidity control is turned

off while the Forest Air

system is on,

turn off and on the Forest Air

system,

the auto humidity control will activate

again.

SAA2961

Setting Forest Air

1. Push the “CLIMATE” button on the

instrument panel and turn the display

to the “CLIMATE mode” screen.

2. Select the “Forest Air Setting” key.

The Forest Air

system settings screen

is displayed.

. No settings, except for auto humidity

control, are available unless the “

”

indicator light on the button illumi-

nates.

Breeze Mode ON/OFF:

When this item is turned to ON, the Breeze

Mode function will activate while the Forest

Air

system operates.

Fan Speed Variance:

Set the Breeze Mode fluctuation effect.

Select the “Fan Speed Variance” key and

select the “High” or “Low” key setting of

the Breeze Mode fluctuation effect.

Setting the fan speed to “High” allows a

larger fluctuation change.

Outside/Inside Air Mix:

This item allows the user to set priority

between the outside air circulation and air

recirculation modes.

Select the “Outside/Inside Air Mix” key

and use “

” or “ ” key to adjust

priority.

Greater priority will be given to the air

recirculation mode when the indicator is

closer to “

”, and the outside air

circulation mode when the indicator is

closer to “

”.

Auto Defogging Sensitivity:

This item allows the user to set the timing

of the automatic defogging activation

function.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Select the “Auto Defogging Sensitivity” key

and select the “Slow” or “Fast” key.

When set to OFF, the automatic defogging

function will turn off.

SAA2962

Forest Air

system Information

The present status of the Forest Air

system operation and the conditions of

air inside and outside of the vehicle can be

checked.

Push the “CLIMATE” button on the instru-

ment panel and turn the display to the

“CLIMATE mode” screen and select the

“Forest Air Info” key.

1. Breeze Mode

The animation image of the Breeze

Mode function is displayed.

2. The condition of outside and inside air

The present condition of air inside and

outside the vehicle is indicated by

color.

Blue: The air is clean.

Orange: The air is not clean.

3. Outside air circulation/Air recirculation

arrow

The air flow of the outside air circula-

tion and air recirculation functions is

indicated with an arrow.

Blue arrow: The air is clean.

Orange arrow: The air is not clean.

4. Auto humidity control status

The condition of fog on the window is

displayed. When the window starts to

fog, the color turns white.

5. Outside air circulation/Air recirculation

display

When the outside air circulation or air

recirculation mode is automatically

selected, either “

” or “ ” is

displayed. When the outside air circula-

tion or air recirculation mode is manu-

ally selected, either “

” or “ ”,

and “Manual” are displayed.

SAA3015

Ion control

This unit generates highly concentrated

Plasmacluster

ion into the air blown from

the ventilators and reduces odor absorbed

into the interior trim.

The high-density Plasmacluster

ions gen-

erated in the air conditioner’s air stream

not only suppress airborne bacteria and

reduce the adherence of odors to the

interior trim, but also have a proven skin

moisture preserving effect.

When the air conditioner is turned on, the

system generates Plasmacluster

ion auto-

matically.

The amount of Plasmacluster

ion in-

creases according to the amount of air

flow. When the air flow is high, “

” is

displayed on the screen and when the air

flow is low, the indication in the screen

changes to “

”.

Plasmacluster

and Plasmacluster

ion

are trademarks of Sharp Corporation.

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air

flow from the foot outlets may not operate.

This is not a malfunction. After the coolant

temperature warms up, air will flow nor-

mally from the foot outlets.

SIC2768

JVH0039X

The sensors

and

on the instrument

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

panel helps maintain a constant tempera-

ture. Do not put anything on or around this

sensor.

LINKING INTELLIGENT KEY

The Climate control system settings can be

memorized for each Intelligent Key. For

more details, see “Setting memory func-

tion” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

Without Forest Air

system

The climate control system is equipped

with an in-cabin microfilter which collects

dirt, pollen, dust, allergen (such as pollen,

tick shell), etc. To make sure that the air

conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates

efficiently, replace the filter in accordance

with the maintenance schedule in the

INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.

To replace the filter, contact an INFINITI

retailer.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

decreases significantly or if windows fog

up easily when operating the heater or air

conditioner.

With Forest Air

system

The climate control system is equipped

with a natural grape seed polyphenol filter

which collects and neutralizes dirt, pollen,

dust, etc. To make sure that the air

conditioner heats, defogs and ventilates

efficiently, replace the filter in accordance

with the maintenance schedule in the

INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.

To replace the filter, contact an INFINITI

retailer.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

decreases significantly or if windows fog

up easily when operating the heater or air

conditioner.

SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL

The climate control system in your INFINITI

is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind. This refrigerant

will not harm the earth’s ozone layer.

However, special charging equipment and

lubricant are required when servicing your

INFINITI air conditioner. Using improper

refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe

damage to your climate control system.

(See “Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-

sumer information” section for climate

control system refrigerant and lubricant

recommendations.)

Your INFINITI retailer will be able to service

your environmentally friendly climate con-

trol system.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under high

pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air

conditioner service should be done only by

an experienced technician with the proper

equipment.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and push the radio band select

button to turn on the radio. If you listen to

the radio with the engine not running, the

ignition switch should be pushed to the

ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station

signal strength, distance from radio trans-

mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and

other external influences. Intermittent

changes in reception quality normally are

caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the

vehicle may influence radio reception

quality.

Radio reception:

Your INFINITI radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-

hance radio reception. These circuits are

designed to extend reception range, and to

enhance the quality of that reception.

However there are some general character-

istics of both FM and AM radio signals that

can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics

are completely normal in a given reception

area, and do not indicate any malfunction

in your INFINITI radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly

change because of vehicle movement.

Buildings, terrain, signal distance and

interference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below

are some of the factors that can affect your

radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

SAA0306

FM radio reception:

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25

to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural

(single station) FM having slightly more

range than stereo FM. External influences

may sometimes interfere with FM station

reception even if the FM station is within

25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FM

signal is directly related to the distance

between the transmitter and receiver. FM

signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibit-

ing many of the same characteristics as

light. For example they will reflect off

objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

AUDIO SYSTEM

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

from a station transmitter, the signals will

tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-

ence from buildings, large hills or due to

antenna position, usually in conjunction

with increased distance from the station

transmitter, static or flutter can be heard.

This can be reduced by lowering the treble

setting to reduce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-

tive characteristics of FM signals, direct

and reflected signals reach the receiver at

the same time. The signals may cancel

each other, resulting in momentary flutter

or loss of sound.

AM radio reception:

AM signals, because of their low frequency,

can bend around objects and skip along

the ground. In addition, the signals can be

bounced off the ionosphere and bent back

to earth. Because of these characteristics.

AM signals are also subject to interference

as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas

with many tall buildings. It can also occur

for several seconds during ionospheric

turbulence even in areas where no obsta-

cles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

Satellite radio reception:

When the satellite radio is used for the first

time or the battery has been replaced, the

satellite radio may not work properly. This

is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10

minutes with the satellite radio ON and the

vehicle outside of any metal or large

building for the satellite radio to receive

all of the necessary data.

The satellite radio mode requires an active

SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The

satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

The satellite radio performance may be

affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks

the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the

satellite antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio

antenna can affect satellite radio perfor-

mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite

radio reception.

SAA0480

Compact Disc (CD) player

. Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD

and/or CD player.

. Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or CD

player.

. During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the

CD and dehumidify or ventilate the

player completely.

. The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

. The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. De-

crease the temperature before use.

. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or

packaging.

. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints,

or that have pin holes may not work

properly.

. The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

. Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion.

— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

— CDs that are not round

— CDs with a paper label

— CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

. This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capabilities to

record or burn CDs.

. If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

. Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly

(the label side is facing up, etc.).

. Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the temperature

inside the player is too high. Remove the

CD by pushing the EJECT button, and after

a short time reinsert the CD. The CD can be

played when the temperature of the player

returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio system

(only MP3 or WMA CD).

Gracenote:

NOTE:

. The information contained in the Grace-

note Database is not fully guaranteed.

. The service of the Gracenote Database

on the Internet may be stopped with-

out prior notice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-

TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.

Gracenote

MusicID Terms of Use

This application or device contains soft-

ware from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville,

California (“Gracenote”). The software from

Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) en-

ables this application to perform disc and/

or file identification and obtain music-

related information, including name, artist,

track, and title information (“Gracenote

Data”) from online servers or embedded

databases (collectively, “Gracenote Ser-

vers”) and to perform other functions. You

may use Gracenote Data only by means of

the intended End-User functions of this

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

application or device. You agree that you

will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and Gracenote Servers for your

own personal non-commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or

transmit the Gracenote Software or any

Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU

AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACE-

NOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE,

OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EX-

PRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license

to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote

Software, and Gracenote Servers will ter-

minate if you violate these restrictions. If

your license terminates, you agree to cease

any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Ser-

vers. Gracenote reserves all rights in

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and the Gracenote Servers, including all

ownership rights. Under no circumstances

will Gracenote become liable for any

payment to you for any information that

you provide.

You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce

its rights under this Agreement against you

directly in its own name.

The Gracenote ser vice uses a unique

identifier to track queries for statistical

purposes. The purpose of a randomly

assigned numeric identifier is to allow the

Gracenote service to count queries without

knowing anything about who you are. For

more information, see the web page for the

Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote

service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS

IS.” Gracenote makes no representations

or warranties, express or implied, regard-

ing the accuracy of any Gracenote Data

from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote

reserves the right to delete data from the

Gracenote Ser vers or to change data

categories for any cause that Gracenote

deems sufficient. No warranty is made that

the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Ser-

vers are error-free or that functioning of

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers

will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not

obligated to provide you with new en-

hanced or additional data types or cate-

gories that Gracenote may provide in the

future and is free to discontinue its

services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTI-

CULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRIN-

GEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT

THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY

YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE

OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE

WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES

OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST

REVENUES.

Music recognition technology and related

data are provided by Gracenote

. Grace-

note is the industry standard in music

recognition technology and related content

delivery. For more information, please visit

www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,

2009 Gracenote. This product and service

may practice one or more of the following

U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;

#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192,

#6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593,

and other patents issued or pending. Some

services supplied under license from Open

Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-

marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo

and logotype, and the “Powered by Grace-

note” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

LHA0484

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player

(models with navigation system)

. Do not force a compact disc into the

CD/DVD insert slot. This could damage

the CD/DVD player.

. During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to humid-

ity. If this occurs, remove the CD/DVD

and dehumidify or ventilate the player

completely.

. The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

. The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot

function when the passenger compart-

ment temperature is extremely high.

Decrease the temperature before use.

. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”

logo on the disc or packaging.

. Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct

sunlight.

. CD/DVDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints, or

that have pinholes may not work

properly.

. The following CD/DVDs are not guaran-

teed to play:

— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

— Recordable DVDs (DVD±R, DVD±R

DL)

— Rewritable DVDs (DVD±RW, DVD±RW

DL)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. Do not use the following CD/DVDs as

they may cause the CD/DVD player to

malfunction.

— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

— CD/DVDs that are not round

— CD/DVDs with a paper label

— CD/DVDs that are warped, scratched

or have abnormal edges

— This audio system can only play

prerecorded CD/DVDs. It has no

capabilities to record or burn CD/

DVDs.

. If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of

the following messages will be dis-

played.

Disc Read Error:

. Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted

correctly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

. Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

Please Eject Disc:

. This may be an error due to the

temperature inside the player being

too high. Remove the CD/DVD by

pushing the EJECT button, and after a

short time reinsert the CD/DVD. The

CD/DVD can be played when the

temperature of the player returns to

normal. If the error persists, consult

your local retailer.

Unplayable File:

. The file may be copy protected.

. The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A or

DivX

type.

Region Invalid:

. The DVD is not for region 1 or all

regions. Use DVDs with a region code

“1”, “ALL” or “1 included” for your DVD

entertainment system. (The region code

is displayed as a small symbol

printed on the top of the DVD

.) This

vehicle-installed DVD player cannot

play DVDs with a region code other

than “1” or “ALL”.

. The technology protected by the U.S.

patent and other intellectual property

rights owned by Macrovision Corpora-

tion and other right holders is adopted

for this system.

. This copyright protected technology

cannot be used without a permit from

Macrovision Corporation. It is limited to

be personal use, etc., as long as the

permit from Macrovision Corporation is

not issued.

. Modifying or disassembling is prohib-

ited.

. Dolby digital is manufactured under

license from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

. Dolby and the double D mark “

” are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

. DTS and DTS 2.0 “

” are registered

trademarks of DTS, Inc.

. DTS and DTS Digital Surround “

” are

registered trademarks of Digital Theater

Systems, Inc.

Parental level (parental control):

DVDs with the parental control setting can

be played with this system. Please use

your own judgement to set the parental

control with the system.

Disc selection:

The following disc formats can be played

with the DVD drive.

. DVD-VIDEO

. VIDEO-CD

. CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc)

. DTS-CD

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

WARNING

Do not connect or disconnect the USB device

while driving. Doing so can be a distraction.

If distracted you could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident or serious

injury.

NOTE:

. Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the USB device and the

port. Make sure that the USB device is

connected correctly into the USB port.

. Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

. Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may break the wire,

USB device or the port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB

memory (flash drive). Customers should

prepare USB devices as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB

devices. To format a USB device, use a

personal computer.

In some countries, the USB device for the

front seats plays only sound without

images for regulatory reasons, even when

the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB memory

devices, USB hard drives and iPod

players. Some USB devices may not be

supported by this system.

. Partitioned USB devices may not be

played correctly.

. Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are

not displayed properly on the vehicle

center screen. Using English language

characters with a USB device is recom-

mended.

General notes for USB use:

. The USB device may not function when

the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Lower the

temperature before use.

. During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to humid-

ity. If this occurs, remove the USB

device and dehumidify or ventilate the

USB player completely.

. Do not connect a USB device if a

connector, cable or USB port is wet.

Allow the connector, cable, and USB

port to dry completely before connect-

ing the USB device. (Wait for 24 hours

or more until it is dry.) If the connector

and USB port are exposed to fluids

other than water, evaporative residue

may cause a short circuit between the

connector pins and USB port. In this

case, replace the cable and USB port.

Otherwise damage to the USB device

and a loss of function may occur.

. If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,

connectors cracked, contamination

such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the

connectors), do not use the cable.

Replace the cable with a new one.

. Do not put a USB device in a location

where static electricity occurs, electrical

noise is generated or hot air from the

air conditioner blows directly on it.

Doing so may cause the data stored on

the USB device to be corrupted.

. Be careful not to do the following or the

cable could be damaged and a loss of

function may occur.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

— Bend the cable excessively (40 mm

(1.6 in) radius minimum).

— Twist the cable excessively (more

than 180 degrees).

— Pull or drop the cable.

— Hit or press the USB port or USB

device with hands, feet, or objects.

— Store objects with sharp edges in

the storage area where the cable is

stored.

— Leave the USB device and attached

devices in the vehicle compartment.

When not in use for extended

periods of time, store the cable

and USB device in a clean, dust free

environment at room temperature

and without direct sun exposure.

— Use the cable for any other purposes

than its intended use in the vehicle.

Notes for iPod

use:

. iPod

is a trademark of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other coun-

tries.

. Improperly plugging in the iPod

may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod

is connected properly.

. An iPod nano

(1st Generation) may

remain in fast forward or rewind mode

if it is connected during a seek opera-

tion. In this case, please manually reset

the iPod

. An iPod nano

(2nd Generation) will

continue to fast-forward or rewind if it

is disconnected during a seek opera-

tion.

. An incorrect song title may appear when

the Play Mode is changed while using

an iPod nano

(2nd Generation)

. Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on an iPod

. Large video files cause slow responses

in an iPod

. The vehicle center display

may momentarily black out, but will

soon recover.

. If an iPod

automatically selects large

video files while in the shuffle mode,

the vehicle center display may momen-

tarily black out, but will soon recover.

Compressed Audio Files (MP3/

WMA/AAC)

Explanation of terms:

. MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is

the most well known compressed

digital audio file format. This format

allows for near “CD quality” sound, but

at a fraction of the size of normal audio

files. MP3 conversion of an audio track

can reduce the file size by approxi-

mately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1

kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually

no perceptible loss in quality. The

compression reduces certain parts of

sound that seem inaudible to most

people.

. WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is

a compressed audio format created by

Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The

WMA codec offers greater file compres-

sion than the MP3 codec, enabling

storage of more digital audio tracks in

the same amount of space when

compared to MP3s at the same level

of quality.

. AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding

(AAC) is a lossy audio compression

format. Audio files that have been

encoded with AAC are generally smaller

in size and deliver a higher quality of

sound than MP3.

. Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number

of bits per second used by a digital

music file. The size and quality of a

compressed digital audio file is deter-

mined by the bit rate used when

encoding the file.

. Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-

quency is the rate at which the samples

of a signal are converted from analog to

digital (A/D conversion) per second.

. Multisession — Multisession is one of

the methods for writing data to media.

Writing data once to the media is called

a single session, and writing more than

once is called a multisession.

. ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file

that contains information about the

digital music file such as song title,

artist, album title, encoding bit rate,

track time duration, etc. ID3 tag in-

formation is displayed on the Album/

Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows

and Windows Media

are

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

of America and/or other countries.

SAA2494

Playback order:

. The folder names of folders not contain-

ing compressed audio files are not

shown in the display.

. If there is a file in the top level of a disc/

USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.

. The playback order is the order in which

the files were written by the writing

software, so the files might not play in

the desired order.

. Music playback order of compressed

audio files is as illustrated.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM*5, DVD±R*5, DVD±RW*5, DVD±R DL*5, USB2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM*5, DVD±R*5, DVD±RW*5, DVD±R DL*5: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo,

Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.

UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0

* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR (Ver.9)*3

AAC*5

Version MPEG-AAC

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz

Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

Tag information (Song title and Artist name)

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

Models with navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders: 512 (including root folder), Files: 5,000

Models without navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation

Models with navigation system: 100 characters

Models without navigation system: 64 characters

Displayable character codes*3

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),

05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

*5 Models with navigation system

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the

player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be

played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)”, “.M4A (.m4a)”,or“.AA3 (.aa3)” cannot be played. In

addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the

specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of

compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time before

the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song

when playing.

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright

protection, the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in the

desired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.

Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.

Compressed Video Files (models

with navigation system)

Explanation of terms:

. DivX

- DivX

refers to the DivX

codec

owned by DivX, Inc. used for a lossy

compression of video based on MPEG-

. AVI - AVI stands for Audio Video

Interleave. It is a standard file format

originated by Microsoft Corporation. A

“.divx” encoded file can be saved into

the “.avi” file format for playback on

this system if it meets the requirements

stated in the table in this section.

However, not all the “.avi” files are

playable on this system since different

encodings can be used than the DivX

codec.

. ASF - ASF stands for Advanced Systems

Format. It is a file format owned by

Microsoft Corporation. Note: Only “.

asf” files that meet the requirements

stated in the table in this section can

be played.

. Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number

of bits per second used by a digital

video file. The size and quality of a

compressed digital audio file is deter-

mined by the bit rate used when

encoding the file.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Requirement for Supporting Video Playback:

Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory

File Systems

CD,

CD-R,

CD-RW,

DVD,

DVD±R,

DVD±RW,

DVD±RW DL

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02

+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0

- ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

- Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-

based computer) are not supported.

- VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB Memory FAT16, FAT32

File Types

.divx, .avi

Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6

Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM

.asf

Video Codec ISO-MPEG4

Audio Codec G.726

Bit Rates .divx, .avi

Maximum Average 4Mbps

Maximum Peak 8Mbps

Resolution

.divx, .avi

Minimum 32 6 32

Maximum 720 6 480

.asf

Minimum 32 6 32

Maximum

720 6 576

Bluetooth

Audio player (models

with navigation system)

Bluetooth

is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

. Some Bluetooth

audio devices may

not be recognized by the in-vehicle

audio system.

. It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible Blue-

tooth

audio device and the in-vehicle

Bluetooth

module before using the

Bluetooth

audio player.

. Operating procedure of the Bluetooth

audio player will vary depending on the

device. Make sure it is understood how

to operate an audio device before using

it with this system.

. The Bluetooth

audio player may be

stopped under the following condi-

tions:

— Receiving a hands-free call.

— Checking the connection to the

hands-free phone.

. Do not place a Bluetooth

audio device

in an area surrounded by metal or far

away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth

module to prevent tone quality degra-

dation and wireless connection disrup-

tion.

. While an audio device is connected

through a Bluetooth

wireless connec-

tion, the battery power of the device

may discharge quicker than usual.

. This system supports the Bluetooth

Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP,

AVRCP).

. Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth

functions share the same frequency

band (2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth

and the wireless LAN functions at the

same time may slow down or discon-

nect the communication and cause

undesired noise. It is recommended

that you turn off the wireless LAN (Wi-

Fi) when using the Bluetooth

func-

tions.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2957

1. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob

2. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind)

button for SEEK/TRACK

3. Radio CAT(category)/FF (fast forward)

button for SEEK/TRACK

4. FM·AM radio band select button

5. XM radio band select button

6. DISC·AUX selector button

7. RDM (random) RPT (repeat) play but-

ton

8. Radio SCAN (tuning) button

9. CD EJECT button

10. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA/AAC folder

selector / AUDIO control knob

11. Radio station preset buttons

No satellite radio reception is available

unless a SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscrip-

tion is active.

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER

For all operation precautions, see “Audio

operation precautions” earlier in this sec-

tion.

The satellite radio mode requires an active

SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The

satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

It may take some time to receive the

activation signal after subscribing the

SiriusXM Satellite Radio. After receiving

the activation signal, an available channel

list will be automatically updated in the

radio. Push the ignition switch from LOCK

to ACC to update the channel list.

Audio main operation

Head unit :

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low

and high frequency ranges automatically in

both radio reception and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and then push the ON·OFF button

while the system is off to turn on the last

audio source, which was playing immedi-

ately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing the

ON·OFF button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the

volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-

ance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade,

push the Audio control knob. When the

display shows the setting you want to

change (Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade),

rotate the Audio control knob to set the

desired setting. For the other setting

methods, see “How to use SETTING button”

earlier in this section.

This vehicle has some sound effect func-

tions as follows:

. Speed Sensitive Vol.

. Precision Phased Audio (if so equipped)

. BOSE

Centerpoint

2 (if so equipped)

. BOSE

AudioPilot

2 (if so equipped)

. Surround effect (if so equipped)

For more details, see “How to use SETTING

button” earlier in this section.

Switching the display:

Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch

the displays as follows:

. Models with navigation system

iPod

/USB ? CD/DVD ? Bluetooth

Audio ? iPod

/USB

. Models without navigation system

iPod

/USB ? CD ? iPod

/USB

Linking Intelligent Key (models with navi-

gation system):

The audio settings can be memorized for

each Intelligent Key. For more details, see

“Setting memory function” in the “3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

When the radio band select button is

pushed while the ignition switch is in the

ACC or ON position, the radio will come on

at the channel last played.

The last channel played will also come on

when the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.

If another audio source is playing when the

radio band select button is turned to ON,

the audio source will automatically be

turned off and the last radio channel

played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,

the radio will automatically change from

stereo to monaural reception.

radio (FM·AM) band select :

Pushing the XM radio band select button

will change the band as follows:

AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM

radio (XM) band select:

Pushing the XM radio band select button

will change the band as follows:

XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1

The satellite radio is not available in

Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

TUNE (Tuning) :

. For AM and FM radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual

tuning.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. For SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek

channels from all of the categories

when any category is not selected.

SEEK tuning/CATEGORY (CAT):

. For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK button

or to

tune from low to high or high to low

frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

. For SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Push the SEEK button

or to

tune to the first channel of the next or

previous category.

During satellite radio reception, the follow-

ing notices will be displayed under certain

conditions.

. NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while

the SAT tuner is connected.)

. OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

. CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection

error)

. LOADING (When the initial setting is

performed)

. UPDATING (When the satellite radio

subscription is not active)

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from

low to high frequencies and stop at each

broadcasting station/channel for 5 sec-

onds. Pushing the button again during this

5 seconds period will stop SCAN tuning

and the radio will remain tuned to that

station/channel.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed

within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to

the next station/channel.

to Station memory operations:

12 stations/channels can be set for the FM

band (6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for

SiriusXM Satellite Radio (6 each for XM1,

XM2 and XM3) and 6 stations can be set

for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the radio

band select button.

2. Tune to the desired station/channel

using the

, SCAN button or the

radio TUNE knob.

3. Push and hold the desired station

preset button

to until the radio

mutes.

4. The station indicator will then come on

and the sound will resume. Memorizing

is now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if

the fuse opens, the radio memory will be

erased. In that case, reset the desired

stations/channels.

Menu (SiriusXM Satellite Radio) (models

with navigation system):

When the “Menu” key on the display is

selected while the SiriusXM Satellite Radio

is being played, the menu list will be

displayed.

The following items are available.

. Preset List

Displays the preset channel list. If 1 of

the 6 preset stations listed is touched

and held, the current station will be

stored as the new preset.

. Customize Channel List

Selects specific channels to skip while

using the TUNE, SEEK/CATEGORY or

Menu-Categories feature.

. Favorite Artists & Songs

Stores the current artist or song that is

being played. Touch the “Alert” key to

be reminded when the stored artist or

song is playing on a station while

listening to SiriusXM Satellite Radio.

. Categories

Selecting a category will go to the first

channel in that category as defined by

SiriusXM Satellite Radio.

. Direct Tune

Inputs the channel number by using a

keypad.

Text (models without navigation system):

When the “Text” key is selected with the

INFINITI controller on the display and then

the ENTER button is pushed while the

satellite radio is being played, the text

information listed below will be displayed

on the screen.

. CH Name

. Category

. Name

. Title

. Other

Compact Disc (CD) player operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and insert the Compact Disc (CD)

into the slot with the label side facing up.

The CD will be guided automatically into

the slot and start playing.

After loading the CD, the number of tracks

on the CD and the play time will appear on

the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will

automatically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the

CD was playing, pushing the ON·OFF

button will start the CD.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

PLAY:

When the DISC·AUX (CD play) button is

pushed with the system off and the CD

loaded, the system will turn on and the CD

will start to play.

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with

the CD loaded and the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and

the CD will start to play.

Menu (models with navigation system):

When the “Menu” key on the display is

selected while the CD is being played, the

menu screen will be displayed. The follow-

ing menu options are available.

. Folder List (for CD with compressed

audio files)

Displays the folder list.

. Track List

Displays the track list.

. Play Mode

Select a play mode from the following

items.

— Normal

— 1 Folder Repeat (for CD with com-

pressed audio files)

— 1 Track Repeat

— 1 Disc Random

— 1 Folder Random (for CD with

compressed audio files)

. Title Text Priority (for CD)

Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc

Data Base) to acquire track information

from the Gracenote Database, or set

the priority to CD-TEXT to acquire the

information from CDs.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Text (models without navigation system):

When the “Text” key is selected in the

screen using the INFINITI controller and

then the ENTER button is pushed while the

CD is being played, the music information

below will be displayed on the screen.

CD:

. Disc title

. Track title

CD with compressed audio files:

. Folder title

. File title

. Song title

. Album title

. Artist

Next/Previous Track and Fast For-

ward/Rewind:

When the

or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is

being played, the CD will play while fast

forwarding or rewinding. When the button

is released, the CD will return to normal

play speed.

When the

or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the CD will be played.

RANDOM (RDM), REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while the

CD is played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

(CD)

(CD with compressed audio files)

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with

the CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the CD is

being played, the CD will be ejected.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) PLAYER

OPERATION (models with naviga-

tion system)

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD

entertainment system.

Movies will not be shown on the front

display while the vehicle is in any drive

position to reduce driver distraction. Audio

is available when a movie is played. To

view movies in the front display, stop the

vehicle in a safe location, move the

selector lever to the P (Park) position.

WARNING

. The driver must not attempt to operate

the DVD system or wear the headphones

while the vehicle is in motion so that full

attention may be given to vehicle opera-

tion.

. Do not attempt to modify the system to

display a movie on the front screen while

the vehicle is being driven. Doing so may

distract the driver and may cause a

collision and serious personal injury or

death.

CAUTION

. Only operate the DVD while the vehicle

engine is running. Operating the DVD for

extended periods of time with the

engine OFF can discharge the vehicle

battery.

. Do not allow the system to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled

liquids may cause the system to mal-

function.

. While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD

player does not guarantee complete

functionality of all VIDEO-CD formats.

Display settings

To adjust the front display mode, push the

SETTING button while the DVD is being

played, select the “Others” key and then

select the “Display” key.

To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness,

tint, color and contrast, select the “Display

Adjustment” key and then select each key.

Then you can adjust each item using the

INFINITI controller. After changes have

been made push the BACK button to save

the setting.

SAA2497

Playing a DVD

DISC·AUX button:

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the

front seat occupants to operate the DVD

drive while watching the images.

Push the DISC·AUX button on the instru-

ment panel and turn the display to the DVD

mode.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed

automatically.

The operation screen will be turned on

when the DISC·AUX button located on the

instrument panel is pushed while a DVD is

being played, and it will turn off auto-

matically after a period of time. To turn it

on again, push the DISC·AUX button again.

DVD operation keys:

When the DVD is playing without the

operation screen being shown, you may

use the touch screen to select items from

the displayed video. You may also use the

INFINITI controller to select an item from

the displayed video. When the operation

screen is being shown, use the INFINITI

controller or touch screen to select an item

from the displayed menus.

PAUSE:

Select the “

” key to pause the DVD. To

resume playing the DVD, use the “PLAY”

key.

PLAY:

Select the “

” key to start playing the

DVD, for example, after pausing the DVD.

STOP:

Select the “

” key to stop playing the

DVD.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

/ Next/Previous Chapter:

Select the “

” or “ ” key to skip the

chapter(s) of the disc forward/backward.

The chapters will advance/go back the

number of times this key is selected.

/ Commercial Skip:

This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD-

VR. Select the “

” or “ ” key to skip

forward or backwards by the set amount as

defined in the DVD Settings menu.

Top Menu:

When the “Top Menu” key is selected in

the screen while a DVD is being played, the

top menu specific to each disc will be

displayed. For details, see the instructions

on the disc.

SAA2498

Example

DVD settings

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the

following settings.

Key (DVD-VIDEO):

Keys for the DVD menu operation are

displayed.

: Move the cursor to select a DVD menu.

Enter: Enter the selected menu.

Move: Change the display location by moving the

operation key.

Back: Return to the previous screen.

Hide: Hide the operation key.

Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO):

Some menus specific to each disc will be

shown. For details, see the instructions on

the disc.

Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):

The scene with the specified title will be

displayed each time the “+” side or “−”

side is selected.

Group Search (VIDEO CD):

A scene in the specified group will be

displayed each time the “+” side or “−”

side is selected.

10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,CD-

DA, DVD-VR):

Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the

number entry screen. Input the number to

be searched and select the “OK” key. The

specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track will

be played.

Select No. (VIDEO-CD):

Select the “Select No.” key to open the

number entry screen. Input the number to

be searched and select the “OK” key. The

specified scene will be played.

Angle (DVD-VIDEO):

If the DVD contains different angles (such

as moving images), the current image

angle can be switched to another one.

Select the “Angle” key. The angle will

change each time the “+” side or “−” side

is selected.

Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO):

When this item is turned on, an angle mark

will be shown on the bottom of the screen

if the scene can be seen from a different

angle.

Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO):

DVD menus are automatically configured

and the contents will be played directly

when the “Menu Skip” key is turned on.

Note that some discs may not be played

directly even if this item is turned on.

CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO):

Select the “CM Skip” key. Choose the

setting time from 15, 30 or 60 seconds by

selecting the “+” side or “−” side.

DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-

matically adjusts the soundtrack volume

level to maintain a more even sound to the

speakers.

DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):

Select the “DVD Language” key to open the

number entry screen. Input the number

corresponding to the preferred language

and select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu

language will be changed to the one

specified.

Display:

To adjust the image quality of the screen,

select the preferred adjustment items.

Audio:

Select the preferred language for audio.

Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):

Select the preferred language for subtitles.

Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD, DVD-

VR):

Select from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or

“Cinema” modes.

Title List (DVD-VR):

Select the preferred title from the list.

Play Mode:

Select the preferred play mode.

PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR):

Select the “

PG” or “PL” mode.

SAA2963

USB INPUT OPERATION

Audio main operation

Open the console lid and connect a USB

memory. Then, push the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly to switch to the USB memory

mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

USB memory was playing, pushing the

ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the USB

memory.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

Do not close the tray lid with the USB

memory inserted. It may damage the tray lid

and the USB memory .

NOTE:

. Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the USB device and the

port. Make sure that the USB device is

connected correctly into the USB port.

(Some USB devices come with a

mark as a guide. Make sure that the

mark is facing the correct direction

before inserting the device.)

. Do not locate objects near the USB

device to prevent the objects from

leaning on the USB device and the

port. Pressure from the objects may

damage the USB device and the port.

SAA2500

File selection (models with naviga-

tion system)

When there are both audio and movie files

in the USB memory, the mode select

screen is displayed. Select the preferred

contents to play.

When there is only one type of file, the

audio or movie operation screen is dis-

played and starts to play.

If a video file restricts the number of

playbacks, a pop-up screen will appear to

confirm it is ok to play. Answer yes or no as

requested by the display.

SAA2501

Models with navigation system

SAA2611

Models without navigation system

Audio file operation

PLAY:

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with

the system off and the USB memory

inserted, the system will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a

USB memory is inserted, push the

DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the cen-

ter display changes to the USB memory

mode.

Next/Previous File and Fast Forward/

Rewind:

When the

or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while a USB

memory is being played, the USB memory

will play while forwarding or rewinding.

When the button is released, the USB

memory will return to normal play speed.

When the

or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the USB

memory is being played, the next track or

the beginning of the current track on the

USB memory will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when the USB memory is

being played.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the USB

memory, turn the folder selector or choose

a folder displayed on the screen using the

INFINITI controller.

RANDOM (RDM), REPEAT (RPT):

When the RDM·RPT button is pushed while

the USB memory is played, the play

pattern can be change as follows.

To change the play mode, push the RPT

button repeatedly and the mode will

change as follows.

Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track

Repeat ? All Random ? 1 Folder Random

? Normal

Text (models without navigation system):

When the “Text” key is selected on the

screen using the INFINITI controller and

then the ENTER button is pushed while a

USB memory is being played, the music

information listed below will be displayed

on the screen.

. Folder title

. File title

. Song title

. Album Title

. Artist

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2502

Menu (models with navigation system):

There are some options available during

playback. Select one of the following

options that are displayed on the screen

if necessary. Refer to the following infor-

mation for each item.

. Movie Playback

Switch to the movie playback mode.

This item is displayed only when a USB

memory contains movie files.

. Folder List/Track List

Displays the folder or track list. The

“Movie Playback” key is also displayed

in this list screen, and enables switch-

ing to the movie playback mode.

. Play Mode

Select the preferred play mode.

SAA2503

Movie file operation (models with

navigation system)

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the

front seat occupants to operate the USB

memory while watching the images.

PLAY:

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with

the system off and the USB memory

inserted, the system will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a

USB memory is inserted, push the

DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the cen-

ter display changes to the USB memory

mode.

Operation keys:

To operate the USB memory, select the

desired key displayed on the operation

screen using the INFINITI controller.

Pause

Select the “

” key to pause the movie

file. To resume playing the movie file,

select the “

” key.

Play

Select the “

” key to start playing a

movie file, for example, after pausing a

movie file.

STOP

Select the “

” key to stop playing a

movie file.

Skip (Next chapter)

Select the “

” key to skip the chapter(s)

of the disc forward. The chapters will

advance the number of times the ENTER

button is pushed.

Skip (Previous chapter)

Select the “

” key to skip the chapter(s)

of the disc backward. The chapters will go

back the number of times the “

” key is

selected.

List:

Select the “List” key on the movie file

operation screen to display the file list.

SAA2504

Example

Settings:

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the

following settings.

. Audio File Playback

Switch to the audio playback mode.

This item is displayed only when the

USB memory contains the audio files.

. Play Mode

Select the “Normal” or “1 Track Re-

peat” play mode.

. 10 Key Search

Select the “10 Key Search” key to open

the number entry screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Input the number to be searched and

select the “OK” key.

The specified folder/file will be played.

. Display

To adjust the image quality of the

screen, select the preferred adjustment

items.

. DRC

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression)

automatically adjusts the soundtrack

volume level to maintain a more even

sound to the speakers.

. Audio

Select the preferred language for audio.

. Subtitle

Select the preferred language for sub-

title.

. Display Mode

Select the “Normal”, “Wide”, “Cinema”

or “Full” mode.

Bluetooth

STREAMING AUDIO

(models with navigation system)

Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth

Streaming Audio. If you have a compatible

Bluetooth

device with streaming audio

(A2DP profile), you can set up the wireless

connection between your Bluetooth

de-

vice and the in-vehicle audio system. This

connection allows you to listen to the

audio from the Bluetooth

device using

your vehicle speakers. It also may allow

basic control of the device for playing and

skipping audio files using the AVRCP

Bluetooth

profile. All Bluetooth

Devices

do not have the same level of controls for

AVRCP. Please consult the manual for your

Bluetooth

Device for more details.

Once your Bluetooth

device is connected

to the in-vehicle audio system, it will

automatically reconnect whenever the de-

vice is present in the vehicle and you select

Bluetooth

Audio from your audio system.

You do not need to manually reconnect for

each usage.

Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth

functions share the same frequency band

(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth

and the

wireless LAN functions at the same time

may slow down or disconnect the commu-

nication and cause undesired noise. It is

recommended that you turn off the wire-

less LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth

functions.

Regulatory information

FCC Regulatory information:

. CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized

antenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1) This device may not cause inter-

ference and

2) This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of

the device

IC Regulatory information:

. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1) This device may not cause inter-

ference, and

2) This device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of

the device.

. This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interfer-

ence-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth

is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

SAA3009

Connecting procedure

1. Push the SETTING button and select the

“Bluetooth” key.

SAA2506

2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2507

3. A confirmation screen will be dis-

played. Select “No”.

Note: Selecting “Yes” will only connect

the hands free phone portion of a

Bluetooth

device.

SAA3005

4. Choose a PIN code to use with the

compatible Bluetooth

audio device

using the number input screen. The

PIN code will need to be entered into

the Bluetooth

audio device after step

5. Select the “OK” key.

SAA3006

5. The standby message screen will ap-

pear. Operate the compatible Blue-

tooth

audio device. For the

connecting procedure of the audio

device, see the Bluetooth

audio in-

structions.

When the connecting is completed, the

screen will return to the Bluetooth

setup display.

SAA2510

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly to switch to the Bluetooth

audio mode. If the system has been turned

off while the Bluetooth

audio device was

playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL control

knob will start the Bluetooth

audio

device.

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast

forward, rewind, randomize and repeat

music may be different between devices.

Some or all of these functions may not be

supported on each device.

DISC·AUX button:

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with

the system off and the Bluetooth

audio

device connected, the system will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and the

Bluetooth

audio device is connected,

push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until

the display changes to the Bluetooth

audio mode.

Next/Previous Track and Fast For-

ward/Rewind:

When the

or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth

audio file is being played, the Bluetooth

audio device will play while forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released,

the Bluetooth

audio device will return to

normal play speed.

When the

or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth

audio file is being played, the next track or

the beginning of the current track on the

Bluetooth

audio device will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when the Bluetooth

audio

play mode screen is shown on the display.

(“Bluetooth audio” will be indicated on the

header of the screen.)

RANDOM (RDM), REPEAT (RPT):

To change the play mode, push the

RDM·RPT button repeatedly and the mode

changes as follows.

Normal ? Shuffle All Tracks ? Shuffle

Group ? Repeat 1 Track ? Repeat All

Tracks ? Repeat Group ? Normal

Operation keys:

To operate a Bluetooth

audio device,

select a key displayed on the operation

screen using the INFINITI controller.

Play

Select the “

” key to start playing when

pausing. Select this key again to pause the

audio play.

Pause

Select the “

” key to pause the Blue-

tooth

audio device. Select this key again

to resume playing.

Play Mode:

The play mode setting display will appear

when the “Menu” key is selected.

Choose the preferred play mode from the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

following items.

. Shuffle

Choose “Shuffle OFF”, “Shuffle All

Tracks” and “Shuffle Group”.

. Repeat

Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1

Track”, “Repeat All Tracks” and “Repeat

Group”.

SAA2511

Bluetooth

settings

To set up the Bluetooth

device system to

the preferred settings, push the SETTING

button and select the “Bluetooth” key.

Bluetooth:

If this setting is turned off, the connection

between the Bluetooth

devices and the

in-vehicle Bluetooth

module will be can-

celed.

Connect Bluetooth:

Connects to the Bluetooth

device. See

“Connecting procedure” earlier in this

section. Up to 5 devices can be registered.

Connected Devices:

Registered devices are shown on the list.

Select a Bluetooth

device from the list,

the following options will be available.

. Select

Select “Select” to connect the selected

device to the vehicle. If there is a

different device currently connected,

the selected device will replace the

current device.

. Edit

Rename the selected Bluetooth

device

using the keypad displayed on the

screen. (See “How to use touch screen

(models with navigation system)” ear-

lier in this section.)

. Delete

Delete the selected Bluetooth

device.

Edit Bluetooth Info:

Change the name broadcasted by this

system over Bluetooth

. Change the PIN

code that is entered when connecting a

hands free device to this system.

Replace Connected Phone:

Replace the Bluetooth

connection with a

connected Bluetooth

cellular phone. For

details about Hands-Free Phone System,

see “Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

(models with navigation system)” later in

this section.

SAA2964

iPod

PLAYER OPERATION

Connecting iPod

Open the console lid and connect the

iPod

cable to the USB connector. If

compatible, the battery of the iPod

charged while the connection to the

vehicle.

Depending on the version of the iPod

, the

display on the iPod

shows an INFINITI or

Accessory Attached screen when the con-

nection is completed. When the iPod

connected to the vehicle, the iPod

music

library can only be operated by the vehicle

audio controls.

* iPod

is a trademark of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

CAUTION

Do not close the tray lid with the iPod

cable inserted. It may damage the tray lid

and the iPod

cable.

NOTE:

. Do not force the iPod

cable into the

USB port. Insert ing the iPod

cable

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the iPod

cable and the

port. Make sure that the iPod

cable is

connected correctly into the USB port.

(Some iPod

cable come with a

mark as a guide. Make sure that the

mark is facing the correct direction

before inserting the iPod

cable.)

. Do not locate objects near the iPod

cable to prevent the objects from

leaning on the iPod

cable and the

port. Pressure from the objects may

damage the iPod

cable and the port.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compatibility

The following models are available:

Models with navigation system:

. Fifth generation iPod

(version 1.2.3 or

later)

. iPod Classic

(version 1.1.1 or later)

. First generation iPod touch

(version

2.0.0 or later)

. Second generation iPod touch

(firm-

ware version 1.2.3 or later)

. First generation iPod nano

(firmware

version 1.3.1 or later)

. Second generation iPod nano

(firm-

ware version 1.1.3 or later)

. Third generation iPod nano

(firmware

version 1.1 or later)

. Fourth generation iPod nano

(firmware

version 1.0.2 or later)

Models without navigation system:

. Fifth generation iPod

(firmware ver-

sion 1.3)

. First generation iPod Classic

(firmware

version 1.1.2 PC)

. Second generation iPod Classic

(firm-

ware version 2.0 PC)

. First generation iPod touch

(firmware

version 2.1)

. Second generation iPod touch

(firm-

ware version 2.1.1)

. First generation iPod nano

(firmware

version 1.3.1)

. Second generation iPod nano

(firm-

ware version 1.1.3)

. Third generation iPod nano

(firmware

version 1.1 PC)

. Third generation iPhone

(firmware

version 2.1)

Make sure that the iPod

version is

updated.

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly to switch to the iPod

mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

iPod

was playing, pushing the ON·OFF

button will start the iPod

PLAY:

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with

the system off and the iPod

connected,

the system will turn on. If another audio

source is playing and the iPod

is con-

nected, push the DISC·AUX button repeat-

edly until the center display changes to the

iPod

mode.

Interface:

The interface for iPod

operation shown on

the vehicle center display is similar to the

iPod

interface. Use the INFINITI controller

and the ENTER or BACK button to play the

iPod

with your favorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the

menu list screen. For further information

about each item, see the iPod

Owner’s

Manual.

. Now Playing

. Playlists

. Artists

. Albums

. Songs

. Podcasts

. Genres

. Composers

. Audiobooks

. Shuffle Songs

. Play Mode

The following buttons shown on the screen

are also available:

: returns to the previous screen.

: plays/pauses the music selected.

Next/Previous Track and Fast For-

ward/Rewind:

When the

or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod

playing, the iPod

will play while fast

forwarding or rewinding. When the button

is released, the iPod

will return to the

normal play speed.

When the

or button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the iPod

playing, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the iPod

will be

played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used to

select tracks when the iPod

is playing.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT button is pushed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

SAA0451

CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND

CLEANING

CD/DVD

. Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never

touch the surface of the disc. Do not

bend the disc.

. Always place the discs in the storage

case when they are not being used.

. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from

the center to the outer edge using a

clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc

using a circular motion.

Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-

trial use.

. A new disc may be rough on the inner

and outer edges. Remove the rough

edges by rubbing the inner and outer

edges with the side of a pen or pencil

as illustrated.

USB memory

. Never touch the terminal portion of the

USB memory.

. Do not place heavy objects on the USB

memory.

. Do not store the USB memory in highly

humid locations.

. Do not expose the USB memory to

direct sunlight.

. Do not spill any liquids on the USB

memory.

Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual

for the details.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

JVH0049X

Models with navigation system

JVH0050X

Models without navigation system

1. Audio source switch

2. Menu control switch (models with

navigation system) or audio tuning

switch (models without navigation

system)

3. Back switch

4. Volume control switch

STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON-

TROLS FOR AUDIO

Menu control switch (models with

navigation system) or audio tuning

switch (models without navigation

system)

While the display is showing a MAP

(navigation systems only), STATUS or Audio

screen, tilt the switch upward or downward

to select a station, track, CD or folder. For

most audio sources, tilting the switch up/

down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a

different function than tilting up/down for

less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM radio:

. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5

seconds will increase or decrease the

preset station.

. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5

seconds will seek up or down to the

next station.

. Pushing the menu control switch will

show the list of preset stations.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio:

. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5

seconds will increase or decrease the

preset channel.

. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5

seconds will go to the next or previous

category.

. Pushing the menu control switch will

show the XM Menu.

iPod

. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5

seconds will increase or decrease the

track number.

. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5

seconds will skip to the next or

previous index.

. Pushing the menu control switch will

show the iPod Menu.

CD:

. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5

seconds will increase or decrease the

track number.

. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5

seconds will increase/decrease the

folder number (if playing compressed

audio files).

. Pushing the menu control switch will

show the CD Menu.

DVD (models with navigation system):

. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5

seconds will increase or decrease the

track number.

. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5

seconds will increase or decrease the

title number.

. Pushing the menu control switch will

select an item from the DVD display.

. When the transparent operation menu

appears, the switch will control the

menu.

USB:

. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5

seconds will increase or decrease the

track number.

. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5

seconds will increase/decrease the

folder number

. Pushing the menu control switch will

show the USB Menu.

Bluetooth

Audio (models with navigation

system):

. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5

seconds will increase or decrease the

track number.

BACK switch (models with

navigation system)

Push this switch to go back to the previous

screen or cancel the selection if it is not

completed.

Volume control switches

Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch

to increase or decrease the volume.

Audio source switch

Push the audio source switch to change

the mode as follows.

. Models with navigation system

AM ? FM ? SAT ? CD/DVD ? USB/

iPod

? Bluetooth

Audio

. Models without navigation system

AM ? FM ? CD ? USB/iPod

? SAT

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the

rear window.

CAUTION

. Do not place metalized film near the rear

window glass or attach any metal parts

to it. This may cause poor reception or

noise.

. When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When installing a car phone or a CB radio

in your vehicle, be sure to observe the

following cautions, otherwise the new

equipment may adversely affect the elec-

tronic control modules and electronic con-

trol system harness.

WARNING

. A cellular phone should not be used for

any purpose while driving so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of

cellular phones while driving.

. If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-free

cellular phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-

ercise extreme caution at all times so full

attention may be given to vehicle opera-

tion.

. If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop your

vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

. Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

. Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic control

system harness. Do not route the anten-

na wire next to any harness.

. Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

. Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

. For details, consult an INFINITI retailer.

WARNING

. Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

. If you find yourself unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop your vehicle

before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a

phone after starting the engine.

Your INFINITI is equipped with Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an

owner of a compatible Bluetooth

enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth

wireless technology, you can

make or receive a telephone call with your

cellular phone in your pocket.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Bluetooth

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

(models with navigation system)

Once a cellular phone is connected to the

in-vehicle phone module, no phone con-

necting procedure is required anymore.

Your phone is automatically connected

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position with the registered cellular phone

turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Blue-

tooth

cellular phones in the in-vehicle

phone module. However, you can talk on

only one cellular phone at a time.

The INFINITI Voice Recognition system

supports the phone commands, so dialing

a phone number using your voice is

possible. For more details, see “INFINITI

Voice Recognition system (models with

navigation system)” later in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth

Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

. Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth

functions share the same frequency

band (2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth

and the wireless LAN functions at the

same time may slow down or discon-

nect the communication and cause

undesired noise. It is recommended

that you turn off the wireless LAN (Wi-

Fi) when using the Bluetooth

func-

tions.

. Set up the wireless connection between

a compatible cellular phone and the in-

vehicle phone module before using the

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

. Some Bluetooth

enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized by the

in-vehicle phone module. Please visit

www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth for a

recommended phone list.

. You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the tele-

phone service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground

parking garage, behind a tall build-

ing or in a mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked in

order not to be dialed.

. When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other

person’s voice during a call.

. Immediately after the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

. Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

. While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth

wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the

cellular phone may discharge quicker

than usual.

. If the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone

System seems to be malfunctioning,

please visit www.InfinitiUSA.com/blue-

tooth for troubleshooting help.

. Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a

different location may reduce or elim-

inate the noise.

. Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual regarding the telephone pairing

procedure specific to your phone,

battery charging, cellular phone anten-

na, etc.

. The antenna display on the monitor will

not coincide with the antenna display

of some cellular phones.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible to hear the caller’s voice

clearly as well as to minimize its

echoes.

. If reception between callers is unclear,

adjusting the incoming or outgoing call

volume may improve the clarity.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

. CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized

antenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence and

2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of

the device

IC Regulatory information

. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

. This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interfer-

ence-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth

is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate

various Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem features using the INFINITI Voice

Recognition system.

For more details, see “INFINITI Voice

Recognition system (models with naviga-

tion system)” later in this section; page

4-111.

JVH0047X

CONTROL BUTTONS

TALK / PHONE SEND button

JVH0253X

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

1. Push the button, and select the

“Connect Phone” key.

SAA2520

2. When a PIN code appears on the

screen, operate the compatible Blue-

tooth

cellular phone to enter the PIN

code.

The connecting procedure of the cellu-

lar phone varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone

Owner’s Manual for the details. You can

also visit

www.InfinitiUSA.com/bluetooth or call

INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department

for instructions on pairing INFINITI

recommended cellular phones.

When the connection process is com-

pleted, the screen will return to the

Phone menu display.

PHONE SELECTION

Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered

to the system. To switch to connect another

cellular phone, push the

button and

select the “Connected Phones” key. The

registered cellular phones are shown on

the list. If you select a cellular phone that

is different from the one currently con-

nected, the newly selected phone will be

connected to the system.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

This vehicle has two phonebooks available

for hands-free use. Depending on the

phone, the system may automatically

download the entire cell phone’s phone-

book into the “Handset Phonebook”. For

the details about downloading a phone-

book, see “Phone setting” later in this

section. If a phonebook does not auto-

matically download, the vehicle phone-

book may be set for up to 1,000 entries.

This phonebook allows the recording of a

name to speak while using voice recogni-

tion.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2521

1. Push the button and select the

“Vehicle Phonebook” key.

2. Select the “Add New” key at the top of

the screen.

SAA2522

3. Choose the method for entering the

phonebook entry. For this example,

select “Enter Number by Keypad”.

4. Enter the digits and select the “OK”

key. (See “How to use touch screen

(models with navigation system)” ear-

lier in this section.)

SAA2523

5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a

name to speak when using the INFINITI

Voice Recognition system.

6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to

speak the name after the tone.

7. When the voicetag is successfully

saved, select the “OK” key to save the

phonebook entry.

8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it

will show a screen that is ready to call

the number. Press the BACK button to

return to the Vehicle Phonebook.

There are different methods to input a

phone number. Select one of the following

options instead of “Enter Number by Key-

pad” in step 3.

. Copy from Call History

The system will show a list of incoming,

outgoing or missed calls that were

downloaded from the connected cellu-

lar phone (depending on the phone’s

compatibility). Select one of these

entries to save in the vehicle phone-

book.

. Copy from the Handset

The system will show the connected

cellular phone’s phonebook that was

downloaded (depending on the

phone’s compatibility). Select one of

these entries to save in the vehicle

phonebook.

SAA2620

Editing the Vehicle Phonebook

1. Push the button and select the

“Vehicle Phonebook” key.

2. Select the desired entry from the

displayed list.

3. Select the “Edit” key.

4. Select the desired item to change.

SAA2523

The following editing items are available:

. Entry #

Changes the displayed number of the

selected entry.

. Name

Edit the name of the entry using the

keypad displayed on the screen.

. Number

Edit the phone number using the key-

pad displayed on the screen.

. Type

Select an icon from the icon list.

. Voicetag

Confirm and store the voicetag. Voice-

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

tags allow easy dialing using the

INFINITI Voice Recognition system.

(See “INFINITI Voice Recognition system

(models with navigation system)” later

in this section.)

To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key

at step 3.

SAA2524

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow this procedure.

1. Push the

button on the steering

wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear

on the display.

2. Select the “Handset Phonebook” key

on the “PHONE” menu.

3. Select the desired entry from the list.

4. Confirm the correct entry by selecting

for the correct number from the list.

SAA2621

5. Select the “Call” key to start dialing the

number.

There are different methods to make a call.

Select one of the following options instead

of “Handset Phonebook” in step 2 above.

. Vehicle Phonebook

Select an entry stored in the Vehicle’s

Phonebook.

. Call History

Select an outgoing, incoming or missed

call downloaded from your cell phone

(depending on your phone’s compat-

ibility).

. Dial Number

Input the phone number manually

using the keypad displayed on the

screen. (See “How to use touch screen

(models with navigation system)” ear-

lier in this section.)

SAA2525

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display

will change to the incoming call mode. To

receive a call, perform one of the following

procedures listed below.

1. Select the “Answer” key.

2. Push the

button on the steering

wheel.

There are some options available when

receiving a call. Select one of the following

displayed on the screen.

. Answer

Accept an incoming call to talk.

. Hold Call

Put an incoming call on hold.

. Reject Call

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, perform one of the

following procedures listed below.

1. Select the “Hang up” key.

2. Push the

button on the steering

wheel.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA3587

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a

call. Select one of the following displayed

on the screen if necessary.

. Hang up

Finish the call.

. Use Handset

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

. Mute

Mute your voice to the person.

. Keypad

Using the touch tone, send digits to the

connected party for using services such

as voicemail.

. Cancel Mute

This will appear after “Mute” is se-

lected. Mute will be canceled.

. Switch Call*

Select “Switch Call” to answer another

incoming call. By selecting “Hang up”,

you can end a call and can speak to a

caller who is on hold again.

* This function may not be usable,

depending on the model of phone.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or

quieter, push the volume control switch (+

or −) on the steering wheel or turn the

volume control knob on the instrument

panel while talking on the phone. This

adjustment is also available in the SETTING

mode.

JVH0136M

PHONE SETTING

To set up the Bluetooth

Hands-Free

Phone System to your preferred settings,

push the SETTING button on the instrument

panel and select the “PHONE” key.

Edit Vehicle Phonebook

To edit the vehicle phonebook, use the

same procedure as described in “Vehicle

phonebook” earlier in this section.

Delete Phonebook

The vehicle phonebook entries can be

deleted all at the same time or one by one.

Download Handset Phonebook

Download the contacts registered in a

Bluetooth

cellular phone. Availability of

this function depends on each cellular

phone. The memory downloading proce-

dure from the cellular phone also varies

according to each cellular phone. See

cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details.

When “Auto Downloaded” is active, the

system will automatically re-download the

entries registered in the phone everytime it

is paired with the vehicle, even after you

delete the entries from your vehicle’s

Handset Memory.

Volume & Ringtone

The following kinds of phone volume can

be set. Pushing the

button and

selecting the “Volume & Ringtone” key

can also operate the same settings.

. Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call

To increase or decrease the volume,

select the “Ringtone”, “Incoming Call”

or “Outgoing Call” key and adjust it

with the INFINITI controller.

. Automatic Hold

When this function is activated, an

incoming phone call is automatically

held.

. Vehicle Ringtone

When this function is activated, a

specific ringtone that is different from

the cellular phone will sound when

receiving a call.

Auto Downloaded

When this item is activated, the phonebook

of a hands-free phone is automatically

downloaded at the same time that the

hands-free phone is connected.

When this item is active, the system will

automatically re-download the entries re-

gistered in the connected phone even if

you attempt to delete the entries.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

The system fails to interpret the com-

mand correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “INFINITI Voice Recognition system (models with navigation system)” later in this

section; page 4-111.)

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to

use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the

wrong voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Vehicle phonebook” earlier in this section.)

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

WARNING

. Use a phone after stopping your vehicle

in a safe location. If you have to use a

phone while driving, exercise extreme

caution at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

. If you find yourself unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop your vehicle

before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a

phone after starting the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an

owner of a Bluetooth

enabled cellular

phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth

wireless technology, you can

make or receive a telephone call with your

cellular phone in your pocket.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the

in-vehicle phone module, no phone con-

necting procedure is required. Your phone

is automatically connected with the in-

vehicle phone module when the ignition

switch is pushed to the “ON” position with

the registered cellular phone turned on

and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Blue-

tooth

cellular phones in the in-vehicle

phone module. However, you can talk on

only one cellular phone at a time.

When a call is active, the audio system and

microphone (located in the ceiling in front

of the RearView mirror) are used for the

handsfree communications.

If the audio system is being used at the

time, the audio mode will mute and will

stay muted until the active call is ended.

The INFINITI Voice Recognition system

supports the phone commands, so dialing

a phone number using your voice is

possible.

Before using the Bluetooth

Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

. Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth

functions share the same frequency

band (2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth

and the wireless LAN functions at the

same time may slow down or discon-

nect the communication and cause

undesired noise. It is recommended

that you turn off the wireless LAN (Wi-

Fi) when using the Bluetooth

func-

tions.

. Set up the wireless connection between

a cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the Blue-

tooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

. Some Bluetooth

enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized by the

in-vehicle phone module.

. You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the tele-

phone service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such

as in a tunnel, in an underground

parking garage, behind a tall build-

ing or in a mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked in

order not to be dialed.

. When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other

person’s voice during a call.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

Bluetooth

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

(models without navigation system)

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. Immediately after the ignition switch is

pushed to the “ON” position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

. Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

. While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth

wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the

cellular phone may discharge quicker

than usual.

. If the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone

System seems to be malfunctioning,

please contact an INFINITI retailer.

. Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a

different location may reduce or elim-

inate the noise.

. Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual regarding the telephone pairing

procedure specific to your phone,

battery charging, cellular phone anten-

na, etc.

. The antenna display on the monitor will

not coincide with the antenna display

of some cellular phones.

. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible to hear the caller’s voice

clearly as well as to minimize its

echoes.

. If reception between callers is unclear,

adjusting the incoming or outgoing call

volume may improve the clarity.

. This wireless hands free car kit is based

on Bluetooth

technology,

— Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz

— Output Power: 4,14dBm E.I.R.P

— Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, p/

4DQPSK

— Number of Channel: 79

— This wireless equipment can’tbe

used for any services related to

safety because there is the possibi-

lity of radio interference.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

. CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized

antenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence and

2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of

the device

IC Regulatory information

. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) this device may not

cause interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

. This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interfer-

ence-Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth

is a trademark

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,

and licensed to Visteon Cor-

poration.

JVH0134X

CONTROL BUTTONS

1. PHONE SEND button

Push the button to initiate a VR (Voice

Recognition) session or answer an

incoming call. You can also use the

button to skip through system feed-

back and to enter commands during a

call.

2. PHONE END

button

Push the button to cancel a VR

session or end a call.

VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

You can also use the Bluetooth

hands-

free phone system with Voice Recognition

System.

INFO

. The available voice commands are only

applicable to the relevant language set

in the LANGUAGE setting screen. (See

“How to use SETTING button” earlier in

this section.)

. If the vehicle is in motion, some

commands may not be available so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

Using system

Initialization:

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, Voice Recognition System is

initialized, which may take up to one

minute. When completed, the system is

ready to accept voice commands. If the

button on the steering wheel is pushed

before the initialization completes, the

system will not accept any command.

Before starting:

To get the best performance out of the

Voice Recognition System, observe the

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

following:

. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to

eliminate the surrounding noises (traf-

fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),

which may prevent the system from

recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

. Wait until a tone sounds before speak-

ing a command.

. Speak a voice command within 5

seconds after the beep sound. If no

voice command is given, the system

will ask you for a number. If no further

command is given, the session ends.

. Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

JVH0135X

Giving voice command:

1. Push and release the

button

located on the steering wheel.

SAA2574

2. A list of commands appears on the

screen, and the system announces,

“Please say a command after the beep.

Available commands are: Call, Phone-

book, Recent Calls, Connect Phone or

Help”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on

the screen changes from

to ,

speak a command. See the “List of

voice commands” later in this section

for the voice command list. Speak

“Call” for example.

INFO

Voice commands cannot be recognized

as long as the screen icon is not in the

command recognition mode .

4. The system acknowledges the com-

mand and announces the next set of

available commands.

5. After the tone sounds, speak the phone

number.

6. When you have finished speaking the

phone number, the system repeats it

back and announces the available

commands.

7. After system responds, speak “Dial”

and the system dials the spoken

numbers.

Operating tips:

. Voice commands cannot be accepted

when the icon is

. If the command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Please say again”.

Repeat the command in a clear voice.

. Push the

button or the BACK button

once to return to the previous screen.

. If you want to cancel the command,

push the

switch. The message

“Voice input is canceled” will be

announced. If you want to adjust the

volume of the system feedback, push

the volume control buttons [+] or [−]on

the steering wheel or use the audio

system volume knob while the system

is making an announcement.

How to speak commands:

The Voice Recognition System requires a

certain way to speak voice commands.

Speak normally and clearly in the direction

of the microphone (located in front of the

RearView mirror). Every digit of the number

must be spoken individually and in a

normal manner. The hands-free mode will

work best when the telephone number is

spoken in blocks of three to five digits.

After each spoken block is terminated, the

system will repeat the three to five digits

and wait for you to speak the next digit or

block of digits required for the telephone

number.

See “List of voice commands” later in this

section for the appropriate commands that

can be spoken for the hands-free mode

system.

Example:

In order to initiate a call, speak “Phone-

book”.

INFO

. If you are controlling the telephone

system by voice command for the first

time or do not know the appropriate

voice command, speak “Help”. The

system announces the available com-

mands.

. When you speak numbers, you can

speak both “zero” or “oh” for “0”.

Personal vocabulary (voicetags):

Voice Recognition System is equipped with

the function called “voicetags”, which can

be associated with the phone number and

name in the phonebook. Using the voice

tag will automatically generate a speed

dial to the registered number.

See “Phonebook registration” earlier in

this section.

You can call the identified number using

the following command: “Dial” followed by

the voice tag.

Dialling a name with a voice tag:

It is possible to call up a name via a voice

tag instead of a number, provided the

name and number of your correspondent

has been previously stored in the phone-

book.

Dial via a voice tag, according to the

following procedure.

1. Push the

button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

2. The system replies “please say a

command after the beep. Available

commands are: Call, Phonebook, Re-

cent Calls, Connect Phone or Help”.

3. Give your instructions to the system by

saying: “Dial John” for example (“John”

must have been previously set as a

voice tag for John’s phone number) or

“Dial One” if John is classified as one in

the phonebook.

If the system cannot understand your

command, repeat it according to the

recommendations mentioned in “How

to speak commands” earlier in this

section.

4. If the given name (voice tag) is correct,

the phone system will dial the number

registered for “John”.

INFO

To end the voice command phase at any

stage of the procedure, push the

button once in order to activate the cancel

command.

Manual command selection:

Commands can be selected manually.

While the commands are displayed on the

screen, select a command by operating the

Tune switch, and then push the

button. Once a command is manually

selected, the voice command function is

cancelled. To return to voice command

mode, push the

button to cancel the

current operation, and then perform the

first procedure of voice command.

List of voice commands:

COMMAND ACTION

“Call/Dial”“<name>” Dials the specified <name>.

“Call/Dial”“Redial” Dials the last number.

“Call”“<number>” Dials the specified <number>.

“Phonebook”“<name>” Displays the specified <name> in the phonebook.

“Phonebook”“List Names” Displays all the names in the phonebook.

“Phonebook”“Transfer Entry” Transfers the phonebook data to the system.

“Phonebook”“Delete Entry” Deletes the phonebook registered in the system.

“Connect Phone”“Add Phone” Connects a cellular phone to the system.

“Connect Phone”“Select Phone” Selects a registered cellular phone.

“Connect Phone”“Delete Phone” Deletes a registered cellular phone.

“Connect Phone”“Bluetooth Off” Turns the Bluetooth

connection off.

“Connect Phone”“Replace Phone” Changes the registered order of the cellular phones.

“Connect Phone”“Delete Phone”“All Phones” Deletes all registered cellular phones.

“Connect Phone”“Delete Phone”“List Phones” Selects a registered cellular phone and deletes it.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2575

PAIRING PROCEDURE

Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered.

1. Push the

button on the steering

wheel. The system announces the

available commands.

2. Speak: “Connect Phone”. The system

acknowledges the command and an-

nounces the next set of available

commands.

SAA2576

3. Speak: “Add Phone”. The system ac-

knowledges the command and asks

you to initiate connecting from the

phone handset.

INFO:

The Add Phone command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

SAA2577

4. When asked to enter a PIN code to

connect a Bluetooth

cellular phone,

enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless

of the number of phones paired.

The connecting procedure of a cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for more information.

SAA2578

5. The system asks the user to speak a

name for the phone.

Speak: “Yes”. The system acknowl-

edges the command and registers the

cellular phone.

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells the user, then prompts the

user for a name again.

Also, if more than one phone is connected

and the name sounds too much like a

name already used, the system tells the

user, then prompts the user for name

again.

SAA2579

PHONEBOOK REGISTRATION

When the cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle module, the data stored in

the cellular phone such as phonebook,

outgoing call logs, incoming call logs and

missed call logs is automatically trans-

ferred and registered to the system.

The availability of this function depends on

each cellular phone. The copying procedure

also varies according to each cellular

phone. See cellular phone Owner’s Manual

for more information.

Up to 1,000 phone numbers per registered

cellular phone can be stored in the phone-

book.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2580

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedures

below.

1. Push the

button on the steering

wheel. A tone will sound.

2. Speak: “Call”. The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

3. Speak the registered person’s name.

The system acknowledges the com-

mand and announces the next set of

available commands.

4. Speak: “Yes”. The system acknowl-

edges the command and makes the

call.

5. Once the call has ended, press the

button on the steering wheel.

RECEIVING A CALL

When the ring tone is heard, press the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the button

on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

To reject a call when the ring tone is heard,

press the button on the steering wheel.

SAA2581

DURING A CALL

During a call there are several command

options available. Press the

button on

the steering wheel to mute the receiving

voice and enter commands.

. “(digits)”—Use the Send command to

enter numbers during a call. For exam-

ple, if directed to dial an extension by

an automated system:

Speak: “Sending one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the com-

mand and sends the tones associated

with the numbers. The system then

ends the VR session and returns to the

call.

. “Mute on/off”—Use the Mute com-

mand to mute the user’s voice so the

other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to

unmute the user’s voice.

. “Transfer Handset”—Use the Transfer

Handset command to transfer the call

from the Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone

System to a cellular phone when

privacy is desired. The system an-

nounces, “Transfer Handset. The call

is transferred to the handset only.” The

system then ends the VR session.

The Transfer Call command can also be

issued again to return to a hands-free

call through the vehicle.

. “Help”—The system announces the

available commands.

NOTE:

If the other party ends the call or the

cellular phone network connection is lost

while the Mute feature is on, the Mute

feature may need to be reset to “off.”

SAA2582

PHONE SETTINGS

Call

. (a name)

If there are entries stored in the Phone

Book, a number associated with a

name and location can be dialed. See

“Phone book registration” in this sec-

tion to learn how to store entries. When

prompted by the system, say the name

of the phone book entry to call.

The system acknowledges the name. If

there are multiple locations associated

with the name, the system asks the

user to choose the location.

Once the name and location are con-

firmed, the system begins the call.

. Number

When prompted by the system, speak

the number to call.

. Redial

Use the Redial command to call the last

number of outgoing calls. The system

acknowledges the command, repeats

the number and begins dialing. If a

redial number does not exist, the

system announces, “There is no num-

ber to redial” and ends the VR session.

. Callback

Use the Callback command to call the

last number in incoming calls. The

system acknowledges the command,

repeats the number and begins dialing.

If an incoming call number does not

exist, the system announces, “There is

no number to call back” and ends the

VR session.

. Help

The system announces the available

commands.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2583

Phonebook

. (a name)

Use the name command to seek the

name and locations registered in the

phonebook in alphabetical order. When

the system acknowledges the alphabet

the user spoke, the system announces

all registered names and locations

beginning with that alphabet.

Playback of the list can be stopped at

any time by pressing a button on the

steering wheel. The system ends the VR

session.

. List Names

Use the List Names command to hear

the names and locations registered in

the phonebook. When the system

acknowledges the command, the sys-

tem announces all voicetags registered

in the system.

Playback of the list can be stopped at

any time by pressing a button on the

steering wheel. The system ends the VR

session.

. Transfer Entry

Use the Transfer Entry command to

transfer the phonebook data stored in a

cellular phone to the system.

The system acknowledges the com-

mand and asks the user to initiate a

transfer from the phone handset. The

new contact phone number will be

transferred from the cellular phone via

a Bluetooth

communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according

to each cellular phone. See the cellular

phone Owner’s Manual for more infor-

mation. The system repeats the number

and prompts the user for the next

command. After entering numbers,

choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location

and number. The system then asks if

the user would like to store another

location for the same name. If the user

does not wish to store another location,

the system ends the VR session.

. Delete Entry

Use the Delete Entry command to

delete a specific number or all numbers

in the phonebook. The system an-

nounces the names of the phone

numbers already stored in the system.

The system then gives the option to

delete a specific number or all num-

bers. Once the user chooses to delete a

number or all numbers, the system

asks the user to confirm.

. Help

The system announces the available

commands.

SAA2584

Recent Calls

. Incoming

Use the Incoming command to make a

call viewing the list of incoming calls.

. Missed

Use the Missed command to make a

call viewing the list of missed calls.

. Outgoing

Use the Outgoing command to make a

call viewing the list of outgoing calls.

. Redial

Use the Redial command to dial the last

outgoing call.

. Callback

Use the Callback command to dial the

last incoming call.

. Help

The system announces the available

commands.

SAA2585

Connect Phone

. Add Phone

Use the Pair Phone command to con-

nect a compatible phone to the Blue-

tooth

Hands-Free Phone System.

When asked to enter a PIN code to

connect a Bluetooth

cellular phone,

enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless

of the number of phones connected. Up

to 5 phones can be connected. If the

user tries to connect a sixth phone, the

system announces that the user must

first delete one phone or replace an

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

existing phone. If the user tries to

connect a phone that has already been

connected to the vehicle system, the

system announces the name that the

phone is already using. The connecting

procedure will then be cancelled.

The Add Phone command is not avail-

able when the vehicle is moving.

. Select Phone

Use the Select Phone command to

select a phone of lesser priority when

two or more phones connected with

Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone System

are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks the user to name the

phone and confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the

selected phone remains active until the

ignition switch is turned OFF or a new

phone is selected.

. Delete Phone

Use the Delete Phone command to

delete a specific phone or all phones

from Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone

System. The system announces the

names of the phones already paired

with the system and their priority level.

The system then gives the option to

delete a specific phone, all phones or

listen to the list again. Once the user

chooses to delete a phone or all

phones, the system asks the user to

confirm.

NOTE:

When the user deletes a phone, the

associated phone book for that phone will

also be deleted.

. Replace Phone

Use the Replace Phone command to

change the priority level of the active

phone.

The priority level determines which

phone is active when more than one

paired Bluetooth

phone is in the

vehicle.

The system states the priority level of

the active phone and asks for a new

priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being

used for another phone, the two

phones will swap priority levels.

For example, if the current priority

levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of

Phone C to Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C

Priority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone A

. Bluetooth

On/Off

Use the Bluetooth

On/Off command

to turn on/off Bluetooth

Hands-Free

Phone System.

. Help

The system announces the available

commands.

VOICE ADAPTATION MODE

The Voice Adaptation mode allows up to

two users with different dialects to train

the system to improve recognition accu-

racy. By repeating a number of commands,

the users can create a voice model of their

own voice that is stored in the system. The

system is capable of storing a different

voice adaptation model for each connected

phone.

Training procedure

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably

quiet outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine

running, the parking brake on, and the

transmission in Park.

3. Press the

button.

4. Speak: “Help”. The system acknowl-

edges the command and announces

the next set of available commands.

5. Speak: "Voice Adaptation". The system

acknowledges the command and dis-

plays the voice adaptation mode

screen.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is

selected automatically. If both memory

locations are already in use, the system

will prompt you to overwrite one.

Follow the instructions provided by

the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you

are ready to begin, press the

button.

8. The voice adaptation mode will be

explained. Follow the instructions pro-

vided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system

will tell you an adequate number of

phrases have been recorded.

10.The system will ask you to say your

name. Follow the instructions to regis-

ter your name.

11.The system will announce that voice

adaptation has been completed and

the system is ready.

The voice adaptation mode will stop if:

. The

button is pressed in voice

adaptation mode.

. The vehicle is driven during voice

adaptation mode.

. The ignition switch is turned to the OFF

or LOCK position.

INFINITI Voice Recognition allows hands-

free operation of the Phone, Navigation,

Information and Audio systems in one of

two modes, Standard Mode or Alternate

Command Mode.

In Standard Mode, commands that are

available are always shown on the display

and announced by the system. You can

complete your desired operation by simply

following the prompts given by the system.

(See “INFINITI Voice Recognition standard

mode” later in this section for details.)

For advanced operation, you can use the

Alternate Command Mode. (See “INFINITI

Voice Recognition alternate command

mode” later in this section for details.)

When this mode is active, an expanded list

of commands can be spoken after pushing

the TALK

switch, and the voice

command menu prompts are turned off.

Review the expanded command list, which

is available when this mode is active. Note

that in this mode the recognition success

rate may be affected as the number of

available commands and the ways of

speaking each command are increased.

To switch one mode to another, see each

mode description later in this section.

To improve the recognition success rate

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

(models with navigation system)

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

when Alternate Command Mode is active,

try using the Speaker Adaptation Function

available in that mode. Otherwise, it is

recommended that Alternate Command

Mode be turned off and Standard Mode

be used for the best recognition perfor-

mance.

For the voice commands for the navigation

system, refer to the Navigation System

Owner’s Manual of your vehicle.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION STAN-

DARD MODE

The following section is applicable when

the Standard Mode is activated.

The Standard Mode enables you to com-

plete the desired operation by simply

following the prompts that appear on the

display and also are announced by the

system.

SAA3008

Activating Standard Mode

When the Alternate Command Mode is

active, perform the following steps to

switch to the Standard Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

SAA2530

4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode”

key.

5. The indicator turns off and the Stan-

dard Mode activates.

Displaying user guide

If you use the INFINITI Voice Recognition

system for the first time or you do not

know how to operate it, you can display

the User Guide for confirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice com-

mands by accessing a simplified User

Guide, which contains basic instructions

and tutorials for several voice commands.

SAA2531

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “User Guide” key.

5. Select a preferred item.

You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say

“Help”.

Available items:

. Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate

the INFINITI Voice Recognition system.

. Let’s Practice

Mode that allows practicing by follow-

ing the instructions of the system voice.

. Using the Address Book

Tutorial for entering a destination by

using the Address Book.

. Finding a Street Address (if so

equipped)

Tutorial for entering a destination by

street address.

. Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by

voice command operation.

. Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips of speaking for

correct command recognition by the

system.

Note that the Command List feature is only

available when Alternate Command Mode

is active.

SAA2532

Getting Started

Before using the INFINITI Voice Recognition

system for the first time, you can confirm

how to use commands by viewing the

Getting Started section of the User Guide.

1. Select the “Getting Started” key.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling

the screen using the INFINITI controller.

Tutorials on the operation of the INFINITI

Voice Recognition system

If you choose “Using the Address Book”,

“Finding a Street Address” or “Placing

Calls”, you can view tutorials on how to

perform these operations using INFINITI

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Voice Recognition.

SAA2534

Let’s Practice

This mode helps learn how to use the

INFINITI Voice Recognition system.

1. Select the “Let’s Practice” key.

2. After the message screen appears,

push the TALK

switch on the

steering wheel.

3. Speak the displayed number after the

tone. The evaluation screen will be

displayed and the result can be con-

firmed.

SAA2533

Useful tips for correct operation

You can display useful speaking tips to

help the system recognize your voice

commands correctly.

Select “Help on Speaking” to start display.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is

initialized, which can take up to one

minute. When completed, the system is

ready to accept voice commands. If the

TALK

switch is pushed before the

initialization completes, the display will

show the message: “System not ready.” or

a beep sounds.

Before starting

To get the best recognition performance

from INFINITI Voice Recognition, observe

the following:

. The interior of the vehicle should be as

quiet as possible. Close the windows to

eliminate the surrounding noises (traf-

fic noise and vibration sounds, etc.),

which may prevent the system from

correctly recognizing the voice com-

mands.

. Wait until the tone sounds before

speaking a command.

. Speak in a natural conversational voice

without pausing between words.

. If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”,

the fan speed is automatically lowered

so that your commands can be recog-

nized more easily.

SAA3001

Giving voice commands

1. Push the TALK switch located on

the steering wheel.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2535

2. A list of commands appears on the

screen, and the system announces,

“Would you like to access Phone,

Navigation, Information, Audio or

Help?”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on

the screen changes from

to ,

speak a command.

Selecting the “Practice” key will start

the practice mode. See “Let’s Practice”

earlier in this section.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu

prompts and speak after the tone

sounds until your desired operation is

completed.

Selecting the “Help” key can display

the detailed information of the each

command.

Operating tips:

. Say a command after the tone.

. Commands that are available are al-

ways shown on the display and spoken

through voice menu prompts. Com-

mands other than those that are dis-

played are not accepted. Please follow

the prompts given by the system.

. If the command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Please say again”.

Repeat the command in a clear voice.

. Push the BACK button once to return to

the previous screen.

. To exit the voice recognition system,

push and hold the TALK

switch. The

message, “Voice canceled” will be

announced.

. To skip the voice guidance function and

give the command immediately, press

the TALK

switch to interrupt the

system. Remember to speak after the

tone.

. If you want to adjust the volume of the

system feedback, push the volume

control buttons [+] or [− ] on the

steering switch or use the audio system

volume knob while the system is

making an announcement.

How to speak numbers:

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer-

tain way to speak numbers when giving

voice commands. Refer to the following

examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

(For example, if you would like to say 500,

“five zero zero” can be used, but “five

hundred” cannot.)

Examples

. 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight zero zero six six two six

two zero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers

You can improve the recognition of phone

numbers by saying the phone number in

three groups of numbers. For example,

when you try to call 800-662-6200, say

“eight zero zero” first, and the system will

then ask you for the next three digits. Then,

say “six six two”. After recognition, the

system will then ask for the last four digits.

Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method

of phone digit entry can improve recogni-

tion performance.

When speaking a house number, speak the

number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)”

is included in the house number, it will not

be recognized as the number “0 (zero)”

even if you speak “oh” instead of “zero”.

Please speak “zero” for the number “0

(zero)”, “oh” for the letter “o (oh)”

Send digits using dial tone:

. Press the TALK

switch during a

phone call.

. The menu will be launched and you will

be provided with the following gui-

dance: "Please say the digits to dial".

. After guidance, say the digits of the

number you want to send. After this,

the digits that have been recognized

will be read out.

. If you press the ENTER button on the

steering wheel or on the INFINITI con-

troller, the selected digits will be sent.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Command List

Category Command:

Command Action

Phone Operates the Phone function

Navigation Operates the Navigation function

Information Displays the vehicle Information function

Audio Operates the Audio function.

Help Displays User Guide

. Phone Command:

Command Action

Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.

Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook.

Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.

Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.

Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.

International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

. Navigation Command:

Command Action

Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.

Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.

Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Command Action

Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

. Information Command:

Command Action

Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.

Maintenance Displays maintenance information.

Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.

Where am I?

Displays your current location.

. Audio Command:

Command Action

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played.

CD Starts to play a CD.

. General Commands

Command Action

Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen

Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Voice command examples

To use the INFINITI Voice Recognition

function, speaking one command is some-

times sufficient, but at other times it is

necessary to speak two or more com-

mands. As examples, some additional

basic operations by voice commands are

described here.

For navigation system commands, see the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

SAA3001

Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone

number 800-662-6200:

1. Push the TALK

switch located on

the steering wheel.

SAA2535

2. The system announces, “Would you like

to access Phone, Navigation, Informa-

tion, Audio or Help?”

3. Speak “Phone”.

SAA2536

4. Speak “Dial Number”.

SAA2537

5. Speak “800”.

Selecting the “Manual Controls” key

switches the screen to the keypad to

input the phone number manually.

SAA2538

6. The system announces, “Please say the

next three digits or dial, or say change

number.”

7. Speak “662”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2539

8. The system announces, “Please say the

last four digits” or say change number.

9. Speak “6200”.

SAA2540

10.The system announces, “Dial or Change

Number?”

11.Speak “Dial”.

12.The system makes a call to 800-662-

6200.

Note:

. You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10

continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7

continuous digits), if the area code is

not necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit

grouping is recommended for improved

recognition. (See “How to speak num-

bers” earlier in this section.)

. You can only say a phone number using

the 3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10

digits using this command. Please use

the “International Call” command for

all other formats.

. If you say “Change Number” during

phone number entry, the system will

automatically request that you repeat

the number using the 3-3-4 format. In

this case please say the area code first

and then follow the prompts.

. Do not add a “1” in front of the area

code when speaking phone numbers.

. If the system does not recognize your

command, please try repeating the

command using a natural voice. Speak-

ing too slow or too loudly may further

decrease recognition performance.

SAA3001

Example 2 - Placing an international call to

the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:

1. Push the TALK

switch located on

the steering wheel.

SAA2535

2. The system announces, “Would you like

to access Phone, Navigation, Informa-

tion, Audio or Help?”

3. Speak “Phone”.

SAA2536

4. Speak “International Call”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2541

5. Speak “011811112223333”.

SAA2542

6. Speak “Dial”.

7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-

222-3333.

Note:

Any digit input format is available in the

International Number input process.

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION AL-

TERNATE COMMAND MODE

The following section is applicable when

Alternate Command Mode is activated.

When Alternate Command Mode is acti-

vated, an expanded list of commands can

be used after pressing the TALK

switch. In this mode, available commands

are not fully shown on the display or

prompted. Review the expanded command

list when this mode is active. See exam-

ples of Alternate Command Mode screens.

Please note that in this mode the recogni-

tion success rate may be affected as the

number of available commands and ways

of speaking each command are increased.

To improve the recognition success rate,

try using the Speaker Adaptation Function

available in that mode. (See “Speaker

adaptation function (for Alternate Com-

mand Mode)” later in this section.) Other-

wise it is recommended that Alternate

Command Mode be turned OFF and Stan-

dard Mode be used for the best recognition

performance.

SAA2529

Activating Alternate Command

Mode

When the Standard Mode is active, perform

the following steps to switch to the

Alternate Command Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Highlight the “Others” key.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key.

SAA2543

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command

Mode” key.

5. The confirmation message is displayed

on the screen. Push the “OK” key to

activate the Alternate Command Mode.

Displaying command list

If you are controlling the system by voice

commands for the first time or do not know

the appropriate voice command, perform

the following procedure for displaying the

voice command list (available only in

Alternate Command Mode).

SAA2544

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “Command List” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2545

5. Select a category from the list.

SAA2546

6. Select an item.

7. If necessary, scroll the screen using the

INFINITI controller to view the entire list.

8. Press the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

Command list

Phone Commands:

Command Action

Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number.

Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook.

Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.

Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.

Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.

International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Call <name>

Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either Vehicle Phonebook or Handset Phonebook.

Please say “Call” followed by a stored name.

Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Navigation Commands:

Command Action

Destination Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.

Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.

Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Previous Start Point Sets a route to a previous starting point.

Delete Destination Deletes a destination.

Information Commands:

Command Action

Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.

Maintenance Displays maintenance information.

Tire Pressure (if so equipped) Displays tire pressure information

Where am I? Displays your current location.

Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.

Weather Information Displays weather information.

Weather Map Displays a weather map.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio Commands:

Command Action

CD Starts to play a CD.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

XM Turns to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played.

USB Turns on the USB memory.

Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth

audio player.

Help Commands:

Command Action

Command List Navigation Commands Displays the navigation command list.

Phone Commands Displays the phone command list.

Audio Commands Displays the audio command list.

Information Commands Displays the information command list.

Help Commands Displays the help command list.

User Guide Displays the User Guide.

Speaker Adaptation The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

General Commands:

Command Action

Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen

Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

SAA2547

Displaying user guide

You can confirm how to use voice com-

mands by accessing a simplified User

Guide, which contains basic instructions

and tutorials for several voice commands.

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key using the

INFINITI controller and push the ENTER

button.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key

using the INFINITI controller and push

the ENTER button.

4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using

the INFINITI controller and push the

ENTER button.

5. Highlight an item using the INFINITI

controller and push the ENTER button.

Available items:

. Getting Started

Describe the basics of how to operate

the INFINITI Voice Recognition system.

. Let’s Practice

Mode that allows practicing by follow-

ing the instructions of the system voice.

. Using the Address Book

Refer to Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

. Finding a Street Address (if so

equipped)

Refer to Navigation System Owner’s

Manual.

. Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by

voice command operation.

. Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctly

speak commands in order for them to

be properly recognized by the system.

. Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available voice recogni-

tion settings.

. Adapting the System to Your Voice

Tutorial adapting the system to your

voice.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition is

initialized, which may take up to one

minute. When completed, the system is

ready to accept voice commands. If the

TALK

switch is pushed before the

initialization completes the display will

show the message: “System not ready.”

or a beep sounds.

Before starting

To get the best performance from INFINITI

Voice Recognition, observe the following.

. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to

eliminate the surrounding noises (traf-

fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),

which may prevent the system from

recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133

4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

. When the air conditioner is in the AUTO

mode, the fan speed decreases auto-

matically for easy recognition.

. Wait until a tone sounds before speak-

ing a command.

. Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

SAA3001

Giving voice command

1. Push and release the TALK switch

located on the steering wheel.

SAA2548

2. A list of commands appears on the

screen, and the system announces,

“Please say a command”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on

the screen changes from

to ,

speak a command.

Operating tips:

. Voice commands cannot be accepted

when the icon is

. The list displayed can be scrolled by

tilting the menu control switch on the

steering wheel.

. If the command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Please say again”.

Repeat the command in a clear voice.

. Push the BACK button once to return to

the previous screen.

. If you want to cancel the command,

push and hold the TALK

switch for

1 second. The message “Voice can-

celed” will be announced.

. To skip the voice guidance function and

give the command immediately, press

the TALK

switch to interrupt the

system. Remember to speak after the

tone.

. If you want to adjust the volume of the

system feedback, push the volume

control switch (+ or −) on the steering

wheel or use the audio system volume

knob while the system is making an

announcement.

How to speak numbers:

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer-

tain way to speak numbers when giving

voice commands. Refer to the following

examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

(For example, if you would like to say 500,

“five zero zero” can be used, but “five

hundred” cannot.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the

following examples:

. 1-800-662-6200

—“Dial one eight zero zero six six two

six two zero zero.”

Note 1: For the best voice recognition

phone dialing results, say phone numbers

as single digits.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five

five five six thousands”.

Note 3: When speaking a house number,

speak the number “0” as “zero”. If the

letter “o (Oh)” is included in the house

number, it will not be recognized as the

number “0 (zero)” even if you speak “oh”

instead of “zero”. Please speak “zero” for

the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the letter

“o (oh)”.

Send digits using dial tone:

. Press the TALK

switch during a

phone call.

. The menu will be launched and you will

be provided with the following gui-

dance: "Please say the digits to dial".

. After guidance, say the digits of the

number you want to send. After this,

the digits that have been recognized

will be read out.

. If you press the ENTER button on the

steering wheel or on the INFINITI con-

troller, the selected digits will be sent.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135

4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SAA2549

Speaker adaptation function (for

Alternate Command Mode)

The voice recognition system has a func-

tion to learn the user’s voice for better

voice recognition performance. The system

can memorize the voices of up to three

persons.

Having the system learn the user’s voice:

1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel and select the “Others”

key.

2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

SAA2550

4. Select the user whose voice is memor-

ized by the system.

5. Select the “Start Speaker Adaptation

Learning” key.

SAA2551

6. Select a category to be learned by the

system from the following list.

Phone Commands

Navigation Commands

Information Commands

Audio Commands

Help Commands

The voice commands in the category

are displayed.

7. Select a voice command and then push

the ENTER button.

The voice recognition system starts.

SAA2552

8. The system requests that you repeat a

command after a tone.

9. After the tone sounds and the icon on

the screen changes from

to ,

speak the command that the system

requested.

10.When the system has recognized the

voice command, the voice of the user is

learned.

Push the

switch or BACK button to

return to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command

correctly, the voice command status on the

right side of the command turns from

“None” to “Stored”.

SAA2553

Speaker Adaptation function settings:

Edit User Name

Edit the user name using the keypad

displayed on the screen.

Delete Voice Data

Resets the user’s voice that the voice

recognition system has learned.

Continuous Learning

When this item is turned to ON, you can

have the system learn the voice commands

in succession, without selecting com-

mands one by one.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137

4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Minimize voice feedback (for Alter-

nate Command Mode)

To minimize the voice feedback from the

system, perform the following steps.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “Minimize Voice Feedback”

key.

5. The setting is turned to ON and the

voice guidance will now be reduced

when using the Voice Recognition

system.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in

this guide for the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

The system fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in

the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “Bluetooth

Hands-Free Phone

System (models with navigation system)” earlier in this section; page 4-86.)

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139

4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ................. 5-3

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)....................... 5-3

Three-way catalyst........................................... 5-4

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).......... 5-4

Avoiding collision and rollover......................... 5-7

Off-road recovery............................................. 5-7

Rapid air pressure loss ................................... 5-7

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ................. 5-8

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving

safety precautions........................................... 5-8

Push-button ignition switch ................................. 5-9

Operating range for engine start function ...... 5-10

Push-button ignition switch operation ........... 5-10

Steering lock (if so equipped)........................ 5-11

Push-button ignition switch positions............ 5-11

Emergency engine shut off ............................ 5-12

Intelligent Key battery discharge ................... 5-12

Before starting the engine ................................. 5-13

Starting the engine............................................ 5-13

Driving the vehicle............................................. 5-14

Automatic transmission ................................. 5-14

Parking brake .................................................... 5-19

INFINITI drive mode selector............................... 5-20

Standard mode ............................................. 5-20

Sport mode ................................................... 5-20

Snow mode ................................................. 5-21

Eco mode .................................................... 5-21

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system (if

so equipped)..................................................... 5-23

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system......... 5-24

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system ...... 5-27

Lane camera unit maintenance .................... 5-32

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind Spot

Intervention

(BSI) system (if so equipped)...... 5-32

BSW system operation................................. 5-34

BSI system operation................................... 5-37

BSW/BSI driving situations.......................... 5-40

BSW/BSI malfunction................................... 5-45

System maintenance.................................... 5-45

Cruise control.................................................... 5-46

Precautions on cruise control....................... 5-46

Cruise control operations............................. 5-46

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (if

so equipped)..................................................... 5-48

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode ............................................... 5-49

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode...... 5-49

Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode ............................................... 5-50

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode operation............................................. 5-51

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode................................................. 5-66

Preview function (for Intelligent Cruise Control

system equipped models) ............................. 5-69

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system (if

so equipped) ..................................................... 5-70

Precautions on Distance Control

Assist system ................................................ 5-70

Distance Control Assist operation .................. 5-72

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system (if

so equipped) ..................................................... 5-82

Precautions on FCW system........................... 5-83

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system (if

so equipped) ..................................................... 5-86

Precautions on IBA system ............................ 5-87

Break-in schedule.............................................. 5-90

Increasing fuel economy .................................... 5-90

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if

so equipped) ..................................................... 5-90

Parking/parking on hills .................................... 5-92

Sonar system (if so equipped) ........................... 5-93

Sonar indicator.............................................. 5-94

Sonar system OFF switch............................... 5-95

Power steering................................................... 5-95

Brake system .................................................... 5-95

Braking precautions..................................... 5-95

Parking brake break-in................................. 5-96

Brake assist...................................................... 5-96

Brake assist................................................. 5-96

Preview function (Intelligent Cruise Control

system equipped models)............................ 5-96

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................... 5-99

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ............ 5-100

Active trace control (if so equipped)........... 5-101

Rise-up and build-up ................................. 5-101

Brake force distribution ............................. 5-101

Hill Start Assist system ................................... 5-102

4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system (if

so equipped)................................................... 5-103

Cold weather driving ....................................... 5-103

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................... 5-103

Antifreeze .................................................. 5-103

Battery....................................................... 5-103

Draining of coolant water........................... 5-104

Tire equipment .......................................... 5-104

Special winter equipment .......................... 5-104

Driving on snow or ice............................... 5-104

Engine block heater (if so equipped).......... 5-105

Active noise control......................................... 5-106

WARNING

. Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support of

others alone in your vehicle. Pets should

not be left alone either. They could

accidentally injure themselves or others

through inadvertent operation of the

vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

. Closely supervise children when they are

around cars to prevent them from play-

ing and becoming locked in the trunk

where they could be seriously injured.

Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

. Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

. Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

. Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,

otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn

into the passenger compartment. If you

must drive with the trunk lid open,

follow these precautions:

1) Open all the windows.

2) Set the

air recirculation to off

and the fan control to high to

circulate the air.

. If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the trunk lid or the body,

follow the manufacturer’s recommenda-

tion to prevent carbon monoxide entry

into the vehicle.

. The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic when-

ever:

—

The vehicle is raised for service.

—

You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger compart-

ment.

—

You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

—

You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-3

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission

control device installed in the exhaust

system. Exhaust gases in the three-way

catalyst are burned at high temperatures to

help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

. The exhaust gas and the exhaust system

are very hot. Keep people, animals or

flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

. Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite and

cause a fire.

CAUTION

. Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline seriously reduce

the three-way catalyst’s ability to help

reduce exhaust pollutants.

. Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions

in the ignition, fuel injection, or elec-

trical systems can cause overrich fuel

flow into the three-way catalyst, causing

it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the

engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of

performance or other unusual operating

conditions are detected. Have the vehicle

inspected promptly by an INFINITI retai-

ler.

. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

. Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire maintenance,

and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue

upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low

tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-

tions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information

. The TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

. The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

. The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is

inflated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning

appears in the dot matrix liquid crystal

display when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low

tire pressure is detected. The CHECK

TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when

the low tire pressure warning light

turns off.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning

does not appear if the tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a

TPMS malfunction.

. Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s

operation and the outside temperature.

Low outside temperature can lower the

temperature of the air inside the tire

which can cause a lower tire inflation

pressure. This may cause the low tire

pressure warning light to illuminate. If

the warning light illuminates in low

ambient temperature, check the tire

pressure for all four tires.

. You can also check the pressure of all

tires (except the spare tire) on the

display screen. The order of the tire

pressure figures displayed on the

screen does not correspond with the

actual order of the tire position. See

“TIRE PRESSURE information” in the “4.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section and “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in

the “6. In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates or LOW PRESSURE informa-

tion is displayed on the monitor screen

while driving, avoid sudden steering

maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce

vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop the vehicle as soon as

possible. Driving with under-inflated

tires may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire fail-

ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

Starting and driving 5-5

5-6 Starting and driving

result in serious personal injury. Check

the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire

may be flat. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “6. In

case of emergency” section for changing

a flat tire.)

. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

. Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CAUTION

. The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with tire

chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

. Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.

This may cause poor reception of the

signals from the tire pressure sensors,

and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate. Some exam-

ples are:

. Facilities or electric devices using simi-

lar radio frequencies are near the

vehicle.

. If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the

vehicle.

. If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) this

device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-

OVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner may result in loss of control

or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-

sive speed, high speed cornering, or

sudden steering maneuvers, because

these driving practices could cause you to

lose control of your vehicle. As with any

vehicle, a loss of control could result in a

collision with other vehicles or objects, or

cause the vehicle to rollover, particularly if

the loss of control causes the vehicle to

slide sideways. Be attentive at all times,

and avoid driving when tired. Never drive

when under the influence of alcohol or

drugs (including prescription or over-the-

counter drugs which may cause drowsi-

ness). Always wear your seat belt as

outlined in the “Seat belts” in the “1.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section of this

manual, and also instruct your passengers

to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

If driving the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface.

Maintain control of the vehicle by following

the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The

vehicle must be driven as appropriate

based on the conditions of the vehicle,

road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while the

vehicle speed is reduced. Do not

attempt to drive the vehicle back onto

the road surface until vehicle speed is

reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires

return to the road surface. When all

tires are on the road surface, steer the

vehicle to stay in the appropriate

driving lane.

If you decide that it is not safe to

return the vehicle to the road surface

based on vehicle, road or traffic

conditions, gradually slow the vehi-

cle to a stop in a safe place off the

road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by

driving on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the

handling and stability of the vehicle,

especially at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspect the tires for wear and

damage. See “Wheels and tires” in the “8.

Starting and driving 5-7

5-8 Starting and driving

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or

“blows-out” while driving maintain control

of the vehicle by following the procedure

below. Please note that this procedure is

only a general guide. The vehicle must be

driven as appropriate based on the condi-

tions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

. The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

. Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

. Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

. Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and either contact a roadside emer-

gency service to change the tire or see

“Changing a flat tire” in the “6. In case

of emergency” section of this Owner’s

Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or

drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces

coordination, delays reaction time and im-

pairs judgement. Driving after drinking

alcohol increases the likelihood of being

involved in an accident injuring yourself and

others. Additionally, if you are injured in an

accident, alcohol can increase the severity

of the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving.

However, you must choose not to drive

under the influence of alcohol. Every year

thousands of people are injured or killed in

alcohol-related accidents. Although the

local laws vary on what is considered to

be legally intoxicated, the fact is that

alcohol affects all people differently and

most people underestimate the effects of

alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-

counter, prescription, and illegal drugs).

Don’t drive if your ability to operate your

vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or

some other physical condition.

INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL DRIVE

(AWD) DRIVING SAFETY PRECAU-

TIONS

WARNING

. Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with Intelli-

gent AWD engaged. Accelerating quickly,

sharp steering maneuvers or sudden

braking may cause loss of control.

. Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the rear

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

. This vehicle is not designed for offroad

(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy

or muddy roads that tires may get stuck

in.

. For AWD equipped vehicles, do not

attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position with

the engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

. Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer,

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with AWD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or

personal injury.

. When a wheel is off the ground due to an

unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel

excessively.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except in an

emergency. (The engine will stop when the

ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive

times or the ignition switch is pushed and

held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine

stops while the vehicle is being driven, this

could lead to a crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignition

switch, be sure to move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-9

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-10 Starting and driving

SSD0659

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key can only be used for

starting the engine when the Intelligent

Key is within the specified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are

present near the operating location, the

Intelligent Key system’s operating range

becomes narrower and may not function

properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even

someone who does not carry the Intelligent

Key, to push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

. The trunk area is not included in the

operating range but the Intelligent Key

may function.

. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, rear parcel shelf,

inside the glove box or door pocket,

the Intelligent Key may not function.

. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the

door or window outside the vehicle, the

Intelligent Key may function.

SSD1021

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

OPERATION

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch position will change as follows:

. Push center once to change to ACC.

. Push center two times to change to ON.

. Push center three times to change to

OFF. (No position illuminates.)

. Push center four times to return to ACC.

. Open or close any door to return to

LOCK during the OFF position.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot be

turned from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-

tion are displayed on the dot matrix liquid

crystal display between the speedometer

and tachometer. (See “Dot matrix liquid

crystal display” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.)

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch position cannot be switched

to LOCK until the selector lever is moved to

the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the LOCK position, proceed as

follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position. The ignition switch position

indicator will not illuminate.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will

change to the LOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

STEERING LOCK (if so equipped)

In order for the steering wheel to be

locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a

right or left turn from the straight up

position.

To lock the steering wheel, push the

ignition switch to the OFF position. To

unlock the steering wheel, push the

ignition switch. If the steering lock release

malfunction indicator appears on the dot

matrix liquid crystal display, push the

push-button ignition switch again while

lightly turning the steering wheel right

and left. (See “Dot matrix liquid crystal

display” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.)

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in

this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when

it is pushed to the ACC position while

carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical acces-

sories such as the radio, when the engine

is not running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system

and electrical accessories.

OFF

The engine can be turned off in this

position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch cannot be switched to the

LOCK position until the selector lever is

moved to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-

button ignition switch in ACC or ON posi-

tions when the engine is not running for an

extended period. This can discharge the

battery.

Starting and driving 5-11

5-12 Starting and driving

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving perform the follow-

ing procedure:

. Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times, or

. Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

SSD0860

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-

CHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is

discharged, or environmental conditions

interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,

start the engine according to the following

procedure:

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the

Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime

will sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depres-

sing the brake pedal within 10 seconds

after the chime sounds. The engine will

start.

After step 3 is performed, when the

ignition switch is pushed without depres-

sing the brake pedal, the ignition switch

position will change to ACC.

NOTE:

. When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position or the engine is

started by the above procedures, the

Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator appears on the dot matrix liquid

crystal display even if the Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a

malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent

Key battery discharge indicator, touch

the ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key again.

. If the Intelligent Key battery discharge

indicator appears, replace the battery

as soon as possible. (See “Intelligent

Key battery replacement” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.)

. Make sure the area around the vehicle

is clear.

. Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake fluid and window

washer fluid as frequently as possible,

or at least whenever you refuel.

. Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

. Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires for

proper inflation.

. Lock all doors.

. Position seat and adjust head re-

straints.

. Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

. Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

. Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position. (See “Warning/indica-

tor lights and audible reminders” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section.)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

or N (Neutral) position. (P is recom-

mended.)

The starter is designed not to operate

unless the selector lever is in either of

the above positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position. Depress the brake pedal and

push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

To start the engine immediately, push

and release the ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal with the

ignition switch in any position.

If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when

restarting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to

the floor) and while holding, crank

the engine. Release the accelerator

pedal when the engine starts.

If the engine is very hard to start

because it is flooded, depress the

accelerator pedal all the way to the

floor and hold it. Push the ignition

switch to the ON position to start

cranking the engine. After 5 or 6

seconds, stop cranking by pushing

the ignition switch to OFF. After

cranking the engine, release the

accelerator pedal. Crank the engine

with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by depressing the brake pedal

and pushing the push-button igni-

tion switch to start the engine. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat

the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15

seconds at a time. If the engine does not

start, push the ignition switch to OFF and

wait 10 seconds before cranking again,

otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In cold

weather, keep the engine running for a

minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before

shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time

may make the vehicle more difficult to

Starting and driving 5-13

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-14 Starting and driving

start.

When racing the engine up to 4,000

rpm (VK56VD engine) or 4,500 rpm

(VQ37VHR engine) or more under no

load condition, the engine will enter the

fuel cut mode.

5. To stop the engine, shift the selector

lever to the P (Park) position and push

the ignition switch to the OFF position.

In preparation for the next engine start,

the engine may have a slightly delayed

shutoff after pushing the ignition

switch to the OFF position, depending

on the driving conditions (VK56VD

engine models).

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electro-

nic accessories that consume battery

power when the engine is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The automatic transmission in your vehicle

is electronically controlled by a transmis-

sion control module to produce maximum

efficiency and smooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the

recommended operating procedures for

this transmission. Follow these procedures

for maximum vehicle performance and

driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal and push the selector

lever button before shifting the selector

lever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D

(Drive) or Manual shift mode position. Be

sure the vehicle is fully stopped before

attempting to shift the selector lever.

This automatic transmission model is

designed so that the foot brake pedal

must be depressed before shifting from P

(Park) to any drive position while the

ignition switch position is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of the

other gear positions if the ignition switch

is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC

position.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and push the selector lever button to

shift into a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot

brake, then gradually start the vehicle

in motion.

WARNING

. Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or

manual shift mode. Always depress the

brake pedal until shifting is completed.

Failure to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

. Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while vehicle is moving forward. Never

shift to P (Park) or D (Drive) while vehicle

is moving rearward. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and have

an accident.

CAUTION

. When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

. Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

. Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Doing so can cause a loss of engine

braking which may result in a collision,

serious personal injury or death. In

addition, coasting with the transmission

in the N (Neutral) position may cause

serious damage to the transmission.

SSD0973

Selector lever

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal,

: Push the button,

: Just move the selector lever.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and shift the selector lever

from P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D

(Drive) or Manual shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R

(Reverse). All other positions can be

selected without pushing the button.

Starting and driving 5-15

5-16 Starting and driving

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector lever

is in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause the

vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away

and result in serious personal injury or

property damage.

CAUTION

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped

and the transmission is in the P (Park)

position.

P (Park) position:

Use this selector position when the vehicle

is parked or when starting the engine.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed and the selector lever button

pushed in to move the selector lever from

the N (Neutral) position or any drive

position to the P (Park) position. Apply

the parking brake. When parking on a hill,

apply the parking brake first, then move

the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be

sure the vehicle is completely stopped

before selecting the R (Reverse) position.

The brake pedal must be depressed and

the selector lever button pushed in to

move the selector lever from the P (Park)

position, the N (Neutral) position or any

drive position to the R (Reverse) position.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to the N (Neutral)

position and restart a stalled engine while

the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

SSD1099

Paddle shifters (if so equipped)

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is in the manual

shift gate, the transmission is ready for the

manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be

selected manually by moving the selector

lever up or down, or pulling the right-side

or left-side paddle shifter (if so equipped).

When shifting up, move the selector lever

to the + (up) side or pull the right-side

paddle shifter (+)

(if so equipped). The

transmission shifts to the higher range.

When shifting down, move the selector

lever to the − (down) side or pull the left-

side paddle shifter (−)

(if so equipped).

The transmission shifts to the lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode,

return the selector lever to the D (Drive)

position. The transmission returns to the

normal driving mode.

When you pull the paddle shifter while in

the D (Drive) position, the transmission will

shift to the upper or lower range tempora-

rily. The transmission will automatically

return to the D (Drive) position after a short

period of time. If you want to return to the

D (Drive) position manually, pull and hold

the paddle shifter for about 1.5 seconds.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the

meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

7 (7th):

Use these positions for all normal forward

driving at highway speeds.

6 (6th) and

5 (5th):

Use this position when driving up long

slopes, or for engine braking when driving

down long slopes.

4 (4th),

3 (3rd) and

2 (2nd):

Use these positions for hill climbing or

engine braking on downhill grades.

1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep

snow, or for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill grades.

. Remember not to drive at high speeds

for extended periods of time in lower

than 7th gear. This reduces fuel econ-

omy.

. Moving the selector lever rapidly to the

same side twice will shift the ranges in

succession.

. In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear

or may automatically shift to the other

gear. This helps maintain driving per-

formance and reduces the chance of

vehicle damage or loss of control.

. When the transmission does not shift

to the selected gear, the Automatic

Transmission (AT) position indicator

light (on the dot matrix liquid crystal

display) will blink and the buzzer will

sound.

. In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down to 1st

gear before the vehicle comes to a

stop. When accelerating again, it is

necessary to shift up to the desired

range.

Accelerator downshift — In D (Drive)

position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress

the accelerator pedal to the floor. This

shifts the transmission down into the lower

gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, note

that the transmission will be locked in any

of the forward gears according to the

condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-

ning and subsequent hard braking, the

fail-safe system may be activated. This will

occur even if all electrical circuits are

functioning properly. In this case, push

the ignition switch to the OFF position and

wait for 3 seconds. Then push the ignition

switch back to the ON position. The vehicle

should return to its normal operating

condition. If it does not return to its

Starting and driving 5-17

5-18 Starting and driving

normal operating condition, have an

INFINITI retailer check the transmission

and repair if necessary.

SSD0974

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,

the selector lever may not be moved from

the P (Park) position even with the brake

pedal depressed and the selector lever

button pushed.

To move the selector lever, perform the

following procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover

using a

suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock

illustrated.

5. Push the selector lever button

and

move the selector lever to N (Neutral)

position

while holding down the

shift lock.

Push the ignition switch to the ON position

to unlock the steering wheel (if so

equipped). Now the vehicle may be moved

to the desired location.

For models with a steering wheel lock

mechanism: If the battery is discharged

completely, the steering wheel cannot be

unlocked. Do not move the vehicle with the

steering wheel locked.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park), have an INFINITI retailer check the

automatic transmission system as soon as

possible.

Adaptive Shift Control (ASC)

The adaptive shift control system automa-

tically operates when the transmission is

in the "D" (drive) position and selects an

appropriate gear depending on the road

conditions such as uphill, downhill or

curving roads.

Control on uphill and curving roads:

A low gear is maintained that suits the

degree of the slope or curve to allow

smooth driving with a small number of

shifts.

Control on downhill roads:

The adaptive shift control system shifts to

a low gear that suits the degree of the

slope, and uses the engine braking to

reduce the number of times that the brake

must be used.

Control on winding roads:

A low gear is maintained on continuous

curves that involve repeated acceleration

and deceleration, so that smooth accelera-

tion is available instantly when the accel-

erator pedal is depressed.

NOTE:

. Adaptive shift control may not operate

when the transmission oil temperature

is low immediately after the start of

driving or when it is very hot.

. During some driving situations, hard

braking for example, the adaptive shift

control may automatically operate. The

transmission may automatically shift

to a lower gear for engine braking. This

increases engine speed but not vehicle

speed. Vehicle speed is controlled by

the accelerator pedal when the vehicle

is in the Adaptive shift control mode.

. When the adaptive shift control oper-

ates, the transmission sometimes

maintains a lower gear for a longer

period of time than when adaptive shift

control is not operating. Engine speed

will be higher for a specific vehicle

speed while ASC system is operating

than when ASC is not operating.

WARNING

. Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

. Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

. Do not use the gear shift in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

. Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the parking

brake and cause an accident.

Starting and driving 5-19

PARKING BRAKE

5-20 Starting and driving

SPA2331

To apply: Fully depress the parking brake

pedal

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake

2. Depress the parking brake pedal

and the parking brake will be released.

3. Before driving, be sure the brake

warning light goes out.

SSD1024

Drive mode select switch

Four driving modes can be selected by

using the drive mode selector switch,

STANDARD, SPORT, ECO and SNOW.

NOTE:

. When the drive mode select switch

selects a mode, the mode may not

switch quickly. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

. Select the STANDARD mode for normal

driving.

STANDARD MODE

Recommended for normal driving. Turn the

drive mode select switch to the

position. “STANDARD” appears in the

vehicle information display for 2 seconds.

SPORT MODE

Adjusts the engine and transmission

points to enhance performance. If the

vehicle is equipped with 4-Wheel Active

Steer (4WAS) system, the SPORT mode

adjusts this system’s settings to provide

faster steering ratios. If the vehicle is

equipped with the active trace control

system, the amount of brake control

provided by active trace control is reduced.

(See “4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system”

later in this section or “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” later in this section.)

Turn the drive mode select switch to the

SPORT position. “SPORT” appears in the

vehicle information display for 2 seconds.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be

reduced.

INFINITI DRIVE MODE SELECTOR

SNOW MODE

Used on snowy roads or slippery areas.

When the SNOW mode is activated, engine

output is controlled to avoid wheel spin.

Turn the SNOW mode off for normal

driving. Turn the drive mode select switch

to the SNOW position. “SNOW” appears in

the vehicle information display for 2

seconds.

ECO MODE

Adjusts engine and transmission points to

enhance fuel economy.

NOTE:

Selecting this drive mode will not neces-

sarily improve fuel economy as many

driving factors influence its effectiveness.

Operation

Turn the drive mode select switch to the

ECO position. “ECO” appears in the vehicle

information display for 2 seconds and the

ECO drive indicator light illuminates on the

instrument panel.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed

within the range of economy drive, the ECO

drive indicator light illuminates in green.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed

above the range of economy drive, the

color of the ECO drive indicator light

changes to orange. For ECO pedal system

equipped models see “ECO pedal system”

later in this section.

The ECO drive indicator light will not

illuminate in the following cases:

. When the selector lever is in the R

(Reverse) position.

. When the vehicle speed is below 3 MPH

(4.8 km/h) or over 90 MPH (144 km/h).

. When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system is operated.

ECO pedal system (if so equipped)

Helps assist the driver to improve fuel

economy by increasing the reaction force

of the accelerator pedal. When the ECO

drive indicator light is blinking or turns

orange, the ECO pedal system increases

the reaction force of the accelerator pedal.

SSD1041

When the ECO drive indicator illuminates in

green, the accelerator reaction force is

normal. When the ECO drive indicator light

is blinking or turns orange, the ECO pedal

system increases the reaction force of the

accelerator pedal.

The ECO pedal system may not vary

accelerator reaction force under the follow-

ing conditions:

. When the selector lever is in the N

(Neutral) or R (Reverse) position.

. When Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) is

being operated.

If the ECO pedal system malfunctions, it

will cancel automatically. The ECO pedal

Starting and driving 5-21

5-22 Starting and driving

system will not vary the reaction force of

the accelerator pedal.

When the drive mode select switch is

rotated from the ECO mode to another

mode (STANDARD, SPORT or SNOW) while

the ECO pedal system is operating, the ECO

pedal system continues to operate until

the pedal is released.

If the accelerator pedal is depressed

quickly, the ECO pedal system will not

increase the reaction force of the accelera-

tion pedal. The ECO pedal system is not

designed to prevent the vehicle from

accelerating.

Adjusting the ECO pedal system reaction

force:

The ECO pedal system reaction force can

be adjusted. The reaction force setting will

be maintained until the setting is changed

even if the engine is turned off.

SSD0939

SSD1001

Setting ECO pedal reaction force:

1. Push the SETTING

button and high-

light the ECO DRIVE key on the display

using the INFINITI controller. Then push

the ENTER

button.

2. Highlight the ECO pedal key and push

the ENTER

button.

SSD1025

3. To set the reaction force of the ECO

pedal system, highlight “Standard” or

“Soft”.

4. To turn off the ECO pedal system,

highlight the OFF key, select ON and

push the ENTER

button. When the

ECO pedal system is tuned off, the

accelerator will operate normally.

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-

tem/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) sys-

tem will operate when the vehicle is driven

at speeds of approximately 45 MPH (70

km/h) and above, and when it is traveling

close to either the left or the right of a

traveling lane.

Each system functions as follows:

. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system

— warns the driver by a warning light

and chime that the vehicle is beginning

to leave the driving lane.

. Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system

— warns the driver by a warning light

and chime, and helps assist the driver

to return the vehicle to the center

direction of the traveling lane by

applying brake control to the left or

right wheels individually (for a short

period of time).

SSD0937

SSD0672

Lane departure warning light (orange)

Starting and driving 5-23

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM/LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION

(LDP) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-24 Starting and driving

The LDW and LDP systems monitor the lane

markers on the traveling lane using the

camera unit

located above the inside

mirror. When the camera unit detects that

the vehicle is traveling close to either the

left or the right of the traveling lane, the

lane departure warning light on the instru-

ment panel blinks in orange and a warning

chime sounds. When the LDP system is on,

it will automatically apply the brakes for a

short period of time, using the function of

the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW)

SYSTEM

Precautions on LDW system

WARNING

. This system is only a warning device to

inform the driver of a potential unin-

tended lane departure. It will not steer

the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It

is the driver’s responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in

the traveling lane, and be in control of

the vehicle at all times.

. The system will not operate at speeds

below approximately 45 MPH or if it

cannot detect lane markers.

. If the LDW system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically, and the lane de-

parture warning light (orange) will illu-

minate.

. If the lane departure warning light

(orange) illuminates, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle.

Turn the engine off and restart the

engine. If the lane departure warning

light (orange) continues to illuminate,

have the system checked by an INFINITI

retailer.

. Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

The system may not function properly

under the following conditions:

. On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane markers

that are faded or not painted clearly;

yellow painted lane markers; non-stan-

dard lane markers; or lane markers

covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

. On roads where the discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

. On roads where there are sharp curves.

. On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as shadows,

snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines

remaining after road repairs. (The LDW

system could detect these items as

lane markers.)

. On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

. When the vehicle’s traveling direction

does not align with the lane marker.

. When traveling close to the vehicle in

front of you, which obstructs the lane

camera unit detection range.

. When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the

windshield in front of the lane camera

unit.

. When the headlights are not bright due

to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not

adjusted properly.

. When strong light enters the lane

camera unit. (For example, the light

directly shines on the front of the

vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

. When a sudden change in brightness

occurs. (For example, when the vehicle

enters or exits a tunnel or under a

bridge.)

SSD0672

Lane departure warning light (orange)

LDW system operation

The LDW system provides a lane departure

warning function when the vehicle is driven

at speeds of approximately 45 MPH (70

km/h) and above. When the vehicle

approaches either the left or the right side

of the traveling lane, a warning chime will

sound and the lane departure warning light

(orange) on the instrument panel will blink

to alert the driver.

The warning function will stop when the

vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

The LDW system is not designed to warn

under the following conditions.

. When you operate the lane change

signal and change traveling lanes in

the direction of the signal. (The LDW

system will become operable again

approximately 2 seconds after the lane

change signal is turned off.)

. When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).

. When the Blind Spot Intervention (BSI)

system activates an audible warning or

brake control.

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions are

satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

SIC4335

Warning systems switch

The warning systems switch is used to turn

on and off the LDW system when it is

activated using the settings menu on the

center display. See “How to enable/disable

the LDW system using the settings menu”

later in this section.

When the warning systems switch is turned

off, the indicator

on the switch is off.

The indicator will also be off if the LDW, the

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and the Forward

Collision Warning (FCW) systems are deac-

tivated.

For the BSW and FCW systems, see “Blind

Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind Spot

Starting and driving 5-25

5-26 Starting and driving

Intervention

(BSI) system” later in this

section and “Forward Collision Warning

(FCW) system” later in this section.

SSD0939

With navigation system

SSD1001

How to enable/disable the LDW

system using the settings menu

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the LDW system.

1. Push the SETTING

button and high-

light the “Driver Assistance” key on the

display using the INFINITI controller.

Then push the ENTER

button.

2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warn-

ings” key, and push the ENTER

button.

JVS0080X

3. Highlight the “Lane Departure Warning”

key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (dis-

abled) and push the ENTER

button.

Temporary disabled status at high

temperature

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 1048F (408C) and then

started, the LDW system may be deacti-

vated automatically. The lane departure

warning light (orange) will flash.

When the interior temperature is reduced,

the LDW system will resume operating

automatically and the lane departure

warning light (orange) will stop flashing.

LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION

(LDP) SYSTEM

Precautions on LDP system

WARNING

. The LDP system will not steer the vehicle

or prevent loss of control. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling

lane, and be in control of vehicle at all

times.

. The LDP system is primarily intended for

use on well-developed freeways or high-

ways. It may not detect the lane markers

in certain roads, weather or driving

conditions.

. Using the LDP system under some

conditions of road, lane marker or

weather, or when you change lanes

without using the lane change signal

could lead to an unexpected system

operation. In such conditions, you need

to correct the vehicle’s direction with

your steering operation to avoid acci-

dents.

. When the LDP system is operating, avoid

excessive or sudden steering maneu-

vers. Otherwise, you could lose control

of the vehicle.

. The LDP system will not operate at

speeds below approximately 45 MPH

(70 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane

markers.

. The LDP system may not function

properly under the following conditions,

and do not use the LDP system:

—

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

wind, etc.).

—

When driving on slippery roads,

such as on ice or snow, etc.

—

When driving on winding or uneven

roads.

—

When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

—

When driving in a makeshift lane.

—

When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

—

When driving with a tire that is not

within normal tire conditions (for

example, tire wear, low tire pressure,

installation of spare tire, tire chains,

Starting and driving 5-27

5-28 Starting and driving

non-standard wheels).

—

When the vehicle is equipped with

nonoriginal brake parts or suspen-

sion parts.

. If the LDP system malfunctions, it will

cancel automatically. The lane departure

warning light (orange) on the instrument

panel will illuminate.

. If the lane departure warning light

(orange) illuminates, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle.

Turn the engine off and restart the

engine. If the warning light (orange)

continues to illuminate, have the LDP

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

. Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

The functions of the LDP system (warning

and brake control assist) may or may not

operate properly under the following con-

ditions:

. On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane markers

that are faded or not painted clearly;

yellow painted lane markers; non-stan-

dard lane markers; lane markers cov-

ered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

. On roads where discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

. On roads where there are sharp curves.

. On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as shadows,

snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines

remaining after road repairs. (The LDP

system could detect these items as

lane markers.)

. On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

. When the vehicle’s traveling direction

does not align with the lane marker.

. When traveling close to the vehicle in

front of you, which obstructs the lane

camera unit detection range.

. When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the

windshield in front of the lane camera

unit.

. When the headlights are not bright due

to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not

adjusted properly.

. When strong light enters the lane

camera unit. (For example, the light

directly shines on the front of the

vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

. When a sudden change in brightness

occurs. (For example, when the vehicle

enters or exits a tunnel or under a

bridge.)

While the LDP system is operating, you

may hear a sound of brake operation. This

is normal and indicates that the LDP

system is operating properly.

SSD0672

LDP ON indicator light (green)/ Warning

light (orange)

LDP system operation

The LDP system provides a lane departure

warning and brake control assistance when

the vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-

mately 45 MPH (70 km/h) and above.

When the vehicle approaches either the left

or the right side of the traveling lane, a

warning chime will sound and the lane

departure warning light (orange) on the

instrument panel will blink to alert the

driver. Then, the LDP system will automa-

tically apply the brakes for a short period

of time to help assist the driver to return

the vehicle to the center of the traveling

lane.

The warning and assist functions will stop

when the vehicle returns to a position

inside of the lane marker.

SSD0938

Dynamic driver assistance switch

The LDP system turns on when the dynamic

driver assistance switch on the steering

wheel is pushed when the “Lane Departure

Prevention” is enabled in the settings

menu on the center display. The LDP ON

indicator light (green) on the instrument

panel illuminates when the LDP system is

turned on.

Starting and driving 5-29

5-30 Starting and driving

SSD0939

With navigation system

SSD1001

How to enable/disable the LDP

system using the settings menu

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the LDP system.

1. Push the SETTING

button and high-

light the “Driver Assistance” key on the

display using the INFINITI controller.

Then push the ENTER

button.

2. Highlight the “Dynamic Assistance Set-

tings” key, and push the ENTER

button.

SSD1002

3. Highlight the “Lane Departure Preven-

tion” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF

(disabled) and push the ENTER

button.

For the BSI and DCA systems, see“Blind

Spot Warning (BSW) system/Blind Spot

Intervention

(BSI) system” later in this

section and “Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system” later in this section.

Automatic deactivation

Condition A:

The warning and assist functions of the

LDP system are not designed to work under

the following conditions:

. When you operate the lane change

signal and change the traveling lanes

in the direction of the signal. (The LDP

system will be deactivated for approxi-

mately 2 seconds after the lane change

signal is turned off.)

. When the vehicle speed lowers to less

than approximately 45 MPH (70 km/h).

. When the BSI system activates an

audible warning or brake control.

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions are

satisfied, the warning and assist functions

will resume.

Condition B:

The assist function of the LDP system is not

designed to work under the following

conditions (warning is still functional):

. When the brake pedal is depressed.

. When the steering wheel is turned as

far as necessary for the vehicle to

change lanes.

. When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed while the brake control assist

is provided.

. When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

approach warning occurs.

. When the hazard warning flashers are

operated.

. When driving on a curve at high speed.

After the above conditions have finished

and the necessary operating conditions are

satisfied, the LDP brake control assist

function will resume.

Condition C:

Under the following conditions, a beep will

sound and the LDP system will be canceled

automatically. The LDP ON indicator light

will blink in green, and the LDP system

cannot be activated:

. When the VDC system (except TCS

function) or ABS operates.

. When the VDC system is turned off.

. When the drive mode select switch is

turned to the SNOW mode.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

turn off the LDP system. Push the dynamic

driver assistance switch again to turn the

LDP system back on.

Temporary disabled status at high tem-

perature:

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight

under high temperature conditions (over

approximately 1048F (408C)) and then the

LDP system is turned on, the LDP system

may be deactivated automatically. The lane

departure warning light (orange) will blink.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

turn off the LDP system. Push the dynamic

driver assistance switch again to turn the

LDP system back on.

Starting and driving 5-31

5-32 Starting and driving

SSD0453

LANE CAMERA UNIT MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit

for the LDW/LDP

system is located above the inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the LDW/

LDP systems and prevent a system mal-

function, be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the windshield clean.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the camera unit.

. Do not place reflective materials, such

as white paper or a mirror, on the

instrument panel. The reflection of

sunlight may adversely affect the cam-

era unit’s capability of detecting the

lane markers.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the camera unit. Do not touch

the camera lens or remove the screw

located on the camera unit. If the

camera unit is damaged due to an

accident, contact an INFINITI retailer.

The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Blind

Spot Intervention (BSI) systems can help

alert the driver of other vehicles in

adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) SYSTEM/

BLIND SPOT INTERVENTION

(BSI)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

SSD1027

The BSW system uses radar sensors

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles beside your vehicle in an

adjacent lane. In addition to the radar

sensors, the BSI system uses a camera

installed behind the windshield to monitor

the lane markers of your traveling lane.

SSD1030

Detection zone

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the

detection zone shown as illustrated. This

detection zone starts from the outside

mirror of your vehicle and extends approxi-

mately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear

bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m)

sideways.

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 MPH (32 km/h). If the radar

sensors detects vehicles in the detection

zone, the BSW/BSI indicator light illumi-

nates. If the driver then activates the turn

signal, a chime will sound twice and the

BSW/BSI indicator light will flash.

The BSI system operates above approxi-

mately 37 MPH (60 km/h). If the system

detects a vehicle in the detection zone and

your vehicle is approaching the lane

marker, the BSI system provides an audi-

ble warning (three times), flashes the

BSW/BSI indicator light and slightly ap-

plies the brakes for a short period of time

on one side to help return the vehicle back

to the traveling lane. The BSI system

provides an audible warning and turns on

or flashes the BSW/BSI indicator light even

if the BSW system is off.

WARNING

. The BSW and BSI systems are not a

replacement for proper driving procedure

and are not designed to prevent contact

with vehicles or objects. When changing

lanes, always use the side and rear

mirrors and turn and look in the direc-

tion you will move to ensure it is safe to

change lanes. Never rely solely on the

BSW or BSI system.

. Using the BSI system under some road,

lane marker or weather conditions could

lead to improper system operation. Al-

ways rely on your own steering and

Starting and driving 5-33

5-34 Starting and driving

braking operation to avoid accidents.

. The BSW and BSI systems may not

provide a warning or brake control for

vehicles that pass through the detection

zone quickly.

SSD1028

BSW/BSI indicator light

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the

detection zone, the BSW/BSI indicator

light located inside the outside mirrors

illuminates. If the turn signal is then

activated, the BSW/BSI indicator light

flashes and a chime sounds twice. The

indicator light continues to flash until the

detected vehicles leave the detection zone.

The BSW/BSI indicator lights illuminate for

a few seconds when the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position.

The brightness of the BSW/BSI indicator

lights is adjusted automatically depending

on the brightness of the ambient light.

A chime sounds if the radar sensors have

already detected vehicles when the driver

activates the turn signal. If a vehicle comes

into the detection zone after the driver

activates the turn signal, then only the

BSW/BSI indicator light flashes and no

chime sounds. (See “BSW/BSI driving

situations” later in this section.)

SIC4335

Warning systems switch

The warning systems switch is used to turn

on and off the BSW system when it is

activated using the settings menu on the

center display. See “How to enable/disable

the BSW system using the settings menu”

later in this section.

When the warning systems switch is turned

off, the indicator

on the switch is off.

The indicator will also be off if the BSW, the

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and the

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) systems

are deactivated.

For the LDW and FCW systems, see “Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier

in this section and “Forward Collision

Warning (FCW) system” later in this sec-

tion.

SSD0939

With navigation system

SSD1001

Starting and driving 5-35

5-36 Starting and driving

How to enable/disable the BSW

system using the settings menu

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSW system.

1. Push the SETTING

button and high-

light the “Driver Assistance” key on the

display using the INFINITI controller.

Then push the ENTER

button.

2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warn-

ings” key, and push the ENTER

button.

JVS0080X

3. Highlight the “Blind Spot Warning” key,

select ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled)

and push the ENTER

button.

SSD1028

BSW/BSI indicator light

SSD1029

BSI ON indicator light (green)

SSD0938

Dynamic driver assistance switch

BSI SYSTEM OPERATION

If the radar sensors detect vehicles in the

detection zone, the BSW/BSI indicator

light located inside the outside mirrors

illuminates. If your vehicle is approaching

a lane marker, the BSW/BSI indicator light

flashes and an audible warning will sound

three times. Then the system applies the

brakes on one side of the vehicle for a

short period of time to help return the

vehicle back to the center of the lane. BSI

operates regardless of turn signal usage.

NOTE:

. Warning and brake control will only be

activated if the BSW/BSI indicator light

is already illuminated when your vehi-

cle approaches a lane marker. If

another vehicle comes into the detec-

tion zone after your vehicle has

crossed a lane marker, no warning or

brake control will be activated. (See

“BSW/BSI driving situations” later in

this section.)

. The BSI system is typically activated

earlier than the Lane Departure Pre-

vention (LDP) system when your vehi-

cle is approaching a lane marker.

The BSI system turns on when the dynamic

driver assistance switch on the steering

wheel is pushed when the “Blind Spot

Intervention” is enabled in the settings

menu on the center display. The BSI ON

indicator light (green) on the instrument

panel illuminates when the BSI system is

turned on.

The BSI system provides an audible warn-

ing and flashes the indicator light when

BSI is activated even if the BSW system is

off.

SSD0939

With navigation system

SSD1001

Starting and driving 5-37

5-38 Starting and driving

How to enable/disable the BSI

system using the settings menu

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSI system.

1. Push the SETTING

button and high-

light the “Driver Assistance” key on the

display using the INFINITI controller.

Then push the ENTER

button.

2. Highlight the “Dynamic Assistance Set-

tings” key, and push the ENTER

button.

SSD1002

3. Highlight the “Blind Spot Intervention”

key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (dis-

abled) and push the ENTER

button.

For the LDP and DCA systems, see “Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier

in this section and “Distance Control Assist

(DCA) system” later in this section.

WARNING

. Do not use the BSI system under the

following conditions because the system

may not function properly.

—

During bad weather (for example,

rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.)

—

When driving on slippery roads,

such as on ice or snow, etc.

—

When driving on winding or uneven

roads.

—

When there is a lane closure due to

road repairs.

—

When driving in a makeshift lane.

—

When driving on roads where the

lane width is too narrow.

—

When driving with a tire that is not

within normal tire conditions (for

example, tire wear, low tire pressure,

installation of spare tire, tire chains,

non-standard wheels).

—

When the vehicle is equipped with

non-original brake parts or suspen-

sion parts.

. Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound, and

it may not be heard.

. The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSI/BSW when

certain objects are present such as:

— Pedestrians, bicycles, animals

— Several types of vehicles such as

motorcycles

— Oncoming vehicles

— Vehicles remaining in the detection

zone when you accelerate from a

stop

(See “BSW/BSI driving situations”

later in this section)

— A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle

(See “BSW/BSI driving situations”

later in this section)

— A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

(See “BSW/BSI driving situations”

later in this section)

— A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

(See “BSW/BSI driving situations”

later in this section)

. Severe weather or road spray condi-

tions may reduce the ability of the

radar to detect other vehicles.

. The radar sensors detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane, the

radar sensors may not detect vehicles

in an adjacent lane. When driving in a

narrow lane, the radar sensors may

detect vehicles driving two lanes away.

. The radar sensors are designed to

ignore most stationary objects, how-

ever objects such as guardrails, walls,

foliage and parked vehicles may occa-

sionally be detected. This is a normal

operating condition.

. The camera may not detect lane mar-

kers in the following situations and the

BSI system may not operate properly.

— On roads where there are multiple

parallel lane markers; lane markers

that are faded or not painted clearly;

yellow painted lane markers; non-

standard lane markers; lane mar-

kers covered with water, dirt, snow,

etc.

— On roads where discontinued lane

markers are still detectable.

— On roads where there are sharp

curves.

— On roads where there are sharply

contrasting objects, such as sha-

dows, snow, water, wheel ruts,

seams or lines remaining after road

repairs.

— On roads where the traveling lane

merges or separates.

— When the vehicle’s traveling direc-

tion does not align with the lane

markers.

— When traveling close to the vehicle

in front of you, which obstructs the

lane camera unit detection range.

— When rain, snow or dirt adheres to

the windshield in front of a lane

camera unit.

— When the headlights are not bright

due

to dirt on the lens or if aiming is

not adjusted properly.

— When strong light enters a lane

camera unit. (For example, light

directly shines on the front of the

vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

— When a sudden change in bright-

ness occurs. (For example, when the

vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or

under a bridge.)

Starting and driving 5-39

5-40 Starting and driving

SSD1026

BSW/BSI DRIVING SITUATIONS

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

The BSW/BSI indicator light illuminates if a

vehicle enters the detection zone from

behind in an adjacent lane.

However, if the overtaking vehicle is

traveling much faster than your vehicle,

the indicator light may not illuminate

before the detected vehicle is beside your

vehicle. Always use the side and rear

mirrors and turn and look in the direction

your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe

to change lanes.

SSD1031

If the driver activates the turn signal, then

the BSW/BSI indicator light flashes and a

chime will sound twice.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection zone,

the BSW/BSI indicator light will flash but

no chime will sound when the other

vehicle is detected.

SSD1044

If the BSI system is on and your vehicle is

approaching a lane marker, the BSW/BSI

indicator light flashes and a chime will

sound three times. Then the BSI system

slightly applies the brakes on one side to

help return the vehicle back to the center of

the driving lane.

SSD1032

NOTE:

If you accelerate from a stop with a vehicle

in the detection zone, the other vehicle

may not be detected.

SSD1033

Overtaking other vehicles

The BSW/BSI indicator light illuminates if

you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle

stays in the detection zone for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

The radar sensors may not detect slower

moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

SSD1034

If the driver activates the turn signal while

another vehicle is in the detection zone,

then the BSW/BSI indicator light flashes

and a chime will sound twice.

Starting and driving 5-41

5-42 Starting and driving

SSD1093

If the BSI system is on and your vehicle

approaches a lane marker while another

vehicle is in the detection zone, the BSW/

BSI indicator light flashes and a chime will

sound three times. Then, the BSI system

slightly applies the brakes on one side to

help return the vehicle back to the center of

the driving lane.

SSD1036

NOTE:

When overtaking several vehicles in a row,

the vehicles after the first vehicle may not

be detected if they are traveling close

together.

SSD1037

Entering from the side

The BSW/BSI indicator light illuminates if a

vehicle enters the detection zone from

either side.

NOTE:

The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle

which is traveling at about the same speed

as your vehicle when it enters the detec-

tion zone.

SSD1038

If the driver activates the turn signal, then

the BSW/BSI indicator light flashes and a

chime will sound twice.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection zone,

the BSW/BSI indicator light will flash but

no chime will sound when another vehicle

is detected.

SSD1094

If the BSI system is on and your vehicle

approaches the lane marker while another

vehicle is in the detection zone, the BSW/

BSI indicator light flashes and a chime will

sound three times. Then, the BSI system

slightly applies the brakes on one side to

help return the vehicle back to the center of

the driving lane.

Starting and driving 5-43

5-44 Starting and driving

SSD1040

NOTE:

. The BSI system will not operate if your

vehicle is on a lane marker when

another vehicle enters the detection

zone. In this case only the BSW system

operates.

. BSI braking will not operate or will stop

operating and only a warning chime

will sound under the following condi-

tions.

— When the brake pedal is depressed.

— When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed while brake control assist

is provided.

— When steering quickly

— When the ICC, DCA, FCW or IBA

warnings sound.

— When the hazard warning flashers

are operated.

— When driving on a curve at a high

speed.

BSW/BSI temporarily not available

. Under the following conditions, the BSI

system will be turned off automatically,

a beep will sound and the BSI ON

indicator light (green) will blink. The

BSW system is still available, but the

BSI system will not be available until

the conditions no longer exist.

— When the VDC system (except TCS

function) or ABS operates.

— When the VDC system is turned off.

— When the drive mode select switch

is turned to the SNOW mode.

Action to take:

Turn off the BSI system and turn it on again

when the above conditions no longer exist.

. Under the following conditions, the

BSW and BSI systems will be turned

off automatically, a beep will sound

and the BSW/BSI system warning light

(orange) will blink. The BSW and BSI

systems are not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

— When the camera detects that the

interior temperature is high (over

approximately 1048F (408C)).

— When radar blockage is detected.

The radar sensors may be blocked by

temporary ambient conditions such as

splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked

condition may also be caused by objects

such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the BSW system will resume automatically.

For the BSI system, turn it off and turn it on

again. If the BSW/BSI warning light (or-

ange) continues to blink even after the BSI

system is turned on again, stop the vehicle

in a safe location and turn the engine off.

Check for and remove objects obscuring

the radar sensors on the rear bumper, and

restart the engine.

If the warning light (orange) continues to

blink, have the BSW/BSI systems checked

by an INFINITI retailer.

BSW/BSI MALFUNCTION

When the BSW/BSI systems malfunction,

they will be turned off automatically, a

beep will sound and the BSW/BSI system

warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the

engine off and restart the engine.

If the warning light (orange) continues to

illuminate, have the BSW/BSI systems

checked by an INFINITI retailer.

SSD1027

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

. The two radar sensor units

for the

BSW and BSI systems are located near

the rear bumper. Always keep the area

near the radar sensors clean. Do not

attach stickers (including transparent

material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area

around the radar sensors. Consult an

INFINITI retailer if the area around the

radar sensors is damaged due to a

collision.

. The BSI system uses the same camera

that is used by the LDW/LDP system

located in front of the inside mirror.

For maintenance of the camera, see “Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier

in this section.

Radio frequency statement

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-310 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Frequency of operation: 24.05GHz —

24.25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m

peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3

The manufacturer is not responsible for

any radio or TV interference caused by

unauthorized modifications to this equip-

ment. Such modifications could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-45

5-46 Starting and driving

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

. If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it will cancel automatically. The

SET indicator on the dot matrix crystal

display will then blink to warn the

driver.

. If the engine coolant temperature be-

comes excessively high, the cruise

control system will be canceled auto-

matically.

. If the SET indicator blinks, turn the

cruise control main switch off and have

the system checked by your INFINITI

retailer.

. The SET indicator may sometimes blink

when the cruise control main switch is

turned ON while pushing the COAST/

SET, ACCELERATE/RESUME or CANCEL

switch. To properly set the cruise

control system, perform the steps

below in the order indicated.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

. when it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

. in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed

. on winding or hilly roads

. on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

. in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

SSD0941

1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch

2. COAST/SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accel-

erator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

MAIN switch on. The CRUISE indicator will

come on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the

CRUISE CONTROL

COAST/SET switch and release it. (The

CRUISE SET indicator will come on in the

instrument panel.) Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main-

tain the set speed.

. To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release

the pedal, the vehicle will return to the

previously set speed.

. The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed on winding or hilly roads. If this

happens, drive without the cruise con-

trol.

To cancel the preset speed, follow any of

these methods:

1. Push the CANCEL button. The SET

indicator will go out.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator

will go out.

3. Move the selector lever to the N

(Neutral) position. The SET indicator

will go out.

4. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the

CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will

go out.

. If you depress the brake pedal while

pushing the ACCELERATE/RESUME or

COAST/SET switch and reset at the

cruising speed, the cruise control will

disengage. Turn the MAIN switch off

once and then turn it on again.

. The cruise control will automatically

cancel if the vehicle slows more than

7 MPH (12 km/h) below the set speed.

. If you move the selector lever to N

(Neutral) position, the cruise control

will be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

. Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

. Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE-

SUME switch. When the vehicle attains

the speed you desire, release the

switch.

. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL-

ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by

about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows down to the desired speed.

. Push, then quickly release the COAST/

SET switch. Each time you do this, the

set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch.

The vehicle will resume the last set

cruising speed when the vehicle speed is

over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-47

5-48 Starting and driving

The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

maintains a selected distance from the

vehicle in front of you within the speed

range of 0 to 90 MPH (0 to 144 km/h) up to

the set speed. The set speed can be

selected by the driver between 20 to 90

MPH (32 to 144 km/h).

The ICC function can be set to one of two

cruise control modes:

. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode:

For maintaining a selected distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you up to the preset speed.

. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode:

For cruising at a preset speed.

WARNING

. Always drive carefully and attentively

when using either cruise control mode.

Read and understand the Owner’s Man-

ual thoroughly before using the cruise

control. To avoid serious injury or death,

do not rely on the system to prevent

accidents or to control the vehicle’s

speed in emergency situations. Do not

use cruise control except in appropriate

road and traffic conditions.

. In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, a warning chime will not

sound to warn you if you are too close to

the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention

to the distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle ahead of you or a collision

could occur.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

SSD0976

1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode

2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode

Push the MAIN switch

to choose the

cruise control mode between the vehicle-

to-vehicle distance control mode

and

the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode

, quickly push and release

the MAIN switch

. To choose the

conventional (fixed speed) cruise control

mode

, push and hold the MAIN switch

for longer than approximately 1.5

seconds.

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot

be changed to the other cruise control

mode. To change the mode, push the MAIN

switch once to turn the system off. Then

push the MAIN switch again to turn the

system back on and select the desired

cruise control mode.

Always confirm the setting in the Intelligent

Cruise Control system display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, see the following description. For

the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-

trol mode, see page “Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control switch” later in this

section.

SELECTING THE VEHICLE-TO-VEHI-

CLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode

, quickly push and release

the MAIN switch

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

system automatically maintains a selected

distance from the vehicle traveling in front

of you according to that vehicle’s speed

(up to the set speed), or at the set speed

when the road ahead is clear.

With ICC, the driver can maintain the same

speed as other vehicles without the con-

stant need to adjust the set speed as you

would with a normal cruise control system.

Starting and driving 5-49

5-50 Starting and driving

SSD0943

PRECAUTIONS ON VEHICLE-TO-VE-

HICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

The system is intended to enhance the

operation of the vehicle when following a

vehicle traveling in the same lane and

direction.

If the distance sensor

detects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will

reduce the vehicle speed so that your

vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the

selected distance.

The system automatically controls the

throttle and applies the brakes (up to

25% of vehicle braking power) if neces-

sary.

The detection range of the sensor is

approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

WARNING

. This system is only an aid to assist the

driver and is not a collision warning or

avoidance device. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

. The system is primarily intended for use

on straight, dry, open roads with light

traffic. It is not advisable to use the

system in city traffic or congested areas.

. This system will not adapt automatically

to road conditions. This system should

be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not

use the system on roads with sharp

curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or

in fog.

The distance sensor will not detect under

most conditions:

. Stationary and slow moving vehicles

. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

. Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

WARNING

. As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the Intelligent Cruise Control

system. This system does not correct

careless, inattentive or absent-minded

driving, or overcome poor visibility in

rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decele-

rate the vehicle speed by depressing the

brake pedal, depending on the distance

to the vehicle ahead and the surround-

ing circumstances in order to maintain a

safe distance between vehicles.

. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill within

the limitations of the system. The

system will cancel once it judges that

the vehicle has come to a standstill and

sound a warning chime. To prevent the

vehicle from moving, the driver must

depress the brake pedal.

. The system may not detect the vehicle in

front of you in certain road or weather

conditions. To avoid accidents, never use

the Intelligent Cruise Control system

under the following conditions:

—

On roads where the traffic is heavy

or there are sharp curves

—

On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

—

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.)

When the windshield wiper is oper-

ated at the high speed (HI) position,

the Intelligent Cruise Control system

is automatically canceled. If the

vehicle is equipped with a rain

sensing auto wiper, the system may

cancel when the wipers are set to the

AUTO position.

—

When strong light (for example, at

sunrise or sunset) is directly shining

on the front of the vehicle

—

When rain, snow or dir t adhere to

the system sensor

—

On steep downhill roads (the vehi-

cle may go beyond the set vehicle

speed and frequent braking may

result in overheating the brakes)

—

On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

—

When traffic conditions make it

difficult to keep a proper distance

between vehicles because of fre-

quent acceleration or deceleration

. In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly come

into the sensor detection zone and cause

automatic braking. You may need to

control the distance from other vehicles

using the accelerator pedal. Always stay

alert and avoid using the ICC system

when it is not recommended in this

section.

SSD0943

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE

CONTROL MODE OPERATION

Always pay attention to the operation of

the vehicle and be ready to manually

control the proper following distance. The

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode of

the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system

may not be able to maintain the selected

distance between vehicles (following dis-

tance) or selected vehicle speed under

some circumstances.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode uses a sensor

located on the

front of the vehicle to detect vehicles

Starting and driving 5-51

5-52 Starting and driving

traveling ahead. The sensor generally

detects the signals returned from the

reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if

the sensor cannot detect the reflector on

the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not

maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which

the sensor cannot detect the signals:

. When the reflector of the vehicle ahead

is positioned high on the vehicle

(trailer, etc.)

. When the reflector on the vehicle ahead

is missing, damaged or covered

. When the reflector of the vehicle ahead

is covered with dirt, snow and road

spray

. When the snow or road spray from

traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s

visibility

. When dense exhaust or other smoke

(black smoke) from vehicles reduces

the sensor’s visibility

. When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of

your vehicle

The ICC system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s operation within

the limitations of the system. When the

sensor is covered with dirt or obstructs, the

system will automatically be canceled. If

the sensor is covered with ice, a transpar-

ent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC

system may not detect them. In these

instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode may not cancel and may not

be able to maintain the selected following

distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to

check and clean the sensor regularly.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode is designed to maintain a selected

distance and reduce the speed to match

the slower vehicle ahead; the system will

decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if

the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill. How-

ever, the ICC system can only apply up to

25% of the vehicles total braking power.

This system should only be used when

traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to

remain fairly constant or when vehicle

speeds change gradually. If a vehicle

moves into the traveling lane ahead or if

a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decele-

rates, the distance between vehicles may

become closer because the ICC system

cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly en-

ough. If this occurs, the ICC system will

sound a warning chime and blink the

system display to notify the driver to take

necessary action.

The system will cancel and a warning

chime will sound if the speed is below

approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h) and a

vehicle is not detected ahead. The system

will also disengage when the vehicle goes

above the maximum set speed.

See “Approach warning” later in this

section.

The following items are controlled in the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

. When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode maintains the speed set

by the driver. The set speed range is

between approximately 20 and 90 MPH

(32 and 144 km/h).

. When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode adjusts the speed to maintain the

distance, selected by driver, from the

vehicle ahead. The adjusting speed

range is up to the set speed. If the

vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill with-

in the limitations of the system. The

system will cancel once it judges a

standstill with a warning chime.

. When the vehicle traveling ahead has

moved out from its lane of travel, the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode accelerates and maintains vehi-

cle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation to

maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or

traffic congestion.

SSD0252

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the

detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance detection mode to maintain the

selected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within

the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may

not be detected in the same lane ahead if

they are traveling offset from the centerline

of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the

lane ahead may not be detected until the

vehicle has completely moved into the

lane. If this occurs, the ICC system may

warn you by blinking the system indicator

and sounding the chime. The driver may

have to manually control the proper

distance away from vehicle traveling

ahead.

Starting and driving 5-53

5-54 Starting and driving

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as

winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or

roads which are under construction, the

ICC sensor may detect vehicles in a

different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may

cause the ICC system to decelerate or

accelerate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or traveling position in the lane,

etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the

ICC system may warn you by blinking the

system indicator and sounding the chime

unexpectedly. You will have to manually

control the proper distance away from the

vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0254

When driving on the freeway at a set speed

and approaching a slower traveling vehicle

ahead, the ICC will adjust the speed to

maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the

vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the

freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and

maintain the speed up to the set speed.

Pay attention to the driving operation to

maintain control of the vehicle as it

accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs,

you will have to manually control the

vehicle speed.

SSD0977

Intelligent cruise control switch

The system is operated by a MAIN switch

and four control switches, all mounted on

the steering wheel.

1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

2. COAST/SET switch:

Sets desired cruise speed, reduces

speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed.

4. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following dis-

tance:

Long

Middle

Short

5. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system

SSD0978

Intelligent cruise control system

display and indicators

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in

front of you.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between

vehicles set with the DISTANCE switch.

Starting and driving 5-55

5-56 Starting and driving

4. Indicates your vehicle

5. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is

displayed in km/h.

6. Intelligent Cruise Control system warn-

ing light (orange):

The light comes on if there is a

malfunction in the ICC system.

SSD0979

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, the indicators come on as

illustrated to check for a burned-out bulb,

and it turns off when the engine is started.

SSD0980

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push

and release the MAIN switch

on. The

MAIN switch indicator, set distance indica-

tor and set vehicle speed indicator come

on and in a standby state for setting.

SSD0981

To set cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. (Vehicle

ahead detection indicator, set distance

indicator and set vehicle speed indicator

come on.) Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set

speed.

SSD0982

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed

under the following conditions, the system

cannot be set and the ICC indicators will

blink for approximately 2 seconds:

. When traveling below 20 MPH (32

km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not

detected

. When the selector lever is not in the D

or Manual mode

. When the windshield wipers are operat-

ing at high speed (HI). If the vehicle is

equipped with a rain sensing auto

wiper, the system may cancel when

the wipers are set to the AUTO position.

. When the parking brake is applied

. When the brakes are operated by the

driver

Starting and driving 5-57

5-58 Starting and driving

SSD0983

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed

under the following conditions, the system

cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and the ICC

indicators will blink.

. When the drive mode select switch is

turned to the SNOW mode (To use the

ICC system, turn the drive mode select

switch to a mode other than the SNOW

mode, push the MAIN switch to turn off

the ICC and reset the ICC switch by

pressing the MAIN switch again.)

For details about the INFINITI drive

mode selector, see “INFINITI drive mode

selector” earlier in this section.

. When the VDC system is off (To use the

ICC system, turn on the VDC system.

Push the MAIN switch to turn off the ICC

system and reset the ICC switch by

pushing the MAIN switch again.)

For details about the VDC system, see

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-

tem” later in this section.

. When ABS or VDC (including the trac-

tion control system) is operating

. When driving into a strong light (for

example, sunlight)

. When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no

longer slipping. Push the MAIN switch

to turn off the ICC, and reset the ICC

system by pushing the MAIN switch

again.)

SSD0984

System operation

1. System set display with vehicle ahead

2. System set display without vehicle

ahead

WARNING

Normally when controlling the distance to a

vehicle ahead, this system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle

according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Depress the accelerator to properly accel-

erate your vehicle when acceleration is

required for a lane change. Depress the

brake pedal when deceleration is required to

maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to its sudden braking or if a

vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when

using the ICC system.

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed

based on the road conditions. The ICC

system maintains the set vehicle speed,

similar to standard cruise control, as long

as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead.

The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead:

When a vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead, the ICC system decelerates the

vehicle by controlling the throttle and

applying the brakes to match the speed

of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then

controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the

driver selected distance.

The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

When the brake operates, a noise may be

heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator comes

on. The ICC system will also display the set

speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected:

When a vehicle is no longer detected

ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-

ates your vehicle to resume the previously

set vehicle speed. The ICC system then

maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accel-

eration to the set vehicle speed or any time

Starting and driving 5-59

5-60 Starting and driving

the ICC system is in operation, the system

controls the distance to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under

approximately 15 MPH (24 km/h), the

system will be canceled.

SSD0985

When passing another vehicle, the set

speed indicator will flash when the vehicle

speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle

detect indicator will turn off when the area

ahead of the vehicle is open. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to

the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in

the ICC system, you can depress the

accelerator pedal when it is necessary to

accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle

speed

To cancel the preset speed, use any of

these methods:

. Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

. Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the MAIN

switch indicator and set vehicle speed

indicator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

. Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

. Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE-

SUME switch. The set vehicle speed

will increase by approximately 5 MPH

(5 km/h for Canada).

. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL-

ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by

approximately 1 MPH (1 km/h for

Canada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

The set vehicle speed will decrease by

approximately 5 MPH (5 km/h for

Canada).

. Push, then quickly release the COAST/

SET switch. Each time you do this, the

set speed will decrease by approxi-

mately 1 MPH (1 km/h for Canada).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch.

The vehicle will resume the last set

cruising speed when the vehicle speed is

over 20 MPH (32 km/h).

SSD0986

How to change the set distance to

the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time depending on the

traffic conditions.

Each time the DISTANCE switch

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again

in that sequence.

Starting and driving 5-61

5-62 Starting and driving

JVS0082M

. The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle speed.

The higher the vehicle speed, the

longer the distance.

. If the engine is stopped, the set

distance becomes “long”. (Each time

the engine is started, the initial setting

becomes “long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that

vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the

system warns the driver with the chime

and ICC system display. Decelerate by

depressing the brake pedal to maintain a

safe vehicle distance if:

. The chime sounds.

. The vehicle ahead detection and set

distance indicator blink.

The warning chime may not sound in some

cases when there is a short distance

between vehicles. Some examples are:

. When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing

. When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between vehi-

cles is increasing

. When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle

The warning chime will not sound when:

. Your vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.

. The accelerator pedal is depressed,

overriding the system.

SSD0284A

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when

the ICC sensor detects some reflectors

which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes

or on the side of the road. This may cause

the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate

the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect

these reflectors when the vehicle is driven

on winding roads, hilly roads or when

entering or exiting a curve. The ICC sensor

may also detect reflectors on narrow roads

or in road construction zones. In these

cases you will have to manually control

the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or

driving position in the lane) or traffic or

vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle

is being driven with some damage).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following con-

ditions and the control is automatically

canceled.

. When the vehicle ahead is not detected

and your vehicle is traveling below the

speed of 15 MPH (24 km/h)

. When the system judges the vehicle is

at standstill

. When the selector lever is not in the D

or Manual mode

. When the windshield wipers are operat-

ing at high speed (HI). If the vehicle is

equipped with a rain sensing auto-

wiper, the system may cancel when the

wipers are set to the AUTO position.

. When the parking brake is applied

. When the drive mode select switch is

turned to the SNOW mode

. When the VDC system is turned off

. When ABS or VDC (including the trac-

tion control system) operates

. When driving into a strong light (for

example, sunlight)

. When distance measurement becomes

impaired due to adhesion of dirt or

obstruction to the sensor

. When a wheel slips

Starting and driving 5-63

5-64 Starting and driving

SSD0988

Warning light and display

Condition A:

Under the following conditions, the Intelli-

gent Cruise Control system is automatically

canceled. The chime will sound and the

system will not be able to be set.

. When the VDC is turned off

. When the ABS or VDC (including the

traction control system) operates

. When a tire slips

. When the drive mode select switch is

turned to the SNOW mode

. When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is

directly shining on the front of the

vehicle

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off using

the Intelligent Cruise Control MAIN Switch.

Turn the ICC system back on to use the

system.

SSD0989

Condition B:

When the sensor window is dirty, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

ICC system is automatically canceled.

The chime sounds and the ICC system

warning light (orange) will come on and the

“CLEAN SENSOR” indicator will appear.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off.

Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth

and then perform the settings again.

SSD0979

Condition C:

When the ICC system is not operating

properly, the chime sounds and the ICC

system warning light (orange) will come

on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and set

the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the

ICC system is malfunctioning. Although

the vehicle is still driveable under normal

conditions, have the vehicle checked at an

INFINITI retailer.

SSD0943

Sensor maintenance

The sensor for the ICC system

is located

below the front bumper.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe

with a soft cloth carefully so as not to

damage the sensor.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor. Do not touch or

remove the screw located on the

sensor. Doing so could cause failure

or malfunction. If the sensor is da-

maged due to an accident, contact an

Starting and driving 5-65

5-66 Starting and driving

INFINITI retailer.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the sensor. This could

cause failure or malfunction.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed)

CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 90 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accel-

erator pedal.

WARNING

. In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode, a warning chime does not

sound to warn you if you are too close to

the vehicle ahead, as neither the pre-

sence of the vehicle ahead nor the

vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

. Pay special attention to the distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

ahead of you or a collision could occur.

. Always confirm the setting in the In-

telligent Cruise Control system display.

. Do not use the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode when driving

under the following conditions:

—

when it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

—

in heavy traffic or in traffic that

varies in speed

—

on winding or hilly roads

—

on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

—

in very windy areas

. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

SSD0990

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control switch

1. ACCELERATE/RESUME switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed

incrementally.

2. COAST/SET switch:

Sets the desired cruise speed, reduces

speed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing

the set speed.

4. MAIN switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

SSD0991

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode display and indica-

tors

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Cruise set switch indicator:

Displays while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode of the ICC

system.

3. Cruise system warning light:

Comes on if there is a malfunction in

the cruise control system.

SSD0992

Operating conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, push and hold the

MAIN switch

for longer than about 1.5

seconds.

When pushing the MAIN switch on, the

Intelligent Cruise Control system display

and the CRUISE indicator are displayed on

the dot matrix crystal display. After you

hold the MAIN switch on for longer than

about 1.5 seconds, the Intelligent Cruise

Control system display goes out. The

CRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now

Starting and driving 5-67

5-68 Starting and driving

set your desired cruising speed. Pushing

the MAIN switch again will turn the system

completely off.

When the Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system is on, the conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode cannot be

turned on even though the MAIN switch is

pushed and held.

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, turn off the DCA

system. See “Distance Control Assist

(DCA) system” later in this section.

When the ignition switch is pushed to the

OFF position, the system is also automati-

cally turned off. To use the Intelligent

Cruise Control again, quickly push and

release the MAIN switch (vehicle-to-vehicle

distance control mode) or push and hold it

(conventional cruise control mode) again to

turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise con-

trol, make sure to turn the MAIN switch off

when not using the Intelligent Cruise Con-

trol system.

SSD0993

To set cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET

indicator will come on in the display.) Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your

vehicle will maintain the set speed.

. To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release

the pedal, the vehicle will return to the

previously set speed.

. The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, manually main-

tain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the

following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL button. The SET

indicator will go out.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator

will go out.

3. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the

CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will

go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

2. Push and hold the ACCELERATE/RE-

SUME set switch. When the vehicle

attains the speed you desire, release

the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL-

ERATE/RESUME switch. Each time you

do this, the set speed will increase by

about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the COAST/

SET switch. Each time you do this, the

set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCELERATE/RESUME switch.

The vehicle will resume the last set

cruising speed when the vehicle speed is

over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following con-

ditions and the control is automatically

canceled.

. When the vehicle slows down more

than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set

speed

. When the selector lever is not in the D

(Drive) or manual shift mode

. When the parking brake is applied.

. When the VDC operates (including the

traction control system)

. When a tire slips

SSD0979

Warning light

When the system is not operating properly,

the chime sounds and the system warning

light (orange) will come on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and then

perform the setting again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicator

stays on, it may indicate that the system is

malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is

still driveable under normal conditions,

have the vehicle checked at an INFINITI

retailer.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (for Intelligent

Cruise Control system equipped

models)

The ICC system with the preview function

identifies the need to apply emergency

braking by sensing the vehicle ahead in

the same lane and the distance to the

vehicle ahead and relative speed from it, it

applies the brake pre-pressure before the

driver depresses the brake pedal and helps

improve brake response by reducing pedal

free play.

For more details, see “Brake assist” later in

this section.

Starting and driving 5-69

5-70 Starting and driving

The Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

brakes and moves the accelerator pedal

upward according to the distance from and

the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to

help assist the driver to maintain a

following distance.

WARNING

. Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the Distance Control Assist

system. Read and understand the Own-

er’s Manual thoroughly before using the

DCA system. To avoid serious injury or

death, do not rely on the system to

prevent accidents or to control the

vehicle’s speed in emergency situations.

Do not use the Distance Control Assist

system except in appropriate road and

traffic conditions.

. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill within

the limitations of the system. The

system will cancel once it judges that

the vehicle has come to a standstill with

a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle

from moving, the driver must depress

the brake pedal.

. The DCA system will not apply brake

control while the driver’s foot is on the

accelerator pedal.

SSD0943

PRECAUTIONS ON DISTANCE CON-

TROL ASSIST SYSTEM

The system is intended to assist the driver

to keep a following distance from the

vehicle ahead traveling in the same lane

and direction.

If the distance sensor

detects a slower

moving vehicle ahead, the system will

reduce the vehicle speed to help assist

the driver to maintain a following distance.

The system automatically controls the

throttle and applies the brakes (up to

25% of vehicle braking power) if neces-

sary.

DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

The detection range of the sensor is

approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

WARNING

. This system is only an aid to assist the

driver and is not a collision warning or

avoidance device. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

. This system will not adapt automatically

to road conditions. Do not use the

system on roads with sharp curves, or

on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

The distance sensor will not detect the

following objects:

. Stationary and slow moving vehicles

. Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

. Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

. Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

WARNING

. As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the Distance Control Assist

system. This system does not correct

careless, inattentive or absent-minded

driving, or overcome poor visibility in

rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decele-

rate the vehicle speed by depressing the

brake pedal, depending on the distance

to the vehicle ahead and the surround-

ing circumstances in order to maintain a

safe distance between vehicles.

. The system may not detect the vehicle in

front of you in certain road or weather

conditions. To avoid accidents, never use

the Distance Control Assist system

under the following conditions:

—

On roads with sharp curves

—

On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

—

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.)

—

When strong light (for example, at

sunrise or sunset) is directly shining

on the front of the vehicle

—

When rain, snow or dir t adhere to

the system sensor

—

On steep downhill roads (frequent

braking may result in overheating

the brakes)

—

On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

. In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly come

into the sensor detection zone and cause

automatic braking. You may need to

control the distance from other vehicles

using the accelerator pedal. Always stay

alert and avoid using the DCA system

when it is not recommended in this

section.

Starting and driving 5-71

5-72 Starting and driving

SSD0943

DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST OP-

ERATION

Always pay attention to the operation of

the vehicle and be ready to manually

decelerate to maintain the proper following

distance. The Distance Control Assist (DCA)

system may not be able to decelerate the

vehicle under some circumstances.

The DCA system uses a sensor

located

on the front of the vehicle to detect

vehicles traveling ahead. The sensor gen-

erally detects the signals returned from the

reflectors on a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if

the sensor cannot detect the reflector on

the vehicle ahead, the DCA system may not

operate.

The following are some conditions in which

the sensor cannot detect the signals:

. When the reflector of the vehicle ahead

is positioned high on the vehicle

(trailer, etc.)

. When the reflector on the vehicle ahead

is missing, damaged or covered

. When the reflector of the vehicle ahead

is covered with dirt, snow and road

spray

. When the snow or road spray from

traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s

visibility

. When dense exhaust or other smoke

(black smoke) from vehicles reduces

the sensor’s visibility

. When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the luggage

room of your vehicle

The DCA system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s operation. When

the sensor is covered with dirt or is

obstructed, the system will automatically

be canceled. If the sensor is covered with

ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag,

etc., the DCA system may not detect them.

In these instances, the Distance Control

Assist (DCA) system may not be able to

decelerate the vehicle properly. Be sure to

check and clean the sensor regularly.

The DCA system is designed to help assist

the driver to maintain a following distance

from the vehicle ahead. The system will

decelerate as necessary and if the vehicle

ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. However, the

DCA system can only apply up to 25% of

the vehicles total braking power. If a

vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead

or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly

decelerates, the distance between vehicles

may become closer because the DCA

system cannot decelerate the vehicle

quickly enough. If this occurs, the DCA

system will sound a warning chime and

blink the system display to notify the driver

to take necessary action.

See “Approach warning” later in this

section.

This system only brakes and moves the

accelerator pedal upward to help assist the

driver to maintain a following distance

from the vehicle ahead. Acceleration

should be operated by the driver.

The DCA system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation to

maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead.

SSD0252

The detection zone of the sensor is limited.

A vehicle ahead must be in the detection

zone for the system to operate.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within

the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may

not be detected in the same lane ahead if

they are traveling offset from the centerline

of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the

lane ahead may not be detected until the

vehicle has completely moved into the

lane. If this occurs, the system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may have

to manually control the proper distance

away from vehicle traveling ahead.

Starting and driving 5-73

5-74 Starting and driving

SSD0253

When driving on some roads, such as

winding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or

roads which are under construction, the

sensor may detect vehicles in a different

lane, or may temporarily not detect a

vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause

the system to work inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be

affected by vehicle operation (steering

maneuver or traveling position in the lane,

etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the

system may warn you by blinking the

system indicator and sounding the chime

unexpectedly. You will have to manually

control the proper distance away from the

vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0994

Distance Control Assist system

display and indicators

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

switch indicator:

Indicates that the dynamic driver assis-

tance switch is ON.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in

front of you.

3. Distance Control Assist system warning

light (orange):

The light comes on if there is a

malfunction in the DCA system.

SSD0995

Operating Distance Control Assist

(DCA) system

The DCA system turns on when the

dynamic driver assistance switch on the

steering wheel is pushed when the “Dis-

tance Control Assist” is enabled in the

settings menu on the center display. The

Distance Control Assist (DCA) system in-

dicator in the dot matrix liquid crystal

display appears when the DCA system is

turned on.

The system will start to operate after the

vehicle speed becomes above approxi-

mately 3 MPH (5 km/h).

WARNING

When the DCA system is not necessary, be

sure to turn off the dynamic driver assis-

tance switch. Using the system when it is

not necessary may result in an accident.

Starting and driving 5-75

5-76 Starting and driving

SSD0939

With navigation system

SSD1001

How to enable/disable the DCA system

using the settings menu:

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the DCA system.

1. Push the SETTING

button and high-

light the “Driver Assistance” key on the

display using the INFINITI controller.

Then push the ENTER

button.

2. Highlight the “Dynamic Assistance Set-

tings” key, and push the ENTER

button.

SSD1002

3. Highlight the “Distance Control Assist”

key, select ON (enabled) or OFF (dis-

abled) and push the ENTER

button.

For the LDP and BSI systems, see “Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier

in this section and “Blind Spot Warning

(BSW) system/Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI) system” earlier in this section.

SSD0996

Under the following conditions, the DCA

system will not operate and the DCA

system switch indicator light will blink:

. When the drive mode select switch is

turned to the SNOW mode (To use the

DCA system, turn the drive mode select

switch to a mode other than the SNOW

mode, then turn on the dynamic driver

assistance switch.)

For details about the INFINITI drive

mode selector, see “INFINITI drive mode

selector” in the “5. Star ting and driv-

ing” section.

. When the VDC system is off (To use the

DCA system, turn on the VDC, then

push the dynamic driver assistance

switch.)

For details about the VDC system, see

“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys-

tem” later in this section.

. When ABS or VDC (including the trac-

tion control system) is operating

. When driving into a strong light (for

example, sunlight)

When the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode is operating, the DCA system

will not operate. (To use the DCA system,

turn the Conventional (fixed speed) cruise

control mode off, then push the dynamic

driver assistance switch.)

For details about the Conventional (fixed

speed) cruise control mode, see “Intelli-

gent Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in

this section.

When the engine is turned off, the DCA

system is automatically turned off.

Starting and driving 5-77

5-78 Starting and driving

SSD0997

System operation

1. System set display with vehicle ahead

2. System set display without vehicle

ahead

WARNING

The Distance Control Assist system auto-

matically decelerates your vehicle to help

assist the driver to maintain a following

distance from the vehicle ahead. Manually

brake when deceleration is required to

maintain a safe distance upon sudden

braking by the vehicle ahead or when a

vehicle suddenly appears in front of you.

Always stay alert when using the DCA

system.

The Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

helps assist the driver to keep a following

distance to the vehicle ahead by braking

and moving the accelerator pedal upward

in the normal driving condition.

When a vehicle is detected ahead:

The vehicle ahead detection indicator

comes on.

When vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead:

. If the driver’s foot is not on the

accelerator pedal, the system activates

the brakes to decelerate smoothly as

necessary. If the vehicle ahead comes

to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a

standstill within the limitations of the

system.

. If the driver’s foot is on the accelerator

pedal, the system moves the accelera-

tor pedal upward to assist the driver to

release the accelerator pedal.

When brake operation by driver is re-

quired:

The system alerts the driver by a warning

chime and blinking the vehicle ahead

detection indicator. If the driver’s foot is

on the accelerator pedal after the warning,

the system moves the accelerator pedal

upward to assist the driver to switch to the

brake pedal.

The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the DCA

system.

When the brake operates, a noise may be

heard. This is not a malfunction.

WARNING

. When the vehicle ahead detection in-

dicator light is not illuminated, system

will not control or warn the driver.

. Depending on the position of the accel-

erator pedal, the system may not be able

to assist the driver to release the

accelerator pedal appropriately.

. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stand-

still, the vehicle decelerates to a stand-

still within the limitations of the system.

The system will release brake control

with a warning chime once it judges the

vehicle is at a standstill. To prevent the

vehicle from moving, the driver must

depress the brake pedal. (The system

will resume control automatically once

the system reaches 3 MPH (5 km/h)).

Overriding the system:

The following driver’s operation overrides

the system operation.

. When the driver depresses the accel-

erator pedal even further while the

system is moving the accelerator pedal

upward, the DCA system control of the

accelerator pedal is canceled.

. When the driver’s foot is on the accel-

erator pedal, the brake control by the

system is not operated.

. When the driver’s foot is on the brake

pedal, neither the brake control nor the

alert by the system operates.

. When the Intelligent Cruise Control

system is set, the DCA system will be

cancelled.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that

vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the

system warns the driver with the chime

and DCA system display. Decelerate by

depressing the brake pedal to maintain a

safe vehicle distance if:

. The chime sounds.

. The vehicle ahead detection indicator

blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some

cases when there is a short distance

between vehicles. Some examples are:

. When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing

. When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between vehi-

cles is increasing

. When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle

The warning chime will not sound when

your vehicle approaches vehicles that are

parked or moving slowly.

Starting and driving 5-79

5-80 Starting and driving

SSD0284A

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when

the sensor detects some reflectors

which are fitted on vehicles in other lanes

or on the side of the road. This may cause

the DCA system to operate inappropriately.

The sensor may detect these reflectors

when the vehicle is driven on winding

roads, hilly roads or when entering or

exiting a curve. The sensor may also detect

reflectors on narrow roads or in road

construction zones. In these cases you

will have to manually control the proper

distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or

driving position in the lane) or traffic or

vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle

is being driven with some damage).

SSD0996

Automatic cancellation

Condition A:

Under the following conditions, the Dis-

tance Control Assist system is automati-

cally canceled. The chime will sound and

the Distance Control Assist (DCA) system

switch indicator light will blink. The system

will not be able to be set.

. When the VDC system is turned off

. When the VDC or ABS (including the

traction control system) operates

. When the drive mode select switch is

turned to the SNOW mode

. When driving into a strong light (for

example, sunlight)

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off with the

dynamic driver assistance switch. Turn the

DCA system back on to use the system.

SSD0998

Condition B:

When the sensor window is dirty, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

DCA system is automatically canceled.

The chime sounds and the system warning

light (orange) will come on and the “CLEAN

SENSOR” indicator will appear.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place, turn the engine off.

Clean the sensor window with a soft cloth

and then perform the settings again.

SSD0999

Condition C:

When the DCA system is not operating

properly, the chime sounds and the system

warning light (“CRUISE” orange) will come

on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, and turn on the DCA

system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the

system is malfunctioning. Although the

vehicle is still driveable under normal

Starting and driving 5-81

5-82 Starting and driving

conditions, have the vehicle checked at an

INFINITI retailer.

Sensor maintenance

How to handle the sensor:

The sensor for the DCA system is common

with Intelligent Cruise Control and is

located below the front bumper.

To handle the sensor, see “Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in this

section.

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) sys-

tem will warn the driver by the vehicle

ahead detection indicator light and chime

when your vehicle is getting close to the

vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

The FCW system will function when your

vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-

mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and above.

SSD0943

SSD0749

Vehicle ahead detection indicator light

FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The FCW system uses the distance sensor

located below the front bumper to

measure the distance to the vehicle ahead.

When the system judges that your vehicle

is getting close to the vehicle ahead in the

travel lane, the vehicle ahead detection

indicator light on the instrument panel

blinks and a warning chime sounds.

PRECAUTIONS ON FCW SYSTEM

WARNING

. The FCW system is intended to warn you

before a collision but will not avoid a

collision. It is the driver’s responsibility

to stay alert, drive safely and be in

control of the vehicle at all times.

. As there is a performance limit, the

system may not provide a warning in

certain conditions.

. The system will not detect the following

objects:

—

Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in

the roadway

—

Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

. The system will not detect another

vehicle under the following conditions:

—

When the sensor gets dirty and it is

impossible to detect the distance

from the vehicle ahead.

—

When driving into a strong light (for

example, sunlight)

. The sensor generally detects the signals

returned from the reflectors on a vehicle

ahead. Therefore, the system may not

function properly under the following

conditions:

—

When the reflectors of the vehicle

ahead are positioned high or close to

each other (including a small vehicle

such as motorcycles).

—

When the sensor gets dirty or it is

impossible to detect the distance

from the vehicle ahead.

—

When the reflectors on the vehicle

ahead are missing, damaged or

covered.

—

When the reflectors of the vehicle

ahead are covered with dirt, snow or

road spray.

—

When visibility is low (such as rain,

fog, snow, etc.).

—

When snow or road spray from

traveling vehicles is splashed.

—

When dense exhaust or other smoke

(black smoke) from vehicles reduces

the visibility of the sensor.

—

When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the

luggage room of your vehicle.

—

When abruptly accelerating or de-

celerating.

—

On a steep downhill slope or on

roads with sharp curves.

—

When there is a highly reflective

object near the vehicle ahead (for

example, being very close to another

vehicle, signboard, etc.)

. Depending on certain road conditions

(curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle

conditions (steering position or vehicle

position), or the preceding vehicle’s

conditions (position in lane, etc.), the

system may not function properly. The

system may detect highly reflective

objects such as reflectors, signs, white

markers, and other stationary objects on

the road or near the traveling lane and

provide unnecessary warning.

Starting and driving 5-83

5-84 Starting and driving

. The system may not function in offset

conditions.

. The system may not function when the

distance to the vehicle ahead is extre-

mely close.

. The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality. If the

sensor is covered with ice, a transparent

or translucent plastic bag, etc., the

system may not detect them. In these

instances the system may not be able to

warn the driver properly. Be sure to

check and clean the sensor regularly.

. Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

. A sudden appearance of a vehicle in

front (for example, it abruptly cuts in)

may not be detected and the system may

not warn the driver soon enough.

. The system will be cancelled automati-

cally with a beep sound and the IBA OFF

indicator light will illuminate under the

following conditions:

—

When the sensor window is dirty

—

When the system malfunctions

SSD1000

If the IBA OFF indicator light

illuminates

with a beep sound, pull off the road to a

safe location, stop the vehicle and turn the

engine off. Check to see if the sensor

window is dirty. If the sensor window is

dirty, clean it with a soft cloth and restart

the engine. If the sensor window is not

dirty, restart the engine. If the IBA OFF

indicator light continues to illuminate even

if the IBA system is turned on with the IBA

OFF switch

, have the system checked

by an INFINITI retailer.

To turn on the IBA system, see “Intelligent

Brake Assist (IBA) system” later in this

section.

SIC4335

Warning systems switch

FCW system operation

The warning systems switch is used to turn

on and off the FCW system when it is

activated using the settings menu on the

center display. See “How to enable/disable

the FCW system using the settings menu”

later in this section.

When the warning systems switch is turned

off, the indicator

on the switch is off.

The indicator will also be off if the FCW, the

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and the

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) systems are

deactivated.

For the LDW and BSW systems, see “Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) system/Lane

Departure Prevention (LDP) system” earlier

in this section and “Blind Spot Warning

(BSW) system/Blind Spot Intervention

(BSI) system” earlier in this section.

SSD0939

With navigation system

SSD1001

How to enable/disable the FCW

system using the settings menu

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the FCW system.

1. Push the SETTING

button and high-

light the “Driver Assistance” key on the

display using the INFINITI controller.

Then push the ENTER

button.

2. Highlight the “Driver Assistance Warn-

ings” key, and push the ENTER

button.

Starting and driving 5-85

5-86 Starting and driving

JVS0080X

3. Highlight the “Forward Collision Warn-

ing” key, select ON (enabled) or OFF

(disabled) and push the ENTER

button.

For the sensor maintenance, see “Intelli-

gent Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in

this section.

The Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) system

warns the driver by a warning light and

chime when there is a risk of a collision

with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane

and the driver must take avoidance action

immediately. The system helps reduce the

rear-end collision speed by applying the

brakes when the system judges that the

collision cannot be prevented.

The IBA system will function when your

vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-

mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) and above, and

when your vehicle is driven at speeds

approximately 10 MPH (15 km/h) faster

than the vehicle ahead.

SSD0943

SSD0749

Vehicle ahead detection indicator light

INTELLIGENT BRAKE ASSIST (IBA) SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

The IBA system uses a distance sensor

located below the front bumper to measure

the distance to the vehicle ahead. When

the system judges that your vehicle is

getting close to the vehicle ahead in the

traveling lane, the vehicle ahead detection

indicator light on the instrument panel

blinks and a warning chime sounds.

The IBA system will be turned on/off by

pushing the IBA OFF switch. The IBA OFF

indicator light display will illuminate when

the system is turned off.

PRECAUTIONS ON IBA SYSTEM

WARNING

. The IBA system is not a collision

avoidance system. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

. As there is a performance limit, the

system may not provide a warning or

braking in certain conditions.

. The system will not detect the following

objects:

—

Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in

the roadway

—

Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

. The system will not detect another

vehicle under the following conditions:

—

When the sensor gets dirty and it is

impossible to detect the distance

from the vehicle ahead.

—

When driving into a strong light (for

example, sunlight)

. The sensor generally detects the signals

returned from the reflectors on a vehicle

ahead. Therefore, the system may not

function properly under the following

conditions:

—

When the reflectors of the vehicle

ahead are positioned high or close to

each other (including a small vehicle

such as motorcycles).

—

When the sensor gets dirty and it is

impossible to detect the distance

from the vehicle ahead.

—

When the reflectors on the vehicle

ahead are missing, damaged or

covered.

—

When the reflectors of the vehicle

ahead are covered with dirt, snow or

road spray.

—

When visibility is low (such as rain,

fog, snow, etc.).

—

When snow or road spray from

traveling vehicles is splashed.

—

When dense exhaust or other smoke

(black smoke) from vehicles reduces

the visibility of the sensor.

—

When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the

luggage room of your vehicle.

—

When abruptly accelerating or de-

celerating.

—

On a steep downhill slope or on

roads with sharp curves.

—

When there is a highly reflective

object near the vehicle ahead (for

example, being very close to another

vehicle, signboard, etc.)

. Depending on certain road conditions

(curved or beginning of a curve), vehicle

conditions (steering position or vehicle

position), or the preceding vehicle’s

conditions (position in lane, etc.), the

system may not function properly. The

system may detect highly reflective

Starting and driving 5-87

5-88 Starting and driving

objects such as reflectors, signs, white

markers, and other stationary objects on

the road or near the traveling lane and

provide unnecessary warning.

. The system may not function in offset

conditions.

. The system may not function when the

distance to the vehicle ahead is extre-

mely close.

SSD0805

Reflectors on the road

WARNING

. The system may detect highly reflective

objects such as reflectors, signs, white

markers and other stationary objects on

the road or near the traveling lane.

In extreme conditions, detection of these

objects may cause the system to func-

tion.

. The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality. If the

sensor is covered with ice, a transparent

or translucent plastic bag, etc., the

system may not detect them. In these

instances the system may not be able to

warn the driver properly. Be sure to

check and clean the sensor regularly.

. Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

. A sudden appearance of a vehicle in

front (for example, it abruptly cuts in)

may not be detected and the system may

not warn the driver soon enough.

. The system will be cancelled automati-

cally with a beep sound and the IBA

warning light will illuminate under the

following conditions:

—

When the sensor window is dirty

—

When the system malfunctions

If the IBA OFF indicator light illuminates

with a beep sound, pull off the road to a

safe location, stop the vehicle and turn the

engine off. Check to see if the sensor

window is dirty. If the sensor window is

dirty, clean it with a soft cloth and restart

the engine. If the sensor window is not

dirty, restart the engine. If the IBA OFF

indicator light continues to illuminate even

if the IBA system is turned on, have the

system checked by an INFINITI retailer.

SSD1000

IBA system operation

The IBA system will function when your

vehicle is driven at speeds of approxi-

mately 10 MPH (15 km/h) or above, and

when the vehicle’s speed is approximately

10 MPH (15 km/h) faster than that of the

vehicle ahead.

To turn the system off/on, push and hold

the IBA OFF switch

for more than 1

second after starting the engine. When the

IBA OFF indicator light

on the instru-

ment panel turns off and the IBA OFF

switch is pushed, the system will turn off

and the IBA OFF indicator light will

illuminate. When the IBA OFF switch is

pushed again, the system will turn on and

the IBA OFF indicator light will turn off.

The IBA system will remain in the last ON

or OFF state it was left in until it is

manually changed by pressing the IBA

OFF switch.

Illumination of the IBA OFF indicator light

without the warning chime sound is an

indication that the IBA system is tempora-

rily unavailable. It will occur under the

following conditions:

. When driving into a strong light (for

example, sunlight)

The IBA OFF indicator light will turn off

when the system returns to its normal

operating conditions.

For the sensor maintenance, see “Intelli-

gent Cruise Control (ICC) system” earlier in

this section.

Starting and driving 5-89

5-90 Starting and driving

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and ensure

the future reliability and economy of your

new vehicle.

Failure to follow these recommendations

may result in shortened engine life and

reduced engine performance.

. Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow. Do not

run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

. Avoid quick starts.

. Avoid hard braking as much as possi-

ble.

. Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Main-

tain cruising speeds with a constant

accelerator position.

. Drive at moderate speeds on the high-

way.

. Avoid unnecessary stopping and brak-

ing. Keep a safe distance behind other

vehicles.

. Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

. Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine

idling.

. Keep your engine tuned up.

. Follow the recommended periodic main-

tenance schedule.

. Keep the tires inflated at the correct

pressure. Improper tire pressure will

increase wear and waste fuel.

. Make sure the front wheels are properly

aligned. Improper alignment will cause

premature tire wear and lower fuel

economy.

. Climate control operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only

when necessary.

. When cruising at highway speeds, it is

more economical to use the air condi-

tioner and leave the windows closed to

reduce drag.

SSD0336

The AWD warning light is located in the

meter.

The AWD warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position. It turns off soon after the engine

is started.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so

equipped)

If any malfunction occurs in the Intelligent

AWD system while the engine is running,

the warning light will come on.

The warning light may blink rapidly (about

twice per second) while trying to free a

stuck vehicle due to high power train oil

temperature. The driving mode may change

to two-wheel drive. If the warning light

blinks rapidly during operation, stop the

vehicle with the engine idling in a safe

place immediately. Then if the light goes

off after a while, you can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters

of front and rear wheels will make the

warning light blink slowly (about once per

two seconds). Pull off the road in a safe

area, and idle the engine. Check that all

tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is

correct and tires are not worn.

If the warning light is blinking after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

. For AWD equipped vehicles, do not

attempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

. Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such

as the dynamometers used by some

states for emissions testing) or similar

equipment even if the other two wheels

are raised off the ground. Make sure that

you inform the test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with AWD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or

personal injury.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the engine on a free

roller when any of the wheels are raised.

. If the warning light comes on while

driving there may be a malfunction in

the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle

speed and have your vehicle checked by

an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible.

. If the warning light remains on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by an INFINITI retailer as soon

as possible.

. The power train may be damaged if you

continue driving with the warning light

blinking.

Starting and driving 5-91

5-92 Starting and driving

SD1006MA

WARNING

. Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite and

cause a fire.

. Never leave the engine running while the

vehicle is unattended.

. Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly

activate switches or controls. Unat-

tended children could become involved

in serious accidents.

. Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be applied and

the transmission placed into P (Park).

Failure to do so could cause the vehicle

to move unexpectedly or roll away and

result in an accident.

. Make sure the automatic transmission

selector lever has been pushed as far

forward as it can go and cannot be

moved without depressing the foot

brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into the street when parked on a

sloping drive way, it is a good practice

to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB:

Turn the wheels toward the side of

the road so the vehicle will move

away from the center of the road if it

moves.

4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

SSD0927

WARNING

. The sonar system is a convenience but it

is not a substitute for proper parking.

Always look around and check that it is

safe to do so before parking. Always

move slowly.

. Read and understand the limitations of

the sonar system as contained in this

section. Inclement weather may affect

the function of the sonar system; this

may include reduced performance or a

false activation.

. This system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

. The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary

objects to help avoid damaging the

vehicle. The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper, and may not

detect objects that are too close to the

bumper or on the ground.

. If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of ob-

stacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible to hear the tone clearly.

The sonar system sounds a tone to warn

the driver of obstacles near the bumper.

When the “Sonar Display” key is ON, the

sonar indicator will also appear in the

center display. (See “Sonar indicator” later

in this section.) The system detects rear

obstacles when the selector lever is in the

“R” (Reverse) position.

The system may not detect objects at

speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h) and may

not detect certain angular or moving

objects.

The sonar system detects obstacles up to

3.9 feet (1.2 m) from the bumper with a

decreased coverage area at the outer

corners of the bumper. Refer to the

illustration for approximate zone coverage

areas. As you move closer to the obstacle,

the rate of the tone increases. When the

obstacle is less than 11.8 in (30 cm) away,

Starting and driving 5-93

SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-94 Starting and driving

the tone will sound continuously.

Keep the corner/center sonar (located on

the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and

large accumulations of dirt (do not clean

the sonar with sharp objects). If the sonar

is covered, it will affect the accuracy of the

sonar system.

The sensitivity level of the corner/center

sonar can be adjusted (higher or lower) in

the SONAR setting display. (See “How to

use SETTING button” in the “Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-

tion systems” for the “Sonar” settings.)

SSD0928

Rear view monitor display

Corner sonar indicator

Center sonar indicator

SONAR INDICATOR

With the “Sonar Display” key ON in the

“Sonar” settings, when the corner/center

sonar detects obstacles near the bumper, a

tone will sound and the sonar indicator will

appear in the center display. When the rear

view monitor is displayed, the sonar

indicator will appear in the upper corner

of the display

The sonar indicators

and

indicate

the position of the object and the distance

to the object with its color and rate of

blinking.

When an object is detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks (the tone

sounds intermittently). When the vehicle

moves closer to the object, the color of the

indicator turns yellow and the rate of

blinking increases (the rate of the tone

increases). When the bumper is very close

to the object, less than 11.8 in (30 cm)

away, the indicator stops blinking and

turns red (the tone sounds continuously).

When the rear view monitor is displayed,

the colors of the sonar indicator and the

distance guide lines in the rear view

indicate different distances to the object.

The sonar indicator can be turned off in the

SONAR setting display. (See “How to use

SETTING button” in the “Monitor, climate,

audio, phone and voice recognition sys-

tems” for the “Sonar” settings.) When the

sonar indicator is off, only a tone sounds

when the sonar detects obstacles.

JVS0122X

SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

The sonar system OFF switch on the

instrument panel allows the driver to turn

the sonar system on and off. To turn the

sonar system on and off, the ignition

switch must be in the “ON” position. The

indicator light

on the switch will

illuminate when the system is turned on.

If the indicator light flashes when the

sonar system is not turned off, it may

indicate a malfunction in the sonar system.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off

while driving, the power assist for the

steering will not work. Steering will be

harder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hy-

draulic pump, driven by the engine, to

assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,

you will still have control of the vehicle.

However, much greater steering effort is

needed, especially in sharp turns and at

low speeds.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,

you will still have braking at two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required to

stop the vehicle and the stopping distance

will be longer.

When the brake pedal is depressed slowly

and firmly, you may hear a clicking noise

and feel a slight pulsation. This is normal

and indicates that the Brake Assist System

is operating.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet.

As a result, your braking distance will be

longer and the vehicle may pull to one side

during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal

to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the

brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the

Starting and driving 5-95

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

5-96 Starting and driving

vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,

in order to assure the best braking

performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual and can be performed by

an INFINITI retailer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will cause overheating

of the brakes, wearing out the brake and

pads faster and reduce gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed

and downshift to a lower gear before going

down a slope or long grade. Overheated

brakes may reduce braking performance

and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

. While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

. If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking force

than a conventional brake booster even

with light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (Intelligent

Cruise Control system equipped

models)

When the Preview Function identifies the

need to apply emergency braking by

sensing a vehicle ahead in the same lane

and the distance and relative speed from

it, it applies the brake pre-pressure before

the driver depresses the brake pedal and

helps improve brake response by reducing

pedal free play.

BRAKE ASSIST

. This system will not operate when the

vehicle is moving at approximately 20

MPH (32 km/h) or less.

. The pre-pressure function ceases when

the following conditions are met:

1) When the driver depresses the

accelerator pedal or the brake

pedal.

2) If the driver does not operate the

accelerator or brake pedal within

approximately 1 second.

SSD0338

. The sensor will not detect:

1) Pedestrians or objects in the road-

way

2) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

3) Motorcycles traveling offset in the

travel lane as illustrated

WARNING

. This system is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

. As there is a performance limit to the

Preview Function, never rely solely on

this system. This system does not

correct careless inattentive or absent-

minded driving, or overcome poor visi-

bility in rain, fog, or other bad weather.

Reduce vehicle speed by depressing the

brake pedal, in order to maintain a safe

distance between vehicles.

. The system may not detect the vehicle in

front of you in certain road or weather

conditions. The Preview Function may

not operate properly under the following

conditions. The vehicle is still driveable

under normal conditions and the Brake

Assist will operate.

—

When rain, snow or dir t adhere to

the system sensor

—

When strong light (for example, at

sunrise or sunset) is directly shining

on the front of the vehicle

—

Winding or hilly roads may cause

the sensor to temporarily not detect

a vehicle in the same lane or may

detect objects or vehicles in other

lanes.

Starting and driving 5-97

5-98 Starting and driving

—

Vehicle position in the lane may

cause the sensor to temporarily not

detect a vehicle in the same lane or

may detect objects or vehicles in

other lanes.

SSD0471

Warning light and display

When the Preview Function is not operating

properly, a chime sounds and the system

warning light (orange) will come on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine and resume driving.

If the indicator stays on, it may indicate

that the Preview Function is malfunction-

ing (the brake is operative). Although the

Vehicle is still driveable under normal

conditions, have the vehicle checked at

an INFINITI retailer.

How to handle the sensor

The sensor for the Preview Function is

common with Intelligent Cruise Control and

is located below the front bumper.

To keep the Preview Function operating

properly, be sure to observe the following:

. Always keep the sensor clean. Wipe

with a soft cloth carefully so as not to

damage the sensor.

. Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor. Do not touch or

remove the screw located on the

sensor. Doing so could cause failure

or malfunction. If the sensor is da-

maged due to an accident, contact an

INFINITI retailer.

. Do not attach a sticker (including

transparent material) or install an

accessory near the sensor. This could

cause failure or malfunction.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a

sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from careless or

dangerous driving techniques. It can

help maintain vehicle control during

braking on slippery surfaces. Remember

that stopping distances on slippery

surfaces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front of

you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible

for safety.

. Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

—

When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

—

When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and

type as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label. See “Tire

and loading information label” in the

“9. Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

—

For detailed information, see

“Wheels and tires” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con-

trols the brakes so the wheels do not lock

during hard braking or when braking on

slippery surfaces. The system detects the

rotation speed at each wheel and varies

the brake fluid pressure to prevent each

wheel from locking and sliding. By pre-

venting each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

ABS will operate to prevent the wheels

from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid

obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may

result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec-

tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a

computer. The computer has a built-in

diagnostic feature that tests the system

each time you start the engine and move

the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may

hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal. This is normal and

does not indicate a malfunction. If the

computer senses a malfunction, it switches

the ABS off and illuminates the ABS

warning light on the instrument panel.

The brake system then operates normally,

but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the

vehicle checked by an INFINITI retailer.

Starting and driving 5-99

5-100 Starting and driving

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6

MPH (5 to 10 km/h).

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic

pressure. This action is similar to pumping

the brakes very quickly. You may feel a

pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise from under the hood or feel a

vibration from the actuator when it is

operating. This is normal and indicates

that the ABS is operating properly. How-

ever, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care is

required while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

uses various sensors to monitor driver

inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain

driving conditions, the VDC system helps

to perform the following functions.

. Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

. Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip based

on vehicle speed (traction control func-

tion).

. Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in

the following conditions:

— understeer (vehicle tends to not

follow the steered path despite

increased steering input)

— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving condi-

tions).

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it

cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in

all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the VDC

warning light

in the instrument panel

flashes so note the following:

. The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required

to help keep the vehicle on the steered

path.

. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration

from under the hood. This is normal

and indicates that the VDC system is

working properly.

. Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn-

ing light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

VDC warning light

illuminates in the

instrument panel. The VDC system auto-

matically turns off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The VDC off indicator

illuminates to indicate the VDC system is

off. When the VDC switch is used to turn off

the system, the VDC system still operates

to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non slipping drive

wheel. The VDC warning light

flashes if

this occurs. All other VDC functions are off,

except for rise-up and build-up and brake

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

force distribution, and the VDC warning

light

will not flash. The VDC system is

automatically reset to on when the ignition

switch is placed in the off position then

back to the on position.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn-

ing light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic

feature that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle

forward or in reverse at a slow speed.

When the self-test occurs, you may hear a

“clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (if so

equipped)

This system senses driving based on the

driver’s steering and acceleration/braking

patterns, and controls brake pressure at

individual wheels and engine output to

help smooth vehicle response.

When the drive mode selector switch is set

to the “SPORT” mode, the amount of brake

control provided by active trace control is

reduced.

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off

the VDC system, the active trace control

system is also turned off.

If the active trace control is not functioning

properly, the IBA OFF indicator light illumi-

nates in the instrument panel.

RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP

The system gradually adjusts braking

power during normal braking to help

provide an enhanced brake feel.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns,

the system optimizes the distribution of

force to each of the four wheels depending

on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

. The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not

prevent accidents due to abrupt steering

operation at high speeds or by careless

or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce

vehicle speed and be especially careful

when driving and cornering on slippery

surfaces and always drive carefully.

. The active trace control (if so equipped),

rise-up and build-up and brake force

distribution systems may not be effec-

tive depending on the driving condition.

Always drive carefully and attentively.

. Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock

absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer

bars, bushings and wheels are not

INFINITI recommended for your vehicle

or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC

system may not operate properly. This

could adversely affect vehicle handling

performance, and the VDC warning light

may illuminate.

. If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not INFINITI

recommended or are extremely deterio-

rated, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the VDC warning light

may illuminate.

. If engine control related parts are not

INFINITI recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC warning light

may illuminate.

. When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

Starting and driving 5-101

5-102 Starting and driving

erly and the VDC warning light may

illuminate. Do not drive on these types

of roads.

. When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the VDC warning light

may

illuminate. This is not a malfunction.

Restart the engine after driving onto a

stable surface.

. If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the VDC warning light

may illumi-

nate.

. The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

WARNING

. Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from

moving backward on a hill. Always drive

carefully and attentively. Depress the

brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped

on a steep hill. Be especially careful

when stopped on a hill on frozen or

muddy roads. Failure to prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards may

result in a loss of control of the vehicle

and possible serious injury or death.

. The hill start assist system is not

designed to hold the vehicle at a

standstill on a hill. Depress the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a

steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the

vehicle to roll backwards and may result

in a collision or serious personal injury.

. The hill start assist system may not

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards on a hill under all load or road

conditions. Always be prepared to de-

press the brake pedal to prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to

do so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically

keeps the brakes applied to help prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards in the

time it takes the driver to release the brake

pedal and apply the accelerator when the

vehicle is stopped on a hill.

The hill start assist system will operate

automatically under the following condi-

tions:

. The transmission is shifted to a forward

or reverse gear.

. The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.

After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to

roll back and the hill start assist system

will stop operating completely.

The hill start assist system will not operate

when the transmission is shifted to the N

(Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat

and level road.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

The 4 Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system is

an electronically controlled four-wheel

steering system.

Depending on the vehicle speed and

steering angle, the angles of the front

and rear wheels are adjusted by the 4WAS

system to help improve driving perfor-

mance.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

4WAS function will stop but the ordinary

two-wheel steering system will operate

normally. The “4WAS” warning light will

illuminate. If the light illuminates while you

are driving, contact an INFINITI retailer for

repair.

The steering wheel may be slightly turned

even when driving on a straight road due to

a protection mechanism for the 4WAS

system. This is not a malfunction. The

steering wheel will return to the normal

position after the protection mechanism

deactivates.

The protection mechanism activates under

the following conditions:

. The steering wheel is operated forcibly

when it is hard to operate or the tires

are blocked by obstacles.

. The steering wheel is continuously

operated when the vehicle is parked

or being driven at extremely low speed.

. The steering wheel is forcibly turned

beyond its operation limits.

. The battery voltage is reduced.

Repeated steering maneuvers that may

activate the protection mechanism will

damage the 4WAS system.

WARNING

The 4WAS system, although a sophisticated

device, cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. Ultimately the responsibility for

safety of self and others rests in the hands

of the driver. Therefore only through atten-

tive and careful driving methods can the

4WAS system be fully appreciated and

safety optimized.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer through the key hole. If the lock

becomes frozen, heat the key before

inserting it into the key hole or use the

Intelligent Key system.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

outside temperature will drop below 328F

(08C), check antifreeze to assure proper

winter protection. For additional informa-

tion, see “Engine cooling system” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-

tion.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, see “Battery” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

Starting and driving 5-103

4 WHEEL ACTIVE STEER (4WAS) SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-104 Starting and driving

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system, in-

cluding the engine block. Refill before

operating the vehicle. For details, see

“Engine cooling system” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your

vehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITI

recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or

ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Consult an INFINITI retailer for the tire

type, size, speed rating and availability

information.

For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However, some

U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohi-

bit their use. Check local, state and

provincial laws before installing studded

tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see

“Tire chains” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

For all-wheel drive

If you install snow tires, they must also be

the same size, brand, construction and

tread pattern on all four wheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to

remove ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of

snowdrifts.

. Extra window washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

. Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

. Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

. Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

. Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise clear

road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is

seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try

not to brake while on the ice, and avoid

any sudden steering maneuvers.

. Do not use the cruise control on slippery

roads.

. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases

under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of

the exhaust pipe and from around your

vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist in

cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 208F

(−78C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be

plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours,

depending on outside temperatures, to

properly warm the engine coolant. Use

an appropriate timer to turn the engine

block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away

from moving parts.

WARNING

. Do not use your engine block heater with

an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-

pronged adapter. You can be seriously

injured by an electrical shock if you use

an ungrounded connection.

. Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least 10A.

Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper

extension cord or a grounded outlet can

result in a fire or electrical shock and

cause serious personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-105

5-106 Starting and driving

SAA3004

This system uses microphones

located

inside the vehicle to detect engine boom-

ing sound. The system then automatically

produces a muted engine booming sound

through the speakers

and woofer

(if

so equipped) to reduce engine booming

sound.

NOTE:

To operate the active noise control system

properly:

. Do not cover the speakers or woofer.

. Do not cover the microphones.

. Do not change or modify speakers

including the woofer and any audio

related parts such as the amplifier.

. Do not make any modification including

sound deadening or modifications

around the microphones or speakers.

ACTIVE NOISE CONTROL

6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program .............................. 6-2

Emergency engine shut off .................................. 6-2

Flat tire................................................................ 6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).......... 6-2

Changing a flat tire ......................................... 6-3

Jump starting....................................................... 6-8

Push starting .................................................... 6-10

If your vehicle overheats ................................... 6-11

Towing your vehicle .......................................... 6-12

Towing recommended by INFINITI................. 6-13

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ..... 6-15

6-2 In case of emergency

In the event of a roadside emergency,

Roadside Assistance Service is available to

you. Please refer to your Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside

Assistance Information Booklet (Canada)

for details.

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation, while driving perform the follow-

ing procedure:

. Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times, or

. Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE

PRESSURE warning appears in the dot

matrix liquid crystal display, one or more

of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn

you of it by the low tire pressure warning

light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16

MPH (25 km/h). For more details, see

“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “Tire Pressure Mon-

itoring System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates or LOW PRESSURE informa-

tion is displayed on the monitor screen

while driving, avoid sudden steering

maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop the vehicle as soon as

possible. Driving with under-inflated

tires may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire fail-

ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury. Check

the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust

the tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while driving

after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire

may be flat. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning light

will flash for approximately 1 minute.

The light will remain on after 1 minute.

Contact your INFINITI retailer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

. Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by INFINITI could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-

tions below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road

and away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position.

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

. Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the automatic transmission

into P (Park).

. Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

In case of emergency 6-3

6-4 In case of emergency

MCE0001A

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks

at both the front

and back of the wheel diagonally opposite

the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from

moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

SCE0881

SCE0882

Getting the spare tire and tools

Raise the trunk floor cover

using the

tab

Remove jacking tools located inside the

trunk as illustrated.

Remove the cap

holding the spare tire.

Jacking up the vehicle and remov-

ing the damaged tire

WARNING

. Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

. Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

. Use the correct jack-up points. Never use

any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

. Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

. Never use blocks on or under the jack.

. Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause

the vehicle to move. This is especially

true for vehicles with limited slip differ-

entials.

. Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

CE1089-A

Jack-up point

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the

jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up

point. Align the jack head between the

two notches in the front or the rear as

shown. Also fit the groove of the jack

head between the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

In case of emergency 6-5

6-6 In case of emergency

SCE0504

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns

by turning counterclockwise with the

wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the

wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire

clears the ground. To lift the vehicle,

securely hold the jack lever and rod

with both hands as shown above.

Remove the wheel nuts, and then

remove the tire.

SCE0661

Installing the spare tire

The T-type spare tire is designed for

emergency use. (See specific instructions

under the heading “Wheels and tires” in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.)

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the

sequence as illustrated (

) until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence as

illustrated. Lower the vehicle comple-

tely.

WARNING

. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tigh-

tened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to

become loose or come off. This could

cause an accident.

. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

. Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-

tened to specification at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specifications at each

lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD

pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked

for three hours or more or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on

the Tire and Loading Information

label affixed to the driver side center

pillar.

SCE0883

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking

equipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk

floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

. Always make sure that the spare tire and

jacking equipment are properly secured

after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

In case of emergency 6-7

6-8 In case of emergency

. The T-type spare tire and small size

spare tire are designed for emergency

use. See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-

able. Please see your Warranty Information

Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card

for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or

Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).

To start your engine with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below

must be followed.

WARNING

. If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

. Explosive hydrogen gas is always pre-

sent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep

all sparks and flames away from the

battery.

. Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulphuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with anything,

immediately flush the contacted area

with water.

. Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

. The booster battery must be rated at 12

volts. Use of an improperly rated battery

can damage your vehicle.

. Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

. Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any time.

Keep hands and other objects away from

it.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-

able. Please see your Warranty Information

Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card

for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or

Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).

JUMP STARTING

SCE0886

VK56VD engine

SCE0884

VQ37VHR engine

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failure

to do so could result in damage to the

charging system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle

, position the two vehicles

(

and

) to bring their batteries

into close proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector

lever to the P (Park) position. Switch off

all unnecessary electrical systems

(light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with a

firmly wrung out moist cloth

reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence

as illustrated (

For models with a steering wheel lock

mechanism: If the battery is discon-

nected or discharged, the steering

wheel will lock and cannot be turned.

Supply power using jumper cables

before pushing the ignition switch

In case of emergency 6-9

6-10 In case of emergency

and disengaging the steering lock.

CAUTION

. Always connect positive (+) to positive

(+) and negative (−) to body ground (as

illustrated) − not to the battery.

. Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that clamps do not contact

any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle

at about 2,000 rpm, and

start the engine of the vehicle being

jump started

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not star t right away, push the ignition

switch to the OFF position and wait 10

seconds before trying again.

7. After starti ng your engine, carefully

disconnect the negative cable and then

the positive cable (

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).

Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to

cover the vent holes as it may be

contaminated with corrosive acid.

9. Put the battery cover on.

Do not attempt to start the engine by

pushing.

CAUTION

. Automatic transmission models cannot

be push-started or tow-started. Attempt-

ing to do so may cause transmission

damage.

. Three way catalyst equipped models

should not be started by pushing since

the three way catalyst may be damaged.

. Never try to start the vehicle by towing

it; when the engine starts, the forward

surge could cause the vehicle to collide

with the tow vehicle.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-

able. Please see your Warranty Information

Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card

for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or

Warranty & Roadside Assistance Informa-

tion Booklet (Canada).

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION

. Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

. To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while the

engine is still hot. When the radiator cap

is removed, pressurized hot water will

spurt out, possibly causing serious

injury.

. Do not open the hood if steam is coming

out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take

the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,

apply the parking brake and move the

selector lever to the P (Park) position.

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the climate control. Open all

the windows, move the heater or air

conditioner temperature control to

maximum hot and fan control to high

speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by

climbing a long hill on a hot day, run

the engine at a fast idle (approximately

1,500 rpm) until the temperature gauge

indication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. (If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off

the engine.) Do not open the hood

further until no steam or coolant can be

seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine,

stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan

is running. The radiator hoses and

radiator should not leak water. If cool-

ant is leaking or the cooling fan does

not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan

can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the reservoir tank with

the engine running. Add coolant to the

reservoir tank if necessary. Have your

vehicle repaired at the nearest INFINITI

retailer.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-

able. Please see your Warranty Information

Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card

for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or

Warranty & Roadside Assistance Informa-

tion Booklet (Canada).

In case of emergency 6-11

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-12 In case of emergency

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-

vincial in Canada) and local regulations for

towing must be followed. Incorrect towing

equipment could damage your vehicle.

Towing instructions are available from an

INFINITI retailer. Local service operators are

familiar with the applicable laws and

procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage

to your vehicle, INFINITI recommends that

you have a service operator tow your

vehicle. It is advisable to have the service

operator carefully read the following pre-

cautions.

WARNING

. Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

. Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

. When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any unit is damaged, dollies must be

used.

. Always attach safety chains before tow-

ing.

For information about towing your vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle (RV), see

“Flat towing” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section of this

manual.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-

able. Please see your Warranty Information

Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D. Card

for the toll-free number to call (U.S.) or

Warranty & Roadside Assistance Informa-

tion Booklet (Canada).

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

SCE0788

Two-wheel drive models

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed

truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

. Never tow automatic transmission mod-

els with the rear wheels on the ground

or four wheels on the ground (forward or

backward), as this may cause serious

and expensive damage to the transmis-

sion. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle

with the front wheels raised, always use

towing dollies under the rear wheels.

. When towing rear wheel drive models

with the front wheels on the ground or

on towing dollies: Push the ignition

switch to the ACC or ON position, and

secure the steering wheel in a straight-

ahead position with a rope or similar

device. For models with a steering wheel

lock mechanism: Never secure the steer-

ing wheel by selecting the LOCK posi-

tion. This may damage the steering lock

mechanism.

In case of emergency 6-13

6-14 In case of emergency

SCE0488

All-wheel drive models

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

models

INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or the

vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as

illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow Intelligent AWD models with any

of the wheels on the ground as this may

cause serious and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

SCE0885

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

. Do not spin your tires at high speed. This

could cause them to explode and result

in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle

could also overheat and be damaged.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device

designed specifically for vehicle recovery.

Always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Front:

1. Remove the cover with a suitable tool.

2. Securely install the vehicle recovery

hook

stored with jacking tools as

illustrated. Attach the tow strap to the

recovery hook.

Make sure that the hook is properly

secured in the original place after use.

Rear:

Do not use the tie down hook

for

towing or vehicle recovery.

CAUTION

. Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to the vehicle recovery hooks or

main structural members of the vehicle.

Otherwise, the vehicle body will be

damaged.

. Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free

a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.

. Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle tie

downs or recovery hooks.

. Always pull the cable straight out from

the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the

vehicle at an angle.

. Pulling devices should be routed so they

do not touch any part of the suspension,

steering, brake or cooling systems.

. Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in

vehicle towing or recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

Shift back and forth between R

(reverse) and D (drive).

Apply the accelerator as little as

possible to maintain the rocking

motion.

Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D.

Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional towing

service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

6-16 In case of emergency

MEMO

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................................. 7-2

Washing.......................................................... 7-2

Waxing............................................................ 7-2

Removing spots............................................... 7-3

Underbody ...................................................... 7-3

Glass............................................................... 7-3

Wheels............................................................ 7-3

Chrome parts .................................................. 7-4

Tire dressing ................................................... 7-4

Cleaning interior ................................................. 7-4

Air fresheners ................................................ 7-5

Moonroof sunshade....................................... 7-5

Floor mats ..................................................... 7-5

Seat belts...................................................... 7-6

Corrosion protection............................................ 7-7

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ........................................... 7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate

of corrosion ................................................... 7-7

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........... 7-7

7-2 Appearance and care

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surface, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

. after a rainfall to prevent possible

damage from acid rain

. after driving on coastal roads

. when contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface

. when dust or mud builds up on the

surface

Whenever possible, store or park your

vehicle inside a garage or in a covered

area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park

in a shady area or protect the vehicle with

a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge

and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle

thoroughly using a mild soap, a special

vehicle soap or general purpose dishwash-

ing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

. Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their

appearance, and also could cause them

not to function properly. Always check

with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

. Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

. Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing caked-on

dirt or other foreign substances so the

paint surface is not scratched or da-

maged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt.

Therefore, these areas must be regularly

cleaned. Make sure that the drain holes in

the lower edge of the door are open. Spray

water under the body and in the wheel

wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint

surface by using a damp chamois to dry

the vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove built-

up wax residue and to avoid a weathered

appearance before reapplying wax.

An INFINITI retailer can assist you in

choosing the proper product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

. Do not use a wax containing any

abrasives, cutting compounds or clea-

ners that may damage the vehicle

finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polish-

ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish

may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the paint surface to avoid lasting

damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at an INFINITI

retailer or any automotive accessory

stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter,

the underbody must be cleaned regularly.

This will prevent dirt and salt from building

up and causing the acceleration of corro-

sion on the underbody and suspension.

Before the winter period and again in the

spring, the underseal must be checked

and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is

normal for glass to become coated with a

film after the vehicle is parked in the hot

sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will

easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant clea-

ners. They could damage the electrical

conductors, radio antenna elements or rear

window defroster elements.

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

. Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside

of the vehicle is washed.

. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

. INFINITI recommends that the road

wheels be waxed to protect against

road salt in areas where it is used

during winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

Aluminum alloy wheels

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in

a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is

used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not

removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid stain-

ing or discoloring the wheels:

. Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

. Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

Appearance and care 7-3

7-4 Appearance and care

ambient temperature.

. Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the

finish.

TIRE DRESSING

INFINITI does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce dis-

coloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is

applied to the tires, it may react with the

coating and form a compound. This com-

pound may come off the tire while driving

and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take

the following precautions:

. Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more

easily with an oil-based tire dressing.

. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to

help prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-

cult to remove).

. Wipe off excess tire dressing using a

dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing

is completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

. Allow the tire dressing to dry as

recommended by tire dressing manu-

facturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using

a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.

Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a

clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap

solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft

cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classification

sensors. This can also affect the operation

of the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR

CAUTION

. Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material.

. Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to the leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not use

saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils,

cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or

ammonia-based cleaners as they may

damage the leather’s natural finish.

. Only use fabric protectors approved by

INFINITI.

. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following pre-

cautions:

. Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they

contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place

the air freshener in a location that

allows it to hang free and not contact

an interior surface.

. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufac-

turer’s instructions before using air fresh-

eners.

MOONROOF SUNSHADE

The moonroof sunshade is made from a

suede material.

Clean the sunshade material as follows:

CAUTION

To help prevent damaging the sunshade

while cleaning:

. Do not rub the material with a cloth.

Doing so can damage the surface of the

material or cause a stain to spread.

. Never use benzine, thinner or any similar

chemical to clean the suede. This may

discolor the sunshade and damage the

surface.

. Clean water based stains by patting the

surface with a clean soft cloth dampened

in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth

onto the surface to remove as much

dampness as possible and then let air

dry.

. Clean oil based stains by patting the

surface with a clean soft cloth dampened

in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth

onto the surface to remove as much

dampness as possible and then let air

dry.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that

may result in a collision or injury:

. NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver front

position.

. Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats

specifically designed for use in your

vehicle model. See your INFINITI retailer

for more information.

. Properly position the mats in the floor-

well using the floor mat positioning aid.

See “Floor mat positioning aid” later in

this section.

Appearance and care 7-5

7-6 Appearance and care

The use of INFINITI floor mats can extend

the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be

maintained with regular cleaning and

replaced if they become excessively worn.

SAI0050

Front (example)

Floor mat positioning aid

This model includes front floor mat brack-

ets to act as floor mat positioning aid.

INFINITI floor mats have been specially

designed for your vehicle model. The front

floor mats have grommet holes in them. To

install, simply position the mat by placing

the floor mat bracket through the floor mat

grommet hole while centering the mat in

the floor pan contour.

Periodically check to make certain that the

mats are properly positioned.

SAI0051

Bracket positions

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat brackets.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry

completely before using them.

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemi-

cal solvents to clean the seat belts, since

these materials may severely weaken the

seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI-

BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION

. The accumulation of moisture-retaining

dirt and debris in body panel sections,

cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-

ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle, and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those

areas where the temperatures stay above

freezing where atmospheric pollution ex-

ists, or where road salt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the

rate of corrosion to those parts which are

not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use will accelerate the corrosion process.

Road salt will also accelerate the disinte-

gration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

. Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

. Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

. Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash

with water as soon as possible.

Appearance and care 7-7

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-8 Appearance and care

CAUTION

. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris

from the passenger compartment by

washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt

with a vacuum cleaner.

. Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor

pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, consult an INFINITI retailer.

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirement .................................... 8-2

Scheduled maintenance .................................. 8-2

General maintenance....................................... 8-2

Where to go for service ................................... 8-2

General maintenance........................................... 8-3

Explanation of maintenance items ................... 8-3

Maintenance precautions..................................... 8-5

Engine compartment check locations ................... 8-7

VK56VD engine ............................................... 8-7

VQ37VHR engine ............................................. 8-9

Engine cooling system....................................... 8-11

Checking engine coolant level ....................... 8-12

Changing engine coolant............................... 8-12

Engine oil .......................................................... 8-13

Checking engine oil level............................... 8-13

Changing engine oil and filter ....................... 8-13

Automatic transmission fluid ............................. 8-16

Power steering fluid........................................... 8-16

Brake fluid......................................................... 8-17

Brake fluid .................................................... 8-17

Window washer fluid ......................................... 8-18

Battery .............................................................. 8-19

Jump starting ................................................ 8-20

Variable voltage control system ......................... 8-20

Drive belts ........................................................ 8-21

Spark plugs ...................................................... 8-21

Replacing spark plugs ................................. 8-22

Air cleaner ........................................................ 8-22

Windshield wiper blades................................... 8-24

Cleaning ...................................................... 8-24

Replacing..................................................... 8-24

Brakes .............................................................. 8-25

Self-adjusting brakes ................................... 8-25

Brake pad wear warning .............................. 8-25

Fuses ................................................................ 8-26

Engine compartment.................................... 8-26

Passenger compartment............................... 8-28

Intelligent Key battery replacement ................... 8-29

Lights................................................................ 8-31

Headlights ................................................... 8-31

Exterior and interior lights ........................... 8-32

Wheels and tires............................................... 8-34

Tire pressure ............................................... 8-34

Tire labeling ................................................ 8-38

Types of tires............................................... 8-40

Tire chains................................................... 8-41

Changing wheels and tires........................... 8-41

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Your new INFINITI has been designed to

have minimum maintenance requirements

with long service intervals to save you both

time and money. However, some day-to-

day and regular maintenance is essential

to maintain your INFINITI’s fine mechanical

condition, as well as its emission and

engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make

sure that the scheduled maintenance, as

well as general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

the proper maintenance care. You are a

vital link in the maintenance chain.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

For your convenience, both required and

optional scheduled maintenance items are

described and listed in your “INFINITI

Service and Maintenance Guide”. You must

refer to that guide to ensure that necessary

maintenance is performed on your INFINITI

at regular intervals.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation. They are essential for

proper vehicle operation. It is your respon-

sibility to perform these procedures reg-

ularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and only

a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, an INFINITI retailer.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and ser viced by an

INFINITI retailer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information through techni-

cal bulletins, service tips, and in-retailer-

ship information systems. They are

completely qualified to work on INFINITI

vehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITI

retailer’s service department performs the

best job to meet the maintenance require-

ments on your vehicle — in a reliable and

economical way.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to

check for the cause or have an INFINITI

retailer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify an INFINITI retailer if you

think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, see “Maintenance precau-

tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE

ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in this

section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all

doors and the engine hood, operate

properly. Also ensure that all latches lock

securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch

pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make

sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch

is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrication

frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and

other lights are all operating properly and

installed securely. Also check headlight

aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-

ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are

missing, and check for any loose wheel

nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). If your

vehicle is equipped with different sized

tires in the front and rear, tires cannot be

rotated.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in

all tires, including the spare, to the

pressure specified. Check carefully for

damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and

cap when the tires are replaced due to

wear or age.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the

vehicle should pull to either side while

driving on a straight and level road, or if

you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,

there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing

may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada)

in the INFINITI Warranty Information Book-

let.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at

least every six months for cracks or other

damage. Have a damaged windshield

repaired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing periodic maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the pedal

does not catch or require uneven effort.

Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mechan-

ism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your

vehicle is held securely with the selector

lever in the P (Park) position without

applying any brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly

goes down further than normal, the pedal

feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take

longer to stop, see an INFINITI retailer

immediately. Keep the floor mat away from

the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only

the parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjusted, see an INFINITI

retailer.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, an-

chors, adjuster and retractors) operate

properly and smoothly, and are installed

securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,

fraying, wear or damage.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to

ensure they operate smoothly and that all

latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints move up

and down smoothly and that the locks (if

so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive free

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that

all warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly

and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example, each

time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.

It should be between the MAX and MIN

lines. Vehicles operated in high tempera-

tures or under severe condition require

frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electro-

nic accessories that consume battery

power when the engine is not running

(Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players,

etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the

brake fluid level is between the MAX and

MIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt

is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level spot and

turning off the engine. Wait more than 15

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil

pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, im-

mediately have the exhaust system in-

spected by an INFINITI retailer. (See

“Precautions when starting and driving”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section for

exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks or

if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the

cause and have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:

Check the level when the fluid is cold,

with the engine off. Check the lines for

proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks,

deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust.

It is very important to remove these

substances, otherwise rust will form on

the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around

the exhaust system. At the end of winter,

the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to

clean those areas where mud and dirt may

accumulate. For additional information,

see “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appear-

ance and care” section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there

is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The

following are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

. Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply

the parking brake securely and block the

wheels to prevent the vehicle from

moving. Move the selector lever to P

(Park).

. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

. Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

. Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component har-

nesses disconnected while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

. If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

. It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

. Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

. If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage, be

sure there is proper ventilation for

exhaust gases to escape.

. Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

. Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from fuel tank and the

battery.

. Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come on

at any time without warning, even if the

ignition key is in the OFF position and

the engine is not running. To avoid

injury, always disconnect the negative

battery cable before working near the

fan.

. The fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by an INFINITI retailer because

the fuel lines are under high pressure

even when the engine is off.

CAUTION

. Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil

and coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids

can damage the environment. Always

conform to local regulations for disposal

of vehicle fluid.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section gives instructions regarding only

those items which are relatively easy for an

owner to perform.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is also

available. (See “Owner’s Manual/Service

Manual order information” in the “9.

Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion.)

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect your warranty coverage. If in

doubt about any servicing, we recommend

that it be done by an INFINITI retailer.

SDI2569

VK56VD ENGINE

To remove the engine compartment cover,

unhook the clips

located as illustrated.

Loosen the bolts

and then pull the

cover upward.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI2538

1. Battery

2. Fuse/fusible link holder

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Window washer fluid reservoir

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Radiator filler cap

9. Engine coolant reservoir

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Drive belts

12. Fuse/fusible link holder

SDI2551

VQ37VHR ENGINE

To remove the engine compartment cover,

unhook the clips located as illustrated.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SDI2537

1. Battery

2. Fuse/fusible link holder

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Window washer fluid reservoir

6. Power steering fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Radiator filler cap

9. Engine coolant reservoir

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Drive belts

12. Fuse/fusible link holder

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-

round anti-freeze and coolant protection.

The anti-freeze solution contains rust and

corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine

cooling system additives are not neces-

sary.

WARNING

. Never remove the radiator cap when the

engine is hot. Wait until the engine and

radiator cool down. Serious burns could

be caused by high pressure fluid escap-

ing from the radiator. See precautions in

“If your vehicle overheats” in the “6. In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

. The radiator is equipped with a pressure

type radiator cap. To prevent engine

damage, use only a genuine NISSAN

radiator cap.

CAUTION

. Never use any cooling system additives

such as radiator sealer. Additives may

clog the cooling system and cause

damage to the engine, transmission

and/or cooling system.

. When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva-

lent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-

freeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to

provide antifreeze protection to −348F

(−378C). If additional freeze protection is

needed due to weather where you

operate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an equivalent

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used,

follow the coolant manufacture’s instruc-

tions to maintain minimum antifreeze

protection to −348F(−378C). The use of

Infiniti M - 2013 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info